BX30 Fill

BX30D Fill
Filling and Packing Controller
Technical Manual
Contents:

1. Safety Instructions ...................................................................................6

2. Introduction .............................................................................................8
2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Variants ......................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3 Ordering ........................................................................................................................................ 9
2.4 Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.5 Housing ....................................................................................................................................... 16
2.6 Documentation ............................................................................................................................ 16
3. Terminology ...........................................................................................17
4. The Front View and Key Functions..........................................................19
4.1 Display ........................................................................................................................................ 19
4.2 Key Functions .............................................................................................................................. 21
5. Installation .............................................................................................23
5.1 Recommendations ....................................................................................................................... 23
5.1.1 Environment ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.1.2 Mechanical Installation Recommendations ................................................................................... 23
5.1.3 Cabling Recommendations .......................................................................................................... 23
5.1.4 Electrical Connection Recommendations ...................................................................................... 24
5.2 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 25
Step 1: Preliminary Preparations ................................................................................................ 25
Step 2: Mechanical Installation .................................................................................................. 25
Step 3a: Analogue Load Cell Connection (Only BX30 Fill) .............................................................. 25
Step 3b: Digital Load Cell Connection (Only BX30D Fill) ................................................................ 27
Step 4: Digital Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................. 28
Step 5: Feeding control with Analogue output ............................................................................ 30
Step 6: RS232C Serial Port ........................................................................................................ 31
Step 7: RS485 Serial Port .......................................................................................................... 32
Step 8: Ethernet TCP/IP .............................................................................................................. 32
Step 9: USB Port ........................................................................................................................ 33
Step 10: Power Source Connection and Grounding....................................................................... 33
Step 11: Set up the Scale and Calibration .................................................................................... 35
5.3 Commissioning ............................................................................................................................ 35
5.4 Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................... 36
5.5 Disposal ...................................................................................................................................... 36
6. Features ................................................................................................37
6.1 Basic Weighing Functions ............................................................................................................ 37
6.2 Advanced Functions..................................................................................................................... 38
6.3 Advanced Filling functions with Programmable keys .................................................................... 41
6.4 Back up / Restore with SD card ................................................................................................... 43
6.5 IndFace2X software for set-up, back up and restore .................................................................... 43
7. Filling Modes .........................................................................................44
7.1 [OPEN] Open Container Filling .................................................................................................... 45
7.1.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 48
7.2 [BUNG] Below Bung hole and Above Level Filling ....................................................................... 50
7.2.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 53

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 1 of 432

7.3 [BOTT] Container Filling from Bottom ......................................................................................... 55
7.3.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 59
7.4 [PACK] Packing Scale ................................................................................................................ 61
7.4.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 64
7.5 [BAG ] Bagging Scale ................................................................................................................. 66
7.5.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 69
7.6 [BIG ] Big Bag filling machine .................................................................................................... 71
7.6.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 73
7.7 [VENT] Valve Mount Type Bag filling machine............................................................................. 75
7.7.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 77
7.8 [1BAG] Bagging machine with single weighing hopper ............................................................... 79
7.8.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 82
7.9 [nBAG] Bagging machine with up to 16 weighing hoppers ......................................................... 84
7.9.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 87
7.10 [nPAC] Packing machine with up to 16 weighing hoppers .......................................................... 90
7.10.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 93
7.11 [TANK] Fill the Container from Tank Scale .................................................................................. 96
7.11.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................ 99
7.12 [WOUT] Weight-in / Weight-out ................................................................................................ 101
7.12.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs .......................................................................................................... 103
8. Operation Methods...............................................................................105
8.1 Filling Methods .......................................................................................................................... 105
8.2 Taring Types .............................................................................................................................. 106
8.3 Feeding Types ........................................................................................................................... 106
8.4 Adjustment technics of feeding cut-offs ..................................................................................... 107
8.5 Analogue output for material feeding control .............................................................................. 108
8.6 Preact Adjustment ..................................................................................................................... 108
8.7 Master Slave Operation at Multi head Filling .............................................................................. 109
8.8 Multicycle Packing or Bagging ................................................................................................... 111
9. Receipt ................................................................................................112
9.1 Weight Value Entry Types........................................................................................................... 112
9.2 Filling Weight Entry Shortcut ...................................................................................................... 112
9.3 Feeding cut-off Entry Shortcut ................................................................................................... 113
9.4 Receipt Build ............................................................................................................................. 113
10. Receipt Memory ...................................................................................115
10.1 Receipt Edit in to the Receipt Memory........................................................................................ 115
10.2 Receipt Select............................................................................................................................ 115
10.3 Receipt Copy ............................................................................................................................. 116
10.4 Delete Receipt ........................................................................................................................... 116
11. Batch Filling .........................................................................................117
11.1 Batch Quantity Filling ................................................................................................................. 117
11.2 Batch Total Filling ...................................................................................................................... 117
11.3 Bulk Total Filling ........................................................................................................................ 118
12. Selectable Inputs / Outputs ..................................................................120
12.1 Selectable Inputs ....................................................................................................................... 120
12.2 Selectable Outputs..................................................................................................................... 121
13. Identification ........................................................................................129

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 2 of 432

14. SmartAPP ............................................................................................131
15. Serial Data Outputs ..............................................................................133
15.1 Continuous Data Output ............................................................................................................. 133
15.2 Fast continuous data output ....................................................................................................... 134
15.3 Print Mode ................................................................................................................................. 134
15.3.1 Data transfer after filling ............................................................................................................ 134
15.3.2 EPL format ................................................................................................................................. 136
15.3.3 Test Mode ................................................................................................................................. 136
15.4 BSI Data Structure for dialog with PC ......................................................................................... 137
16. Filling Reports ......................................................................................138
16.1 Accumulations ........................................................................................................................... 138
16.1.1 Erasable Accumulation .............................................................................................................. 138
16.1.2 Accumulation of material at batch / bulk fillings ......................................................................... 139
16.1.3 Current day’s Accumulation ....................................................................................................... 139
16.1.4 Yesterday’s Accumulation .......................................................................................................... 140
16.1.5 Grand Total ................................................................................................................................ 140
16.2 Statistical Report ....................................................................................................................... 141
17. Programming and Calibration ...............................................................143
17.1 Entering to the Programming and Calibration ............................................................................. 143
17.2 Quick Access Parameter Blocks used Frequently ....................................................................... 144
17.3 Exit from Programming .............................................................................................................. 144
17.4 Programming and Parameters ................................................................................................... 145
18. Sealing of Approved Scale....................................................................193
19. Trouble Shooting ..................................................................................194
19.1 Display Messages at Filling Process ........................................................................................... 194
19.2 Filling Process Related Errors..................................................................................................... 195
19.3 General Error Codes ................................................................................................................... 196
20. Appendix 1. Digital Inputs and Outputs ................................................200
20.1 Hardware and connection of the digital inputs and outputs ........................................................ 200
21. Appendix 3. Alibi Memory ...................................................................202
21.1 Installation of Alibi SD card ........................................................................................................ 202
21.2 Activating Alibi Memory ............................................................................................................. 203
21.3 How is the Data Recorded into the Alibi Memory? ...................................................................... 203
21.4 Recall Data from Alibi Memory ................................................................................................... 203
22. Appendix 4. Installation of SD Card .....................................................206
23. Appendix 5. BSI Protocol to Interface with PC and PLC ........................207
23.1 BSI-Base Commands ................................................................................................................ 209
23.2 BSI-PRO Commands ................................................................................................................. 214
24. Appendix 6. Continuous Data Formats .................................................215
25. Appendix 7. Modbus RTU ....................................................................219
25.1 Modbus RTU Data Structure ....................................................................................................... 219
26. Appendix 8. Ethernet TCP/IP................................................................236
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 3 of 432
26.1 Ethernet Parameters .................................................................................................................. 236
26.2 Modbus TCP Data Structure ....................................................................................................... 237
27. Appendix 9. Profibus DP (Only BX30 Fill PB) .....................................254
27.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 254
27.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 255
27.3 GSD Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 255
27.4 Profibus DP Data Structure ........................................................................................................ 256
28. Appendix 10. Profinet (Only BX30 Fill PN) .........................................275
28.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 276
28.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 277
28.3 Profinet Parameters ................................................................................................................... 277
28.4 GSDML Configuration................................................................................................................. 277
28.5 Profinet Data Structure .............................................................................................................. 279
29. Appendix 11. CANopen (Only BX30 Fill CO).......................................298
29.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 298
29.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 299
29.3 EDS Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 299
29.4 CANopen Data Structure ............................................................................................................ 301
30. Appendix 12. EtherNet/IP (Only BX30 Fill EI) .....................................320
30.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 321
30.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 322
30.3 EtherNet/IP Parameters.............................................................................................................. 322
30.4 EDS Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 322
30.5 EtherNet/IP Data Structure ......................................................................................................... 324
31. Appendix 13. EtherCAT (Only BX30 Fill EC) .......................................343
31.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 344
31.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 344
31.3 ESI Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 345
31.4 EtherCAT Data Structure ............................................................................................................ 346
32. Appendix 14. CC-Link (Only BX30 Fill CC).........................................365
32.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 365
32.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 366
32.3 CC-Link Configuration ................................................................................................................ 366
32.4 CC-Link Data Structure .............................................................................................................. 368
33. Appendix 15. Powerlink (Only BX30 Fill PL) ......................................387
33.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 388
33.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 389
33.3 XDD Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 389
33.4 Powerlink Data Structure ........................................................................................................... 390
34. Appendix 16. CC-Link IE Field (Only BX30 Fill IE) ..............................409
34.1 Electrical Connection ................................................................................................................. 409
34.2 Data Format............................................................................................................................... 410
34.3 CC-Link IE Configuration ............................................................................................................ 410
34.4 CC-Link Data Structure .............................................................................................................. 412

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 4 of 432

RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or
by any means, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of BAYKON A.S.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. While every
precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book, BAYKON assumes no responsibility for errors
or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information
contained herein.
The information herein is believed to be both accurate and reliable. BAYKON, however, would be obliged
to be informed if any errors occur. BAYKON cannot accept any liability for direct or indirect damages
resulting from the use of this manual.
BAYKON reserves the right to revise this manual and alter its content without notification at any time.
Neither BAYKON nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for
damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident,
misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or
failure to strictly comply with BAYKON operating and maintenance instructions.
BAYKON shall not be liable against any damages or problems arising from the use of any options or any
consumable products other than those designated as Original BAYKON Products.
NOTICE: The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

Copyright © 2012 by BAYKON A.S. Istanbul, Turkey

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 5 of 432

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION! READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING OR SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT.
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY. SAVE THIS MANUAL FOR FUTURE
REFERENCE. DO NOT ALLOW UNTRAINED PERSONNEL TO OPERATE, CLEAN, INSPECT,
MAINTAIN, SERVICE, OR TAMPER WITH THIS EQUIPMENT. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THIS
EQUIPMENT FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE CLEANING OR PERFORMING
MAINTENANCE. CALL BAYKON ENGINEERING FOR PARTS, INFORMATION, AND SERVICE.

WARNING! ONLY PERMIT QUALIFIED PERSONNEL TO SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.

EXERCISE CARE WHEN MAKING CHECKS, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS THAT MUST BE
MADE WITH POWER ON. FAILING TO OBSERVE THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
BODILY HARM.

WARNING! FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST SHOCK HAZARD CONNECT TO

PROPERLY GROUNDED OUTLET ONLY. DO NOT REMOVE THE GROUND PRONG.

WARNING! DISCONNECT ALL POWER TO THIS UNIT BEFORE REMOVING ANY

CONNECTION, OPENING THE ENCLOSURE OR SERVICING.

WARNING! BEFORE CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING ANY INTERNAL ELECTRONIC

COMPONENTS OR INTERCONNECTING WIRING BETWEEN ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
ALWAYS REMOVE POWER AND WAIT AT LEAST THIRTY (30) SECONDS BEFORE ANY
CONNECTIONS OR DISCONNECTIONS ARE MADE. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OR DESTRUCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT OR
BODILY HARM.

CAUTION! OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 6 of 432

 EU Declaration of Conformity

AB Uygunluk Beyanı

BAYKON ENDÜSTRİYEL KONTROL SİSTEMLERİ SAN. VE TİC. A.Ş.

Kimya Sanayicileri Organize Sanayi Bölgesi Organik Cad. No:31
34956 Tepeören Tuzla/İSTANBUL TURKEY
This declaration of conformity is issued under sole responsibility of the manufacturer.
Bu uygunluk beyanı imalatçının sorumluluğu altında düzenlenmiştir.
The object of the declaration described above is in conformity with the relevant Union
harmonisation legislation:
Yukarıda belirtilen beyan konusu, ilgili şu AB mevzuatına uygundur:
EU Directive: Applicable Standards:
AB Yönetmelikleri: Uygulanabilir Standartlar:
Low Voltage Directive (LVD): (2014/35/EU)
Alçak Gerilim Yönetmeliği (LVD): (2014/35/AB)
EN 61010-1:2010 / TS EN 61010-1:2012

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)

Elektromanyetik Uyumluluk Yönetmeliği (EMC): (2014/30/AB)
EN 61326-1:2013 / TS EN 61326-1:2013

Measuring Instruments Directive: (2014/32/EU)

Ölçüm Aletleri Yönetmeliği: (2014/32/AB)
OIML R61

RoHS Directive: (2011/65/EU)

RoHS Yönetmeliği
EN 50581:2012 / TS EN 50581:2013

Non-Automatic Weighing Instrument Directive: (2014/31/EU)

Otomatik Olmayan Tartı Aletleri Yönetmeliği: (2014/31/AB)
EN 45501:2015 / TS EN 45501:2015

Type/Tip BX30 Fill…

EU Type Examination 0200-NAWI-04010 MYY XXXX

AB Tip İncelemesi 0200-MID-04851 YY = The last two digits of the year. / Yılın son iki rakamı.
XXXX = The notified body number. / Onaylanmış kuruluş numarası.

Notified Body no.0200 Force Certification performed EU-type examination and issued the certificate.
AB Tip İncelemesi çalışmalarını Onaylanmış Kuruluş no.0200 Force Certification yürüterek sertifikayı düzenlemiştir.

The manufacturer’s Quality System accordant with module D is under the supervision of Notified Body no.
1259 METAS-Cert. Related certificate can be reached in below address.
Üreticinin Modül D Kalite Sistemi uygunluğu Onaylanmış Kuruluş no. 1259 METAS-Cert gözetimi altındadır. İlgili sertifikaya
aşağıdaki adresten ulaşılabilir.
www.metas.ch/certsearch
Baykon, November 2018
Kasım 2018

Quality Assurance Manager

Kalite Güvence Müdürü
Important notice for verified weighing instruments in EU countries;
AB ülkelerinde doğrulanan tartı aletleri için önemli not;

Verifiable filling instruments at the place of usage bear the preceding mark on the packing label.
Verification must be carried out by the Baykon or by another authorities firm for legal instruments. Please
M contact to Baykon.
Kullanım yerinde doğrulanabilir dolum aletleri, ambalajında yandaki işareti taşırlar. Yasal aletler için Doğrulama Baykon
veya başka yetkili kuruluş tarafından yapılmalıdır. Lütfen Baykon'la bağlantıya geçiniz.

If national regulations in individual countries limit the period of validity of the certification, the operator of such a scale
is himself responsible for its timely re-certification.
Tartı aletinin kullanıldığı ülkelerde ulusal hükümler sertifikanın geçerlilik periyodunu sınırlıyorsa, sertifikanın yenilenmesi dolum aletinin
kullanıcısının sorumluluğundadır.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 7 of 432

2. INTRODUCTION

2.1 Overview
BX30Fill filling and packing controller is economic and smart instrument for automatic gravimetric filling
machines like liquid filling, bagging machines etc. Its specific filling algorithm, custom / application specific
receipt build feature, 250 receipt record size memory, smart filling functions and master – slave operation
gives big advantage in usage.

The filling and packing machines equipped with BX30 Fill controller can be used in all kind of industrial
areas up to wet and hygienic environments with its fast and efficient cleaning build to the international
guidelines.

2.2 Variants
This panel type controller may have various variants regarding analogue or digital load cell connection, the
location of digital I/O’s and industrial interfacings. The basic instrument variants are regarding the load cell
type, digital I/O terminals and fieldbus options.

The variants of load cell type and digital I/O hardware are;

Analogue Digital With internal Without Order includes

load cell load cell digital I/O internal I/O RIO16 digital
board board I/O unit

BX30 Fill A Yes - Yes - -

BX30 Fill N Yes - - Yes -
BX30 Fill R Yes - - Yes Yes
BX30D Fill A - Yes Yes - -
BX30D Fill N - Yes - Yes -
BX30D Fill R - Yes - Yes Yes

As you will find easily from variant coding , the “ D “ letter after BX30 model name defines the digital load
cell interfacing instead of analogue load cell. The letters at the end of the basic instrument name defines the
digital I/O connection type. “ A ” letter defines the digital I/O board is Assembled in the housing, and “ N ”
letter defines the instrument do not have any digital I/O in the housing and the external digital I/O unit RIO16
is required for operation. The “ R ” letter defines ordering the BX30Fill N instrument together with RIO16
digital I/O unit as a set.

Peripheral interfacings codes are located at the end of the instrument model name as shown below.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 8 of 432

 BX30D Fill A CO
BX30D Fill A PN

BX30D Fill A CC
BX30D Fill A PB

BX30D Fill A EC

BX30D Fill A PL
BX30D Fill A EI

BX30D Fill A IE
BX30 Fill A CO
BX30 Fill A PN

BX30 Fill A CC
BX30 Fill A PB

BX30 Fill A EC

BX30 Fill A PL
BX30 Fill A EI

BX30 Fill A IE
BX30D Fill A
BX30 Fill A
Serial interface RS 232C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Serial interface RS 485 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Serial interface RS 422 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
USB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Profibus DPV1 interface - Yes - - - - - - -
CANopen interface - - - Yes - - - - -
CC-Link interface - - - - - - Yes - -
Profinet interface - - Yes - - - - - -
Ethernet interface Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
EtherNet/IP interface - - - - Yes - - - -
EtherCAT interface - - - - - Yes - - -
Powerlink interface - - - - - - - Yes -
CC-Link IE Field - - - - - - - - Yes
Modbus RTU Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Modbus TCP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Note:. Only the industrial interfaces of BX30 Fill A are shown in the table. To order any other variant you
may place N or R instead of A.

2.3 Ordering
The ordering code of the Filling controller defines all data on the instrument.

BX30D ̺ Fill ̺ A ̺ EI
Fieldbus / Interface
(Blank) : Not available.
XX : Abbreviation of the Field bus,
e.g. PN for Profinet.
Digital I/O
A : Assembled digital I/O in the housing
N : without digital I/O in the housing.
R : Ordering BX30 Fill N with RIO16 unit ( as a set )
Filling Controller
Loadcell
(Blank) : Analog Loadcell
D : Digital Loadcell

For example the ordering code of BX30 Fill with analogue load cell input, with Profinet interface and together
with the DIN rail mount digital I/O unit RIO16 is BX30 Fill R PN.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 9 of 432

Available options of the instrument variants are;

- Analogue output for feeding speed control and serial interface board.
- Sealing kit for BX30.
- Alibi memory SD card.

2.4 Specifications
Specifications
Analogue Load cell ( only BX30 Fill )
A/D converter type 24 bit Delta-Sigma ratio metric with integral analog and digital filters
Conversion rate Up to 1600 measurement values per second
Input sensitivity 0,4 μV/e approved, 0.05 μV/d non approved.
-5 mV to +19 mV approved
Analog input range
( up to -125 mV to +125 mV automatic range, non approved)
Internal resolution up to 16 000 000
Excitation 5 VDC max. 150 mA
Number of load cells Up to 8 load cells 350 Ω or 25 load cells 1100 Ω.
4- or 6-wire technique.
Connection Home cable length: maximum 1000 m/mm² for 6-wire connection between BX30 Fill
and junction box.
Digital load cell ( only BX30D Fill )
Interface RS 485
Interface baud rate Up to 57600
Connection 4 wire. Up to 500 meter.
Number of load cell Up to 24 digital load cells.
Internal resolution 200 000 counts
Excitation 12 VDC, max. 1.3 A

Scale
Range Single range, up to 3 x multi intervals, up to 3 x multi ranges.
BX30 Fill
Approval, up to 10 000 division at usage in trade, according to EN45501 and OIML R76.
Up to 300 000 division at industrial usage.
Display resolution
BX30D Fill
Maximum 20 000. Should be limited by 10% of the maximum count of the digital load
cell for accurate measurement.

BX30 Fill
Platforms /scales constructed with analogue strain gage based load cells.
Platform / Scale
BX30D Fill
Platforms /scales constructed with digital load cells.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 10 of 432

Calibration and Functions
Calibration with test weights,
eCal-electronic calibration without test weights,
Temporary zero calibration,
Calibration
Zero adjustment,
Gain adjustment,
Coefficient entry.

Digital filter 7 steps programmable adaptive filter

Dynamic filter Programmable dynamic filter

Taring, zeroing, auto zero tracking, motion detection, auto zero at power up, increased
Weighing functions
resolution, automatic tare and clear, temporary gross indication, unit change.

OPEN : Open container filling.

BUNG : Bung- type container filling.
BOTT : Filling from bottom of the container with lance control.
PACK : Packing machine.
BAG : Bag filling.
BIG : Big bag filling.
Filling modes
VENT : Valve bag filling.
1BAG : Bagging machine with one weighing hopper.
nBAG : Bagging machine with up to 16 weighing hopper.
nPAC : Packing machine with up to 16 weighing hopper.
TANK : Charging material to the tank and then filling container from tank.
WOUT : Weigh in – Weigh out.
Memory

Application memories Each 250 record size two memories for receipt and ID.

Alibi memory ( optional ) 19 999 records

Communication
Connectable with PC, PLC, Printer, Remote display, EPL printer etc.
Isolation Galvanically isolated.
RS 232

Baud rate 1200 to 57600 programmable

Data Length 7 or 8 bits; parity even, odd or none

Isolation Galvanically isolated.

Baud rate 1200 to 57600 programmable

RS 485

Data Length 7 or 8 bits; parity even, odd or none

Stations Up to 31 stations
Connection Reserved to interface with external digital I/O unit, RIO16.
RS 422

Up to 4 pcs RIO16 unit can be connected to BX30 instruments, if the customized filling
Description mode software support.
Very important note: Do not use this port if there is in-house digital I/O board.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 11 of 432

 Transmission rate 10 / 100 Mbit/s, Full duplex
TCP/IP settings Manual IP assign over EtherX PC Software or by keys in programming mode.
Ethernet TCP/IP

Connection method Server or Client

Installation Switched Ethernet transmission with shielded twisted pair cables and RJ-45.
Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics
Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands
Connection Standard USB Micro-B cable
USB

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Digital Inputs and Outputs

Opto-isolated 12 digital inputs, 12 to 28 VDC, 10mA.

Digital Inputs
Selectable input(s) can be used as a Remote input of your PLC over BSI or Modbus.

Opto-isolated 14 transistor outputs, 12 to 28 VDC, 0.1A. Short circuit protected.

Digital Outputs
Selectable output(s) can be used as a Remote output of your PLC over BSI or Modbus.

Analogue Output for feeding speed control

Voltage output 0-10 V
Current output 0-20mA
Resolution 60 000 steps
Max. cable length 300 meter
Max. load resistance
500 Ω
(current output )
Minimum load resistance
10 kΩ
(voltage output )
Profibus DPV1
Data rate Up to 12000 kbit/s with automatic baud rate detection

GSD file Generic GSD-file provided

Depending on physical media

Topology
RS-485: segmented line topology without stubs
Shielded twisted pair cable
Installations
Line length depending on physical media and transmission speed

Max. Stations up to 126 stations per network

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

Profinet
Data rate 100 Mbit/s, full duplex
GSDML file Generic GSDML-file provided

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 12 of 432

 DHCP or manual IP are assigned over EtherX PC Software or by keys in programming
TCP/IP settings
mode. Device identity customization

Topology Line, Bus, Star or Tree topology depending on physical media

Installation Switched Ethernet transmission with shielded twisted pair cables and RJ-45 connectors.
Web client Available
Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics
Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands
Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed
Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

CANopen

Data rate 10 kbit/s – 1 Mbit/s (selectable) kbit/s

EDS file Generic EDS-file provided

Line with Trunkline, Dropline structure and Termination at both Ends

Topology
Line length depending on baud rate 25 – 500 meter.
2 wire shielded twisted pair cable
Installation
Alternatively 4 wire with 24 Volt power over the bus

Max. Stations Up to 127 stations per network

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

EtherNet/IP

Data rate 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, full duplex

EDS file Generic EDS-file provided

DLR (Device Level Ring) Available

DHCP or manual IP assign over EtherX PC Software or by keys in programming mode.

TCP/IP settings
Device identity customization

Topology Line, Bus, Star or Tree topology depending on physical media

Installation Switched Ethernet transmission with shielded twisted pair cables and RJ-45 connectors.

Web client Available

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

EtherCAT

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 13 of 432

Data rate 100 Mbit/s, full duplex

ESI file Generic ESI-file provided

Topology Line, Tree, Star or Daisy-chain topology depending on physical media

Installation Switched Ethernet transmission with shielded twisted pair cables and RJ-45 connectors.

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

CC-Link

Data rate 156 kbit/s – 10 Mbit/s (selectable)

Topology Line with Trunkline, Branch structure and Termination at both Ends.

Installation 3 wires shielded twisted pair cable.

Max. Stations Up to 64 stations per network

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

Powerlink

Compatibility Supports Ethernet POWERLINK V2.0 Communication Profile Specification version 1.2.0

Data rate 100 Mbit/s, half duplex

XDD file XDD-file provided

Ring redundancy Available

Topology 100% free choice of star, tree, ring or daisy chain

Installation Switched Ethernet transmission with shielded twisted pair cables and RJ-45 connectors.

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

CC-Link IE Field ( Will be released in Q3 2020 )

Data rate 1 Gbit/s Baud Rate

CSP+ file Generic CSP+ file provided

Topology Line, Star, Line/Star mixture or Ring topology depending on physical media

IEEE802.3 1000Base-T cable, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e) compliant 4-pair

Installation
balanced-type shield cable, Double-shield type is recommended.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 14 of 432

Max. number of networks Up to 239
Number of connected
Master station=1, Slave station= 120
nodes per network

Isolation Galvanically isolated bus electronics

Response speed Typical 4 ms response delay, after read/write commands

Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be programmed

Remote IO
independently as a Remote IO’s of PLC to control them over fieldbus.

Power Consumption

BX30 Fill 12 – 28 VDC 250 mA + max. 500 mA for fieldbus interfacing

BX30D Fill 12 – 28 VDC 150 mA + max. 500 mA for fieldbus interfacing
+ load cell currents.

Environment and Enclosure:

Approved scales -10 °C to +40 °C
Operation temp. range
Industrial usage -15 °C to +55 °C
Humidity 80% RH max, non-condensing
Enclosure Stainless steel front panel and rear panel, aluminum body.
Protection Front panel IP67
Panel cut size 186 x 92 mm ( 7.32 x 3.62” )
Sizes ( W x H x D ) 205 x 108 x 113 mm ( 8.07 x 4.25 x 4.43” )
Weight 1,4 kg ( 3,07 lb )
Packing sizes (W x H x D) 273 x 190 x 153 mm ( 10,75 x 7,48 x 6,02” )
Weight Packed 2,5 kg ( 5,51 lb )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 15 of 432

2.5 Housing

BX30Fill

113 mm
205mm ( 8.07" ) ( 4.43" )

108 mm 91 mm
( 4.25" ) ( 3.58" )

Front view Side view

186 mm ( 7.32" )

92 mm
( 3.62" )

Panel cut sizes

RIO16
50 mm 113 mm
( 1.97" ) ( 4.45" )

91 mm
( 3.58" )

Front view Side view

2.6 Documentation
The package of the BX30 Filling and Packing controller includes a CD which contains all needed
documentation together with this manual. These documents describe installation and operation of the
instrument, and details on all possible interfaces.
You will also find the required software and specific application samples in the CD.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 16 of 432

3. TERMINOLOGY
Receipt related terminology in this manual is described in this section for easy understanding.

Term Definition

The receipt is group of filling specific values of the target, feeding cutoff
Receipt
values etc. to fill the product fast and in high accuracy. Every receipt
may have a name.

The name of the receipt which will be seen on the display and on the
Receipt name
printout which can be 16 digits alpha numeric.

Receipt number which defines the location of the receipt in the receipt
Receipt code
memory.
The basic elements of the receipt are target and feeding cut-off values.
You may expand your receipt content for dissimilar products or
containers, e.g. fine feed cut-off adjustment ratio. Setting the receipt
Receipt build
content is called a receipt build.

Refer to section 9.4

Target Target is the nominal material weight which is written on the package.
Target is basic element of the receipt.

Overfill is the weight of the additional material which will be filled in to

the pack against under filling or to shift statistical values - like mean
Overfill value - to adhere to strict packing regulatory requirements. Default is 0.
Overfill might be positive and negative to increase or decrease the target
at filling.
Refer to parameter 419.

Due to the market surveillance reasons, required overfilling entry is

available without changing the target. The filling weight is the material
Filling weight weight which will be filled in to the package.
Filling Weight = Target ± Overfill
Overfill value can be entered positive or negative.

The specified number of filling is a batch quantity. The batch quantity is

Batch Quantity entered in the receipt or via programmed F1 key.
Refer to parameter 41A.
Batch total is specified total material weight which will be filled. Batch
Batch Total total weight is entered in the receipt or via programmed F2 key. Refer to
parameter 41A.
Bulk weight is specified total material weight which is transferred
Bulk weight accurately via filling machine. The filled weights are totalized to transfer
the bulk weight accurately. Refer to parameter 41A.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 17 of 432

 Tolerance checking is done against the Target weight or Filling weight.
In tolerance checking with Target weight:
Target – Tol < In tolerance filling < Target + Tol
Tolerance
In tolerance checking with Filling weight:
F.Weight – Tol < In tolerance filling < F.Weight + Tol

Refer to parameter 412

Coarse feed in value defines the coarse feeding cut-off which is basic
element of the receipt.

Coarse cut off = ( Target ± Overfill ) – Coarse

Coarse
Coarse cut off = Filling weight – Coarse

Refer to parameters 315, 371and 406

Medium feed in value defines the medium feeding cut-off.

Medium Medium cut off = Filling weight - Medium

Refer to parameters 315, 371and 407

Fine feed in value defines the fine feeding cut-off which is basic element
of the receipt.
Fine
Fine cut off = Filling weight - Fine

Refer to parameters 315, 371 and 408

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 18 of 432

4. THE FRONT VIEW AND KEY FUNCTIONS

Figure 4.1 – Front view of BX30Fill

4.1 Display
The colorful, bright and wide angle LCD display of the BX30 is shown below.

2 3

16
15
6
14
4
13
5
12 8
11

10 9 1 7

The meanings of the announcement symbols on the display are:

1 6 digit 22 mm height big weight display with sign

2 16 digit 8 mm height alphanumeric information display

3 High resolution digit separator.

4 Announces the indicated value is the net weight.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 19 of 432

 5 Announces the indicated value is the gross weight.

6 Bar graph

Indicates the range of the scale at multi range and multi interval
7
operations.

8 g, kg, t, lb or klb units are located on the right of the display.

9 Announces the instrument is at repair status or call service.

Announces the scale is preset tared by entering the specific value or

10
calculated the average tare.

11 Announces the weight value is in the center of zero range.

Announces the weighing is not stabile. After stabilization of the

12
weighing, this symbol disappears.

13 Announces the process steps feeding, full, discharge etc.

14 Ready Announces the instrument is ready to start filling.

15 Announces the instrument is at basic weighing.

16 Announces the keys are locked.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 20 of 432

4.2 Key Functions
The keys and the key functions of BX30 in usage are:

Target. Press this key to enter the target, overfill and tolerance values. Page 112,
112, 113
Feeding Cutoff entries. The cutoff values of coarse, medium and fine Page 18,
feedings are entered after pressing this key sequentially. 106, 113.

Receipt. This key is used to enter to the all receipt data. Page 17
112,113.

Memory. Press this key to record the receipts and ID’s in to the memory or Page 115
recall them for usage.

Navigation keys These keys are used to navigate in the memories, entries Page 138
and programming.
The meanings of the navigation keys are;
Previous parameter.
Next digit or parameter.
Increase or next block.
Decrease or previous block.
Enter into the parameter to enter data.
Save the data after entry.
Go to the next parameter.
Enter. Save the data and go to the next step. Page 134

Print. Press this key to transfer weight data to the printer or to PC ( only at
weighing mode ).
Escape Press this key to exit from any entry or from any block at
programming.

Quantity. This key is used to follow the erasable total quantity. Page 138,
169

Total. This key is used to follow the erasable total weight. Page 138,
169

High resolution. Press this key to indicate the load weight 10 times higher Page 41,
resolution ( default ). 164, 178
If you do not need to display the load in high resolution, you may set this key
for another function ( parameter 351).

Weighing mode. This key is used to switch to use the instrument in basic Page 37,
weighing. Press second time for return filling mode. The instrument should be 38
in filling mode for automatic filling described in this manual.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 21 of 432

 Unit change. This key is used to change the unit to display and for printout Page 38,
( default ). 165
If you do not need to change the unit, you may set this key for another
function ( parameter 352) .
Programmable function keys. These keys are used for various filling related Page 41,
functions like average filling, last filling, statistical results etc. 164

Help. This key is used to indicate functions of F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5 keys and Page 41
other programmable keys.

Tare. Press this key to tare the scale at basic weighing mode. Page 37,
39, 106,
168, 170

Zeroing. If the unloaded scale doesn’t show zero at gross operation, press Page 37,
this key to compensate zero drift at basic weighing mode or at ready status. 171,179,
172
Clear. Clears the tare and indication returns to the gross value. Page 37

Alphanumeric keys. Alphanumeric data entries are done with these keys.

Delete. Deletes last entered digit.

Press more than 2 seconds to clear the data on the display at data entry.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 22 of 432

5. INSTALLATION
PRECAUTION: Read this section carefully before installation the instrument. Applying the recommendations
in this section will increase your system reliability, accuracy and its long term performance.

5.1 Recommendations
5.1.1 Environment
The filling controller should be placed in an area which is clean, not getting direct sun light if possible,
having a temperature between -15 ºC and +55 ºC and humidity not exceeding 80% non-condensing. All
external cables should be installed safely to avoid mechanical damages.

This instrument is very low level signal measuring instrument. To avoid electrical noise, it should be
separated from equipment that produces electrical noise. The instrument body must be connected to the
good ground against the electromagnetic disturbances. Load cell cable must be separated from other cables
especially from power cables if possible. If there are electrical noise-generating equipment such as heavy
load switches, motor control equipment, inductive loads etc., please pay attention against the EMC
interference and take all the prevention. Connect parallel reverse diodes to the DC inductive loads like
relays, solenoids etc. to minimize voltage peaks on the DC power lines.

5.1.2 Mechanical Installation Recommendations

This panel type controller is designed to mount on to the panel of the control cabinet.
- Use the metal cabinet to attenuate electrical disturbances.
- Install control motors, relays which has high contact current, solenoids etc. in to the separate
section of the cabinet.
- Protect the cabinet from mechanical impacts and vibration.

Cut the place of the instrument on the panel as;

186 mm ( 7.32" )

92 mm
( 3.62" )

Figure 5.1- Panel cut sizes of BX30 Panel type.

5.1.3 Cabling Recommendations

- All cables coming to the instrument shall be high quality and shielded.
- Distance from load cell cables, interface cables and DC power supply cables to power line cables
shall be minimum 30 cm. The separate cable tray usage for these low signal level cables is strongly
recommended.
- Shields of all cables should be connected to the grounding screws under terminals as shown at the
picture below.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 23 of 432

 Figure 5.2– The shield connection to the protective earth.

5.1.4 Electrical Connection Recommendations

- Always remember that BX30 Filling controller is very low voltage measuring instrument in the
industrial environment. Your proper installation increases reliability and performance of the
instrument.
- The trained person should interfere the instrument against malfunction at installation.
- If the energy condition of your plant is bad, prepare a special power line for DC power supply in the
cabinet.
- The quality of your plant grounding will provide weighing accuracy and the safety of your controller.
If grounding of your plant is bad, prepare a special grounding.
- Powered off the instrument before connecting or disconnecting any peripheral instrument.
- The shielded cable and ground connection of the shield will increase the immunity against electrical
disturbances.
- Shields of all cables must connect to the ground screws rear the instrument as indicated in the
Figure 5.3 (recommended).
- All required electrical connections should be done as described in the installation section.
- Reverse diodes should be connected to all inductive components in the cabinet to minimize
electrical disturbances.
- If you have to service the controller, turn the power off and wait at least 30 seconds before opening
housing to interfere it.

Location of the Peripheral Connections

The electrical terminals are located on the rear of the instrument as shown in the picture below.

Calib.
USB switch

Power Ethernet SD RS232 RS485 RS422 Load Cell

TCP/IP card

Figure 5.3 – The rear view of the instrument and terminal names.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 24 of 432

5.2 Installation
Follow the steps below carefully to install the instrument.

Step 1: Preliminary Preparations

Before starting the installation,
1. Prepare the filling controller location on the cabinet front. Refer to recommendations in the previous
section.
2. Prepare the Protective Earth (PE) cable to grounding the BX30Fill housing and cabinet. The protective
earth should be as good as possible for system reliability.
3. Use high quality and EMC certified DC power source in the cabinet.
4. Follow the requirements on cabling. Refer to page 23.

Step 2: Mechanical Installation

Cut the panel of the cabinet to install the Insert the instrument to the cut on the panel after
instrument. Refer to Figure 5.1 for panel cut placing the waterproof sealing rubber behind the
sizes. panel of BX30 weighing instrument.

Place holder parts of the instrument to the both Use 2 pcs M4 screws to mount the instrument to
side of the instrument. the panel after alignment it.

Step 3a: Analogue Load Cell Connection (Only BX30 Fill)

To avoid damages, the load cell wiring should be made carefully before energizing the instrument. Load cell
connection schematics are in Figure 5.4.

The same polarity sense and excitation pins of the load cell connector should be short circuited for 4-wire
installation. If you have junction box in your system, use 6 wire cable between indicator and the junction
box, and short circuit these pins in junction box for better performance as seen in the Figure 5.4.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 25 of 432

 Pin number Definition Description
1 +Exc + Excitation
1 7 2 +Sen + Sense
3 +Sig + Signal
4 NC Not connected
5 -Sig - Signal
6 -Sen - Sense
7 -Exc - Excitation
Shield Protective Earth

Table 5-1 – Pin configuration of the analogue load cell terminal.

Load cell and protective ground connection of load cell are shown below.

4 wire load cell connection

6 wire load cell connection

IMPORTANT NOTE :
Wiring between instrument and
junction box should be 6 wire.

Figure 5.4 – The analogue load cell and junction box connection.

Warning: Always connect sense pins to Excitation pins for 4 wire connection. Non-connected sense pins
may cause the wrong Excitation voltage measurement and create an accuracy and instability problems.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 26 of 432

Step 3b: Digital Load Cell Connection (Only BX30D Fill)

The digital load cell wiring should be made carefully before energizing the instruments to avoid BX30D Fill
and load cells from damages. The instrument cable between the indicator and junction box must be shielded
and convenient for high speed RS485 interfacing. The wire diameter of the instrument cable should be
selected for maximum 0.5 volt drop between the instrument and junction box.

Pin number Definition Description

1 7 1 A + RS485 for DLC interfacing

2 B - RS485 for DLC interfacing
3 -V Ground
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 +VLC Power output for DLCs
7 - Not used
Shield Protective Earth

Table 5-2 – Pin configuration of the digital load cell terminal of BX30D Fill.

Figure 5.5 – The BX30D Fill connection with junction box

to power supply DLC #1

Instrument
Cable DLC #2

J.BOX
BX30D Fill
DLC #n
PE
Cabinet Platform

Figure 5.6 – Installation with junction box

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 27 of 432

 DLC #1
to power supply
Instrument
Cable DLC #2

BX30D Fill
PE DLC #n
Cabinet Platform

Figure 5.7 – Daisy-chain connection

Step 4: Digital Inputs and Outputs

The BX30 Filling controller has two variants which have the internal digital I/O board and external DIN rail
mount digital I/O unit connection to control the filling process.

Variant Description Digital I/O Connection

BX30 Fill with internal digital I/O board; Digital
The ‘BX30 Fill A’ variant has the internal Inputs/Outputs
Filling Machine
digital I/O board which has 12 digital Control
BX30 Fill A
inputs and 14 digital outputs. The
digital I/O terminals are located on the
top of the rear panel.
BX30 Fill with external digital I/O unit;
RIO16
The ‘BX30 Fill N’ variant hasn’t the RS422
Filling Machine
BX30 Fill N internal digital I/O board and is 4 wire connection
Control
BX30 Fill R connected to the DIN rail mount RIO16
digital I/O unit via RS422 serial port to
control filling machine.

Input and output terminal configuration of these two variants is identical. The only difference between two
variants is the digital I/O cabling from the instrument of from the unit on the DIN rail. The functions of digital
inputs and outputs for different filling applications are described in section 7, page 44.

RIO16
This DIN rail mount digital I/O unit enables easier cabling in the control cabinet. The BX30Fill N ( without
digital I/O in the housing ) instrument interfaces with this digital I/O unit over RS422 port. 120 ohm line
termination resistors should be installed both ends of the RS422 line.

All DIP switches position must be “0”

Figure 5.8 - The data format and address of the RIO16.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 28 of 432

 6 1

BX30Fill RIO16
RS422 RS422
Definition Definition
Pin number Pin number
6 RX+ RX+ 1
7 RX- RX- 2
8 TX+ TX+ 3
9 TX- TX- 4
Under the terminal PE

Table 5-3 – Pin configuration and connection of RS422 ports.

Figure 5.9 – RS422 cabling between BX30Fill N and RIO16.

Check the data format and address of the RIO16 before start operation which are shown in the Figure 5.8.

Digital inputs
Galvanically isolated Input signals are actuated by applying voltage between input terminal and common
terminal. The polarity of the input can be positive or negative. The input current is 10 mA at 24VDC input.

The equivalent circuit of inputs is drawn below. Buttons, switches, contacts or PLC outputs can be
connected to inputs as seen below.

Figure 5.10 – Digital input connection diagram

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 29 of 432

Digital outputs
Galvanically isolated digital outputs are solid state relay output and protected against short circuit. The
polarity of the output is positive and actuated high voltage. The maximum output current is 100 mA.

The equivalent circuit of digital outputs is drawn below. Relays, Inductors or PLC inputs can be connected to
outputs as seen below. The reverse diodes shall be connected in parallel to connected inductive loads.

Figure 5.11 – Digital output connection diagram

Step 5: Feeding control with Analogue output

The BX30 Filling controller can be equipped with an analogue output to connect to the analogue input of the
feeder controller. Order " Analog output and RS23C & RS485 serial interface board ” to have this feature.
Refer to section 8.5 and parameter group 45- for details.

Voltage output connections

Current output connections

Figure 5.12 – Analogue output connections for speed control

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 30 of 432

Step 6: RS232C Serial Port
BX30 Filling controller has RS232C serial port which is galvanically isolated from main board circuitry to
increase the EMC immunity. The usage of this serial port and its specifications are described in the Table 5-4
and its pin configuration is shown in Table 5-5.

Usage Interfacing with printer, PC, PLC, remote display etc.

Data formats Continuous, Fast Continuous, Printer, BSI Protocol or Modbus RTU
Baud rate 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 (Default) / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 bps
Length 7 or 8 ( default ) bits
Parity Even, Odd or No ( default )
Start / Stop bits 1 start bit and 1 stop bit

Table 5-4 – RS 232C Serial Interface Specifications

RS232C
Definition
Pin number
1 9 TXD 1
RXD 2
GND 3
Screw under the
terminal

Table 5-5 – Pin configuration of RS232C terminals

2 wire connection to peripherals: RS 232C serial connection is done with two wires as indicated below in
Figure 5.13. if there is no data entry to the filling controller. Printer, remote display etc. connections can be
done with 2 wire.

Figure 5.13 – 2 wire RS 232C connection with a printer or PC

3 wire connection to the peripherals: RS232C serial connection is done with three wires as indicated
below in Figure 5.14 for bidirectional interfacing. Typical application is bidirectional BSI format interfacing
with PC or PLC.

Figure 5.14 – 3 wire RS232C connection with a PC or PLC

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 31 of 432

Step 7: RS485 Serial Port
The usage of this galvanically isolated serial port and its specifications are described in the Table 5-6 and its
pin configuration is shown in Table 5-7. Refer to page 147 to configure RS485 serial port and page 133 for
details on data formats.
120 ohm line termination resistors should be installed both ends of the RS485 line.

Usage Interfacing with Printer, PC, PLC, remote display etc.

Data formats Continuous, Fast Continuous, Printer, BSI Protocol or Modbus RTU
Baud rate 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 (Default) / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 bps
Length 7 or 8 ( default ) bits
Parity Even, Odd or No ( default )
Start / Stop bits 1 start bit and 1 stop bit
Address Programmable between 01 …. 99
Max quantity Maximum 31 instruments on the line.
Cable length Maximum 1000m.

Table 5-6 – RS485 Serial Interface Specifications

RS485
Definition
1 9 Pin number
A+ 4
B- 5
Under the terminal

Table 5-7 – Pin configuration of RS485 terminal

RS485 serial connection is done with two wires as indicated below in Figure 5.15.

Figure 5.15 – Multi instrument connection with PLC

Step 8: Ethernet TCP/IP

The usage of the Ethernet port on the main PCB and its data formats are shown in the
Table 5-8 and its pin configuration is shown in Table 5-9. Refer to Section 17.4 of the manual to configure
this interface. Use the RJ45 connecter with metal body and connect shield of the Ethernet cable to the metal
body of the connector.

Usage Interfacing with Printer, PC, PLC, remote display etc.

Data formats Continuous, Fast Continuous, Printer, BSI Protocol or Modbus TCP
Table 5-8 – Data formats of Ethernet port

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 32 of 432

 Pin no Signal DIR Description
1 1 TX+ Out Differential Ethernet transmit data +
8
2 TX− Out Differential Ethernet transmit data −
3 RX+ In Differential Ethernet receive data +
6 RX− In Differential Ethernet receive data −
4 Not used Terminated
Shield 5 Not used Terminated
7 Not used Terminated
8 Not used Terminated
Body Shield Metal body of the RJ45 connector.

Table 5-9 – Pin configuration of RJ45 Ethernet connector

The HUB connection cabling is a direct connection as shown below:

Figure 5.16 - HUB connection

The PC connection cabling is done via cross cable as shown below. IP address blocks and gateway address
of BX30 Fill and PC should be the same in cross connection.

Figure 5.17 - PC connection with cross cable

IMPORTANT NOTE: Disconnect Baykon set up PC software before Ethernet interfacing.

Step 9: USB Port

The micro USB connector is located on the rear of the instrument. The usage of the USB 2.0 and its
specifications are shown in the Table 5-10. Refer to page 149 for USB port configuration.

Usage Interfacing with PC via USB 2.0

Continuous, Fast Continuous, BSI Protocol to PC
Data formats
near the instrument

Table 5-10 – Data formats of the USB port

Step 10: Power Source Connection and Grounding

Connect DC power supply of BX30 Fill to the noise proof power line due to the weighing instrument
measures very low signal levels. The quality of the power line and DC power supply will determine the
accuracy and the safety of your measuring system. The instrument should not share power lines with noise-
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 33 of 432
generating parts such as heavy load switching relays, motor control equipment, inductive loads, etc. If the
condition of the power supply in the plant is poor, prepare a special power line and grounding. Before
connecting the power source check its voltage before connection.

Pin number DC Power Supply

1 0
2 +24 VDC
PE Protective Earth PE cable to the screw under
( Grounding ) the power supply terminal

Table 5-11 – Pin configuration of power supply connector.

Protective earth screw PE 0 +24VDC

( for grounding )

Figure 5.18 – Power source connection and grounding.

to power supply DLC #1

Instrument
Cable DLC #2

BX30D Fill J.BOX

DLC #n
PE
Cabinet Platform

Figure 5.19 – Power source connection and grounding.

If the voltage is correct;

1. Connect the grounding screw under the power supply terminal to the good protective ground.
2. The 24 VDC supplied instruments are shipped with installed 2 meter power supply cable.
Connect this cable to power supply as shown in Table 5-11.

If your power source is not proper, do not connect the scale to the power source and contact your authorized
dealer.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 34 of 432

Step 11: Set up the Scale and Calibration
The filling controller should be set up and calibrate according to your operation and application. Read this
document carefully and select the parameter values which are convenient for your usage before
programming the instrument.

Follow the commissioning steps to adjust the instrument.

Warning: You cannot change the legally related parameter values and calibration after sealing the
instrument in legal usage. Be sure you have done proper set up for your usage before sealing the scale.

5.3 Commissioning
PRECAUTION: Please read this manual carefully before energizing the instrument. Perform the
commissioning operation according the procedure given in this section. Only trained person is allowed for
cleaning, commissioning, checking and servicing of the instrument. The interference of untrained person
may cause some unwanted damages or injuries.

After finishing installations and connections of BX30 as described before, follow the items below to start up
the system.

1. Check all cabling and grounding of your system.

2. Energize the instrument.
3. Set calibration switch to ON position and enter the set-up. Refer to page 143.
4. Set parameter group [ 2-- ] for your usage.
5. Adjust scale related parameters in to the parameter group [ 5-- ].
6. Calibrate the scale in parameter group [ 61- ].
7. Test the scale performance.
8. Set calibration switch to OFF position.
9. Enter the machine construction to the instrument via parameter groups [ 31- ] and [ 32- ].
10. Set material and receipt related parameters in to the parameter group [ 4-- ].

11. Enter target and feed cut off values by pressing and keys.
12. Test the filling machine.
13. Set programmable select inputs and outputs in parameter groups [ 33- ]. [ 47- ], [ 48- ] and [4A-].
14. Improve your filling machine performance by adjusting the digital filters, parameters 235 and 236
and material related parameters in parameter group [ 4-- ].
15. Build receipt content by adding [ 4-- ] parameters in to the receipt, if required. Refer to page 113.
16. Save receipts in to the receipt memory, if need be.
17. Enter the receipt or select the receipt from receipt memory. Check the receipt data.
18. Test the filling of the machine. And improve its performance by adjusting parameters.
19. Connect serial interfaces after adjusting their parameters.
20. Connect Fieldbus after setting its parameters and test it.

You can find the meaning of the parameters on the filling cycle diagram seen below, on page 112.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 35 of 432

 Figure 5.20 – Typical filling diagram (displayed weight vs. time)

5.4 Cleaning
Warning: Disconnect the instrument from power source before start cleaning for your safety.

BX30 filling controller is designed for using in wet, hygienic and harsh environment. To maintain the
instrument, never use harsh abrasive cleaners or solvents. Wipe the instrument with a soft cloth slightly
dampened with warm soapy water or with mild detergent.

5.5 Disposal
In conformance with the European Directive 2002/96 EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE),
this device may not be disposed of with domestic waste. This rule also applies to the non-EU countries,
according to their specific regulations. Please dispose of this product in accordance with local regulations at
the collecting point specified for electrical and electronic equipment. For your questions, please contact the
responsible local authority. Thank you for your attention to environmental protection.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 36 of 432

6. FEATURES
6.1 Basic Weighing Functions
Basic weighing mode
BX30 weighing controller can be used for basic weighing additional to its filling controller operation. The
instrument goes in to the filling operation mode after power on. Pressing key switches the
instrument to the basic weighing mode. To return the filling controller operation press the same switch
second time.

Zeroing
Zeroing corrects the drifts of the unloaded scale from the zero point.
1. Unload the scale.
2. Press key.
3. Centre of zero appears symbol on the display.
4. Check the center of zero sign on the left of the display. If it is not appears, press the key once
more for correct zeroing.

Zeroing is available in the limited range by zeroing parameter 514, page 179.

Basic weighing
1. Press key for basic weighing operation.
2. Press key, if [ 0.00 kg ] is not displayed at unloaded scale.
3. Place weighing item on the scale.
4. Wait until the motion annunciator disappears.
5. Read the weighing result.

Net weighing in the container at basic weighing

Taring is used to weight material in the container at basic weighing operation.
1. Place the empty container on to the scale and press key in the weighing mode.
2. The zero display and the NET symbol appear.
3. Check sign on the display. If it is not appears, press the key once more for correct taring.
4. Add the material into the container and follow its weight in net.

Clearing the tare at basic weighing

Press key at basic weighing mode. The NET symbol disappears and B/G ( Gross ) symbol appears on
the display together with the gross weight indication.

Printing
Printing is done automatically at operation as programmed or press key when the item is on the pan
and weight is stable to print the label. The printout format can be selected from parameter 161. Baykon PC
software is used to program EPL printout data and download in to the instrument for free programming the
data output or for label printing including barcode. Refer to page 151, and 134 for details.

Out of the weight indication range

If the loading is out of the indication range the prompts below are displayed.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 37 of 432

 Under of negative indication limit Over than positive indication limit

6.2 Advanced Functions

Basic Weighing / Filling operation selection
The instrument goes in to the filling mode after power on. Pressing key changes the operation to
basic weighing mode at ready status. To return filling mode, press this key second time.

High resolution
Press key to display the weight value 10 times higher resolution until pressing the same key again.
High resolution is displayed temporarily for 5 seconds at approved scales. High resolution cannot be printed.
Refer to parameter 351, page 164.

Unit change
Press key to change the weight unit to the second unit. Press this key second time to return the first
unit. The unit change is available between kg and lb. Refer to parameter 352, page 165.

Dynamic weighing
APPLICATION: Filling of unstable loads. This feature cannot be used at fast speed filling systems.
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 235 and 236.

The dynamic filter can be activated for filling under the unstable load or environmental conditions. This
feature might be disabled at fast filling by the instrument. Adjust the adaptive filter and the dynamic filter
together to find the optimum result.

IMPORTANT NOTES: Testing different combinations of the digital filter and dynamic filter is recommended
for accurate filling at higher speed. High filtering is not always the best!

Date and Time

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 241, 242 and 243.
Date format of the country
1. Enter the programming and go to parameter 241, page 157.
2. Press or keys to select date format: DMY ( DD.MM.YYYY ), MDY ( MM.DD.YYYYY) or
YMD ( YYYY.MM.DD ) and press key to confirm.
3. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen.
4. Press key to save or press or keys to select “NO” to return operation without
saving.
Date adjust
1. Enter the programming and go to parameter 242, page 157.
2. Press numerical keys to enter the date and press key to confirm.
3. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen.
4. Press key to save or press or keys to select “NO” to return operation without
saving.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 38 of 432
 Time adjust
1. Enter the programming and go to parameter 243, page 157.
2. Press numerical keys to enter the time and press key to confirm.
3. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen.
4. Press key to save or press or keys to select “NO” to return operation without
saving.

Tilt switch
Tilt switch is used to prevent wrong weighing in case of over tilting of the scale. Connect tilt switch to one of
the selectable Inputs and enable tilt switch function by setting the parameters 51A and 34- block.
[ TILTED ] [ ------ kg ] prompt is displayed in case of over tilting.

User Language
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameter 237.

You can select the operation and printout language of the instrument. The available languages are English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish and Turkish. The language of programming is English which has the
parameter code in front of parameter name for easy usage.

Language selection
1. Enter the programming and go to parameter 237, page 156.
2. Press or keys to select language and press key to confirm.
3. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen.
4. Press key to save or press or keys to select “NO” to return operation without
saving.

Bar graph at basic weighing

The Bar graph, which is located on the right side of the display, is used for the graphical visualization of the
measured value. It changes according to the Gross weight even the scale is displaying in Net. The usage of
the scale capacity and the available range are seen on the bar graph. In the example below 70% of the
capacity is used and 30% is available.

Net sign correction

Some weighing of materials are done by unloading the material from the container. The net sign correction
enables always positive net weighing at loading and at unloading the material from scale by switching gross
and tare weights, if necessary. Refer to parameter 162 to enable net sign correction.
Enabled net sign correction affects the display and printed data.

Displaying and Net sign correction Net sign correction

printout disabled enabled
Tare 120.0 kg 30.0 kg
Gross 30.0 kg 120.0 kg
Net - 90.0 kg 90.0 kg

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 39 of 432

Passwords
RELATED PARAMETERS: Sub-block 25- .
BX30 has 4 different passwords, which are key lock, receipt, supervisor and service passwords, and their
authorization increase in sequence below.

Key lock password

This two digit password is used to lock and unlock keys to prevent unwanted interfering to the
instrument. The default password is ‘--' which means no password. You may enter new passport in
set-up mode, parameter 251. For key locking or unlocking without password, do not enter new
password in set-up mode.
Receipt password
This four digit password is used to prevent unauthorized persons access to the receipt related menus,
target entry with key, changing feeding speed cut offs with key, receipt menu and receipt
build menu. The default password is ‘----‘ which enables receipt entry without password. You may
enter new password in set-up mode, parameter 252. To cancel entry to the receipt menu with
password, do not enter new password in set-up mode.
Target related entries with navigation keys are authorized to the receipt password. This authority can
be given to key lock password by parameter 255.

Supervisor password
This supervisor password is used to enter user related parameters of the set-up menu additional to the
authority of the receipt password. The default password is 1111.
Service password
This highest level password is used to interfere everywhere of the instrument including scale related
parameters and calibration parameters only by trained technical persons. The default password is
1111. Changing metrological parameters and performing calibration are additionally required to set the
calibration switch to on position.

Key lock
BX30 has capability to lock the keys to avoid unauthorized person’s interfere to the instrument at ready
status. Operation related keys are always locked automatically during operation. Refer to parameter 251 to
enable key lock feature of the instrument. The default password is ‘--' which means no password.
Lock the keys:
1. Press key more than 2 seconds. [KLOCK PASSWORD: ] prompt appears on the display.
2. Enter the key lock password. Refer to parameter 251.
3. Press key. symbol is appears on the display.
Unlock the keys:
1. Press key more than 2 seconds. [KLOCK PASSWORD: ] prompt appears on the display.
2. Enter the key lock password.
3. Press key. symbol disappears on the display.

Next verification date

The instrument warns the operator on the following verification or calibration date, if date is entered by
parameter 823. The warning is disappeared after pressing key until switch on the instrument again.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 40 of 432

Help
The key is used to follow functions of programmable keys and function keys by pressing key
consecutively. Press this key sequentially until going back operation. Pressing key is ended the help
menu.

6.3 Advanced Filling functions with Programmable keys

, , , , , and keys can be programmable for your needs at usage of
machine. These functions will give you advantage to control or to check or to follow the weighing results of
your filling machine. Refer to sub-block 35- on page 164 for available functions of keys.

Start Filling
Pressing the start key starts the filling which can be done via digital input or any serial interface. The second
function of this key is resume the filling, which means the filling result is accepted and go on the operation.
Alternatively, the filling may start automatically after loading the container on the scale, after discharging
etc.

Start Discharge / Empty

Pressing this key starts the discharge/Empty process of the packing cycle similar to start the
discharge/empty process of the machine via digital input or via any serial interface.

Empty the Scale

This feature is used to open the emptying gate manually at ready status to empty the residual material or to
clean it for maintenance. The bag should be holded to empty the weighing hopper.

Bypass
This feature is used to empty the material silo via filling machine. Pressing this key opens the emptying and
feeding gates and energizes feeders to empty the material silo / tank. There is no any weighing process at
bypass. Press second time the key to stop bypass.

Reset
Pressing this key resets the filling cycle and returns the instrument to the ready status immediately. If there
is any material on the scale it should be removed before start following filling.

Interrupt
Pressing this emergency stop key interrupts the filling. All filling cycle related outputs are set to their ready
status. For example the feeding stops and the valve goes to the up position at liquid filling modes. After
releasing the interrupt input, the filling continues. Reset input returns the filling machine to ready status.

Hold
Pressing this key stops the feeding only. If pressing this key second time ends the hold status and filling
process continues. If reset or reject entries are received the filling machine returns to ready status.

Statistical Values
Average Filling, Standard Deviation, Over, Under and Okay values are calculated in the instruments and
these values can be displayed by pressing the key sequentially.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 41 of 432

Last Filling
Last filled weight is displayed after pressing the key sequentially. Pressing the key second time returns the
display at operational data.

Batch Quantity
Press this key to enter the batch quantity at ready status, if it is enabled in the receipt or in set up. Only
key can be set to this function.

1. Press key at ready status.

2. Enter the batch quantity.
3. Press key. The new batch quantity of the receipt is saved.

Refer to section 11.1 for details.

Batch Total
Press this key to enter the specific batch weight at ready status, if this function is enabled in the receipt or
in set up. Only key can be set for batch total entry.

1. Press key at ready status.

2. Enter the batch total.
3. Press key. The new batch total of the receipt is saved.

Pressing this key in operation indicates the residual material weight of the batch which will be transferred.
Refer to section 11.2 and 11.3 for details.

Flow Rates
Coarse, Medium and Fine feeding flow rates are displayed sequence by pressing the key. They displayed
temporarily for 20 seconds or until pressing the key second time.

Feeding Cutoffs
Coarse, Medium and Fine feed in values are displayed sequence by pressing the key. They displayed
temporarily for 20 seconds or until pressing the key second time.

Check Stop
For testing the filling machine performance and accuracy, stopping filling process at specified point(s) is
needed. Three different check stops can be defined to function keys at this filling controller which are;

Check Filling. Pressing the key stops the filling/packing process at the end of filling to follow the
filling accuracy of the filling machine.

Check Discharge. Pressing the key holds the filling process at the end of discharge / emptying to
follow the discharging / emptying accuracy or residual material on scale.

Check Step. Pressing the key holds the filling / packing process at the end of each cycle like filling,
discharging, emptying, zeroing etc. to follow the process.

Pressing the key second time allows the process to continue.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 42 of 432

6.4 Back up / Restore with SD card
RELATED PARAMETERS: Sub-blocks 96-.
IMPORTANT NOTE: SD card memory should be formatted to FAT32 and maximum 16 GB. For FAT32
formatting, click the “Restore device defults” and uncheck the “Quick format” box on PC.

The receipt data, set-up and calibration data of the instrument can be copied to SD card for having back up
of the filling controller. After restoring this data to the instrument you may go on operation without
reentering all these data.

All data is copied in to the SD card. Restoring can be done separately or all data is restored. If the calibration
data is restored, the previous calibration is get lost.

These feature is used commonly for loading set-up, calibration and receipt data to the new filling machine.
The scale can be recalibrated after restoring the data , if need be.

Back up;
- Insert SD card which is formatted FAT32 in to the SD card slot rear of the instrument (Refer to
section 22),
- Go in to the parameter 961,
- Press key.

Restore:
- Insert SD card ( max. 16 GB ) in to the SD card slot rear of the instrument,
- Go in to the parameter 962,
- Select All or set-up or calibration or receipt,
- Press key.

Refer to IndFace2x to restore and back up of data in memories additional to data above.

6.5 IndFace2X software for set-up, back up and restore

The set-up and programming of BX30Fill can be done via IndFace2X PC software.

- Download free IndFace2X software from Baykon web page and install it in to your PC,
- Connect from the PC to BX30Fill instrument via USB port, RS232C port or Ethernet port.
- Set port parameters of software to indicator parameters after energizing the instrument.
- Click connect button.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 43 of 432

7. FILLING MODES
BX30 has various filling modes for common filling & packing machines as indicated below. Select the mode
which corresponds to your filling machine and read its descriptions in detail to design the control cabinet.

Mode Description Application

Semiautomatic liquid filling into open container.
Open container filling
OPEN Automatic linear open container filling machines.
Section 7.1, page 45 Automatic rotary open container filling machines.

Semiautomatic liquid filling through bung hole.

Bung-Type container filling
BUNG Automatic linear bung type container filling machines.
Automatic rotary bung type container filling machines.
Section 7.2, page 50

Liquid filling with lance through bung hole.

Filling with lance control
BOTT Automatic linear filling machines with lance control.
Automatic rotary filling machines with lance control.
Section 7.3, page 55
Packing
PACK Automatic packing machines.
Section 7.4, page 61

Bagging Automatic bagging machines.

BAG
Section 7.5, page 66 Big bag filling from hopper scale.

Big bag filling

BIG Big bag filling machines
Section 7.6, page 71

Valve bag filling

VENT Valve type bag filling machines.
Section 7.7, page 75
Bagging machine with one hopper
1BAG scale Controls the filling machine with one hopper scale
including bag hold control.
Section 7.8, page 79

Bagging machine with up to 16 scale Multi hopper scale bag filling machine. #1 scale is the
nBAG master controller of the bagging machine which controls
Section 7.9, page 84 the bag holder.

Controls the weighing section of the multi weighing

Packing machine with up to 16 scale
nPAC hopper packing machine. #1 scale is the master
Section 7.10, page 90 controller of the weighing section of the machine.
Tank filling & filling from tank Tank filling control and/or accurate container filling from
TANK
Section 7.11, page 96 tank.
Weigh in / weigh out
WOUT Sticky/high viscosity material transfer from hopper or
Section 7.12, page 101 tank scale.

Operational details and meanings of digital Inputs and outputs are found in the section of each mode which
is written in the description column.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 44 of 432

7.1 [OPEN] Open Container Filling
This mode is used for filling the non-foamy products in to the open type containers on the weighing
platform. Valve always stays above the container and it does not move at filling. If there is a lifter to load the
container on to the scale at filling machine, the valve may be come closer to the container.

Two typical usages of Open Container Filling mode are shown below.

Figure 7.1 - Open container filling machine

Figure 7.2 - Automatic open container filling machine with lifter

IMPORTANT NOTES:
1. If filling machine has the container lift up mechanism, set the parameter 325 to LIFT.
2. 2 sensors are recommended for checking the lifter position is up or down at automatic filling
machines.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 45 of 432

Typical Applications :
• Filling of liquids in to the open container,
• Filling of solid materials in to the box /container,
• Filling controller of the linear filling machine with or without lifter.
• Filling controller of the multi-head rotating filling machine with or without lifter.

Advantages and opportunities :

• You may build up your receipt for each product filling and can save it in the controller.
• Filling may start with fine or medium feeding against splash the material from open container.
• Container lifting mechanism control at automatic filling machines.
• Feeding adjustments are done automatically to increase accuracy.
• Filling starts with start input or automatically after loading the platform.
• The start signal can be delayed for positioned the container and settling the scale before filling.
• The instrument may calculate the average tare weight to increase the machine productivity.
• Vibration output is available to remove air from product during filling.
• Programmable Select digital inputs and outputs can be used to control peripherals of the machine.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.
• Batch and bulk fillings are available.

The main operation steps are ;

• Place the container on to the scale and apply start input to start filling process.
• If there is a lift mechanism, the container moves to up position.
• The container weight is checked. It should be between maximum and minimum tare limits.
• The dead load on the scale tared automatically at net filling.
• Feeding is done in 1 or 2 or 3 speeds. Feeding may start with fine or medium feeding against
splashing the material from container. Coarse / Medium and fine control delays inhibits feeding cut-
off controls in their sequences. These entries should be big enough to eliminate impact effects of
feedings.
• Tolerance control is done after feeding and settling the scale.
• The lifting mechanism moves down, if any.
• The End of Filling output is produced if filling is complete. If not, error signal is produced.
• Feeding adjustments are done automatically to increase accuracy and to optimize the filling time.
• Filling cycle ends after unloading the container from the platform.
• The filling controller goes to the ready status for the following filling.

Conditions to start the filling :

1. The tare should be in tolerances, Tare min < Tare < Tare max.
2. The scale should be stable for zeroing or taring.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 46 of 432

 If the valve applies force to the container
during lifting, the filling ends.

This protection is very important at liquid

filling machines against to destroy the
container and to splash the material outside.
Error message warns the operator in case of
mis-positioned container at lifting.

If the weight is increased more than the

maximum valve force, the filling process is
ended and the lifter goes back to the to its
DOWN position. Enter smaller value than
destroying force of the container.

Entries: Valve force parameter 31B.

Notes :
1) There is a settling delay if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter 433).
2) The print out or data transfer after filling is required the settling the scale.

Descriptions on the selectable functions :

1) The Run enable, Filling inhibit and Resume functions are activated when inputs are at high
level, e.g. the start signal is executed if run enable input is at high level.
2) The Interrupt function is activated when input is at low level, i.e. the filling is interrupted if the
interrupt input is at low level.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 47 of 432

 3) Filling, Tolerance, Under filling errors can be used to warn the operator against various filling
related errors.
4) Filling in process output can be used to block some filling machine functions during filling, like
conveyors.
5) Alarm output can be used to warn the operator in case of over filling of the container.
6) Logical functions and timers can be used for material silo level and feeding control.
7) Timers can be used for producing various control outputs.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.1.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Input 2 Lifter is at down position 3 2
Input 3 - 4 3
Input 4 - 5 4
Input 5 Lifter is at up position 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready to Fill 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Lift to up 21 5
Output 6 - 22 6
Output 7 - 23 7
Output 8 Drop catcher 24 8
Output 9 Complete ( End of filling ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 48 of 432
 Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions

If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the filling machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available functions
are;

• Run enable • Reject • Drop catcher switch

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Bypass fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • Alarm

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • In zero range
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 49 of 432

7.2 [BUNG] Below Bung hole and Above Level Filling
This mode is used to fill non-foamy liquids below the bung hole of the container on the weighing platform.
The valve moves down through the bung hole after taring for above level filling, and moves up at the end of
feeding the material. The container lifting mechanism can be used at this application instead of valve
movement.

Two typical applications of this mode are;

Figure 7.3 - Bung hole type container filling machine

Figure 7.4 - Automatic bung hole container filling machine with container lifter

Typical Applications :
• Filling above level of bung type container by valve movement,
• Filling above level of bung type container by lifting mechanism,
• The linear filling machine.
• The rotating filling machine.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 50 of 432

Advantages and opportunities :
• You may build up your receipt for each product filling and can save it in the controller.
• Feeding adjustments are done automatically to increase accuracy and to optimize the filling time.
• Valve movement or container lifting mechanism control for below bung hole feeding.
• Container weight is checked before feeding material.
• Filling may start with fine or medium feeding against splash the material from container.
• Filling starts with start input or automatically after loading the platform.
• The start signal can be delayed for positioned the container and settling the scale before filling.
• The instrument may calculate the average tare weight to increase the machine productivity.
• Vibration output is available to remove air from product during filling.
• Programmable Select digital inputs and outputs can be used to control peripherals of the machine.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.
• Batch and bulk fillings are available.
• Resets filling automatically if the valve applies the force to the container instead of go down through
the hole.

The main operation steps for the machine with valve are ;
• Place the container on to the scale and apply start input to start filling process.
• If there is a lift mechanism, the container moves to up position.
• The container weight is checked. It should be between maximum and minimum tare limits.
• The dead load on the scale tared automatically at net filling.
• Valve moves down to go in to the container through the bung hole.
• Feeding is done in 1 or 2 or 3 speeds. Feeding may start with fine or medium feeding against
splashing the material from container. Coarse / Medium and fine control delays inhibits feeding cut-
off controls in their sequences. These entries should be big enough to eliminate impact effects of
feedings.
• Valve moves to up position at the end of feeding.
• Tolerance control is done after settling the scale.
• The lifter goes down if any.
• The feeding cut off adjustments are done automatically to increase filling accuracy of the following
cycles.
• The End of Filling output is produced if filling is complete. If not, error signal is produced.
• Filling cycle ends after unloading the container from the platform.
• The filling controller goes to the ready status for the following filling.

Conditions to start the filling :

1. The tare should be in tolerances, Tare min < Tare < Tare max.
2. The scale should be stable for zeroing or taring.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 51 of 432

 If the valve applies force to the container
during movement to go in to the
container

This protection is very important at liquid

filling machines against to destroy the
container and to splash the material outside.
Error message warns the operator in case of
mis-positioned container at lifting.

If the weight is increased more than the

maximum valve force, the filling process is
ended and the valve goes back to the to its
UP position. Enter smaller value than
destroying force of the container.

Entries: Valve force parameter 416.

Notes :
1) There is a settling delay if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter 433).
2) The print out or data transfer after filling is required the settling the scale.

Descriptions on the selectable functions :

1) The Run enable, Filling inhibit and Resume functions are activated when inputs are at high
level, e.g. the start signal is executed if run enable input is at high level.
2) The Interrupt functions is activated when input is at low level, i.e. the filling is interrupted if the
interrupt input is at low level.
3) Filling, Tolerance, Under filling errors can be used to warn the operator against various filling
related errors.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 52 of 432

 4) Filling in process output can be used to block some filling machine functions during filling, like
conveyors.
5) Alarm output can be used to warn the operator in case of over filling of the container.
6) Logical functions and timers can be used for material silo level and feeding control.
7) Timers can be used for producing various control outputs.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input/output board or unit. Refer to par. groups 33- and 37-.

7.2.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Input 2 Valve is at up position / Lifter at down position 3 2
Input 3 - 4 3
Input 4 - 5 4
Input 5 Valve is at down position / Lifter at up position 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready to Fill 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Valve to down / Lifter to up 21 5
Output 6 - 22 6
Output 7 - 23 7
Output 8 Drop catcher 24 8
Output 9 Complete ( End of Filling ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 53 of 432

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions
If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the filling machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available functions
are;

• Run enable • Reject • Drop catcher switch

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Bypass fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • Alarm

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • In zero range
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 54 of 432

7.3 [BOTT] Container Filling from Bottom
This mode is used to fill the containers with lance position control from bottom to upward against foaming or
oxidization of materials. The filling can be done below or above the material level in the container.

Figure 7.5 – Container filling machine with 4 position lance control

Figure 7.6 - Palette filling machine with lance control

Available switch positions:

UP position of lance The lance is at up position

OUT from bung hole The lance may go out from bung hole during material feeding.
IN the bung hole The lance is in the bung hole to finalize product feeding.
MIDDLE level of the container The lance is at the middle of the container
BOTTOM of the container The lance is at the bottom of the container

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 55 of 432

BX30 Fill controls the lance movement for four different ( par. 417 ) solutions which are;

1. 3 position controls by placing lance control switches to the BOTTOM, IN and UP positions.
a. The lance goes to BOTTOM position to start feeding the material.
b. The lance moves to the IN position after weight is reached to the LANCE BOTTOM weight (par.
417).
c. The lance movement stops at the IN position to finalize feeding.
d. The lance goes to the UP position at the end of feeding.

2. 4 position controls by placing lance control switches to the BOTTOM, MIDDLE, IN and UP positions.
Middle position control is strongly recommended at the filling of the foaming materials.
a. The lance goes to BOTTOM position to start feeding the material.
b. The lance moves to the MIDDLE position after weight is reached to the LANCE BOTTOM weight
(par. 417).
c. The lance waits at MIDDLE position until material weight is reached to the LANCE MIDDLE
weight (par. 418) then goes to the IN position.
d. The lance goes to the UP position at the end of feeding.

3. 4 position control by placing lance control switches to the BOTTOM, IN, OUT and UP positions.
This and the following configurations are recommended against material splash due to lance drift risk.
a. The lance goes to BOTTOM position to start feeding the material.
b. The lance moves to the IN position when the material weight is reached to the LANCE BOTTOM
weight (par. 417).
c. The feeding is finished at the IN position.
d. In case of the lance drift to upward during feeding, the OUT sensor detects its drift and the
lance moved downward to the IN position against splash.
e. The lance goes to the UP position at the end of feeding.

4. 4 position control by placing lance control switches to the BOTTOM, MIDDLE, IN and OUT positions.
a. The lance goes to BOTTOM position to start feeding the material.
b. The lance moves to the MIDDLE position when weight is reached to the LANCE BOTTOM weight
(par. 417).
c. The lance waits at MIDDLE position until material weight is reached to the LANCE MIDDLE
weight (par. 418), then goes to the IN position.
d. In case of the lance drift to upward during feeding, the OUT sensor detects its drift and the
lance moved downward to the IN position against splash.
e. The lance goes to the up position at the end of feeding.

Typical Applications :
• Above level or under level filling of foaming or easy oxidation materials from bottom of the container
with multipoint lance position control.
• Drum filling machines with antioxidant gas blowing in to the container.
• Filling from below of the material at multi-head rotating machine, linear filling machine etc.
• Filling of drums on the palette is available.

Advantages and opportunities :

• You may build up your receipt for each product filling and can save it in the controller.
• Valve drift or container lifting mechanism control against splash the material.
• Anti- oxidation gas blowing in to the container is available.
• Container weight is checked before feeding material.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 56 of 432

 • Filling may start with fine or medium feeding against splash or foaming the material in the
container.
• Feeding adjustments are done automatically to increase accuracy.
• Filling starts with start input or automatically after loading the platform.
• The start signal can be delayed for positioned the container and settling the scale before filling.
• The instrument may calculate the average tare weight to increase the machine productivity.
• Vibration output is available to remove air from product during filling.
• Programmable Select digital inputs and outputs can be used to control peripherals of the machine.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.
• Batch and bulk fillings are available.
• Resets filling automatically if the valve applies the force to the container instead of go down through
the hole.

The main operation steps for the machine with position switches at bottom, middle, in and out
positions are;
• Place the container on to the scale and apply start input to start filling process.
• The dead load on the scale is tared automatically if container weight is in tare limits for net filling.
• Valve moves down to go in to the container through the bung hole.
• After valve is gone to the down position, feeding is done in 2 or 3 speeds. Temporary fine feeding
start is available against splashing the material from container.
• Lance moves from BOTTOM to MIDDLE point if the material is heavier than lance moving weight
from bottom (par 417). After receiving the lance is at MIDDLE point input, the lance is stopped.
• Lance moves from MIDDLE point to the filling in the bung hole position, if the material is heavier
than lance moving weight from middle position, par. 418. After receiving the lance is at bung hole
filling position input, the lance is stopped until end of feeding.
• At the end of feeding, the valve goes out from the container to the up position.
• Tolerance control is done after settling the scale.
• The feeding cut off adjustments are done automatically to increase filling accuracy of the following
cycles.
• The end of filling output is produced, if filling is complete. If not, error signal is produced.
• Filling cycle ends after unloading the container from the platform.
• The filling controller goes to the ready status for the following filling.

Conditions to start the filling :

1. The tare should be in tolerances, Tare min < Tare < Tare max.
2. The scale should be stable for zeroing or taring.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 57 of 432

 If the valve applies force to the container
during movement to go in to the container

This protection is very important at liquid

filling machines against to destroy the
container and to splash the material outside.
Error message warns the operator in case of
mis-positioned container at lifting.

If the weight is increased more than the

maximum valve force, the filling process is
ended and the valve goes back to the to its UP
position. Enter smaller value than destroying
force of the container.

Entries: Valve force parameter 416.

Notes :
1) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
2) The print out or data transfer after filling is required the settling the scale.
3) The fine feed output is activate together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as indicated
in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated after coarse
feeding.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 58 of 432

Descriptions on the selectable functions :
1) The Run enable , Filling inhibit and Resume functions are activated when inputs are at high
level, e.g. the start signal is executed if run enable input is at high level.
2) The Interrupt function is activated when input is at low level, e.g. the filling is interrupted if the
interrupt input is at low level.
3) Filling, Tolerance, Under filling errors can be used to warn the operator against various filling
related errors.
4) Filling in process output can be used to block some filling machine functions during filling, like
conveyors.
5) Alarm output can be used to warn the operator in case of over filling of the container.
6) Logical functions and timers can be used for material silo level and feeding control.
7) Timers can be used for producing various control outputs.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.3.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Valve is at UP position for BIU, BMIU and BIOU or
Input 2 3 2
Valve is at OUT position for BMIO
Input 3 Valve is at IN position 4 3
Valve is at MID position for BMIU and BMIO or
Input 4 5 4
Valve is at OUT position for BIOU
Input 5 Valve is at bottom position 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready to Fill 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Valve to down 21 5
Output 6 Valve to up 22 6
Output 7 - 23 7
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 59 of 432
 Output 8 Drop catcher 24 8
Output 9 Complete ( End of filling ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions

If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the filling machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available functions
are;

• Run enable • Reject • Drop catcher switch

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Bypass fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • Alarm

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • In zero range
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 60 of 432

7.4 [PACK] Packing Scale
This mode is used to control the accurate filling the material at the weighing scale and emptying it to the
packing section of the packing machine. After receiving start input or automatically after emptying, the
accurate filling is done. Filled material in the hopper is emptied after receiving empty input from packing
machine controller. The cut-off adjustments are done automatically for accurate filling in a long time.

Multicycle filling is available to fill containers / bags which their nominal weights are more than the scale
capacity.

Usage of “packing machine with up to 16 weighing hoppers“ mode is recommended to eliminate additional
interface between BX30 Fill controllers and PLC for emptying scales in sequence.

Figure 7.7 - Weighing scale control of the packing machine

Typical Applications :
• Multi scale packing machines.
• Weighing of additives in tank or hopper.
• Batching with material scales.
• Adding critical materials in to the batch.

Advantages and opportunities :

• You may build up your receipt content.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase accuracy.
• Programmable zeroing period to increase the packing capacity.
• Automatic accuracy adjustment with programmable sampling quantity and frequency.
• Operation runs automatically or under PLC/HMI control.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 61 of 432

 • The operation may start from filling or from emptying.
• The filling start can be delayed for accurate zeroing the scale.
• Vibration control for throwing gas from product at filling or at emptying.
• Free programmable digital inputs and outputs for your machine control.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.

Operation :
The filling and emptying are follows each other automatically or via digital fill start and empty inputs. The
operation may set to start from filling or from emptying in automatic operation.

Filling the hopper:

• Weighing of the material starts automatically after emptying or by start input. Use Run Enable input
if start is automatic.
• The scale is zeroed for accurate filling.
• 2 or 3 speed filling start if the emptying gate is close.
• At the end of filling the tolerance control is done.
• End of filling output is produced if filling is in tolerances.
• The material is ready to empty to the packing machine to empty in to the package.

Emptying the hopper:

• Apply discharge input if the filled material is ready to empty and pack is ready to fill.
• The emptying gate is opened.
• If the load is lighter than Empty weight, gate delay time runs.
• The emptying gate closes at the end of the delay time and Pack is filled output is produced for 200
ms.
• The weighing scale is ready to fill.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 62 of 432

 Notes :
1) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
2) The fine feed output is activated together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as
indicated in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated
after coarse feeding.

Descriptions on the selectable functions :

1) The Run enable, Filling inhibit and Resume functions are activated when inputs are at high
level, e.g. the start signal is executed if run enable input is at high level.
2) The Interrupt function is activated when input is at low level, e.g. the filling is interrupted if the
interrupt input is at low level.
3) Filling, Tolerance, Under filling errors can be used to warn the operator against various filling
related errors.
4) Filling in process output can be used to block some filling machine functions during filling, like
conveyors.
5) Scale is empty output can be used to transfer the empty container automatically to the filling
station.
6) Alarm output can be used to warn the operator in case of over filling of the container.
7) Logical functions and timers can be used for material silo level and feeding control.
8) Timers can be used for producing various control outputs.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 63 of 432

7.4.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs
RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling / RUN 2 1
Input 2 Start discharge ( from packing machine ) 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready to Run 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate 22 6
Output 7 23 7
Output 8 Ready to discharge ( to packing machine ) 24 8
Output 9 Pack is filled ( to the packing machine for 200ms) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions

If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the packing machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 64 of 432

 • Run enable • Reject • Remote input of
Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status fieldbus
Input functions • Interrupt • Empty scale
• Resume • Bypass
• Filling in progress • Filling errors • Alarm
Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • In zero range
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 65 of 432

7.5 [BAG ] Bagging Scale
This mode is used to control the accurate filling and emptying the weighing hopper to send material in to the
bag. After receiving start input or automatically after emptying, the accurate filling is done. The filled
material in the hopper is emptied after receiving empty input. The cut-off adjustments are done
automatically for accurate filling in a long time.
“ Bagging machine with single weighing hopper “ or “ bagging machine with up to 16 weighing hoppers “
modes are recommended to eliminate additional controllers or PLC in these bagging machines. Multicycle
filling is available to fill containers / bags which their nominal weights are more than the scale capacity
( Refer to page 111 for details ).

Figure 7.8 - Weighing hopper control of the Bagging machine

Figure 7.9 - Single material weighing at batching system

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 66 of 432

Typical Applications :
• Bag and big bag filling machines.
• Weighing of additives in tank or hopper.
• Batching with separate material weighing hoppers.
• Adding critical materials in to the batch.

Advantages and opportunities :

• You can decide your receipt content depend on the usage.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase accuracy.
• Programmable zeroing period to increase the filling speed.
• Automatic accuracy adjustment with programmable sampling quantity and frequency.
• Operation runs automatically or under PLC/HMI control.
• The operation may start from filling or from emptying.
• The filling start can be delayed for zeroing the scale safely.
• Vibration control for throwing gas from product at filling or at emptying.
• Programmable digital inputs and outputs for your machine.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.

Operation :
The filling and emptying are follows each other automatically or via digital fill start and empty inputs. The
operation may set to start from filling or from emptying in automatic operation.

Filling the hopper :

• The filling is start automatically after emptying or by start filling input. Select Start Filling signal as
level and apply Start Filling Input during packing, which means RUN, if filling will start automatically.
• The hopper weight is zeroed if zeroing period is over.
• 2 or 3 speed filling is done if the emptying gate is close.
• The tolerance control is done at the end of feeding.
• End of filling output is produced if filling is in tolerances.

Emptying the hopper :

• Empty input is applied to BX30 Fill if the pack is ready to fill.
• The emptying gate is opened.
• If the load is lighter than Empty weight, gate delay time runs.
• The emptying gate closes at the end of the delay time to minimize the residual material.
• The complete output is produced after complete delay time to the following process.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 67 of 432

 Notes :
1) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
2) The fine feed output is activated together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as
indicated in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated
after coarse feeding.

Descriptions on the selectable functions :

1) The Run enable, Filling inhibit and Resume functions are activated when inputs are at high
level, e.g. the start signal is executed if run enable input is at high level.
2) The Interrupt function is activated when input is at low level, e.g. the filling is interrupted if the
interrupt input is at low level.
3) Filling, Tolerance, Under filling errors can be used to warn the operator against various filling
related errors.
4) Filling in process output can be used to block some filling machine functions during filling, like
conveyors.
5) Scale is empty output can be used to transfer the empty container automatically to the filling
station.
6) Alarm output can be used to warn the operator in case of over filling of the container.
7) Logical functions and timers can be used for material silo level and feeding control.
8) Timers can be used for producing various control outputs.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 68 of 432

7.5.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs
RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling / Run 2 1
Input 2 Start discharge 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready to fill 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate ( to fill the bag ) 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate 22 6
Output 7 23 7
Output 8 Ready to discharge 24 8
Output 9 Emptied in to the bag (200ms) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions

If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the bagging machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 69 of 432

 • Run enable • Reject • Remote input of
• Filling inhibit • Hold status fieldbus
Selectable
Input functions • Interrupt • Empty scale
• Resume • Bypass

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • Alarm

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • In zero range
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 70 of 432

7.6 [BIG ] Big Bag filling machine
The most common four kind of the big bag filling machine type can be controlled by BX30Fill. Additional
functions requirements can be supplied by setting the selectable I/O’s. Set the parameter 326 for the
operation type of the big bag filling machine.

1. Filling on the scale with lifter control : The bag, loop holders, the bag clamp mechanism etc. are
located on the weighing system. The big bag is placed on the holders. Catch the bag signal is
applied to the BX30Fill controller to hold the bag. After closing the clamp, the material feeding starts
during lifting up the big bag or after lifting up it. The vibration can be applied to the big bag, or the
holders are moved down and up to settle the material in the big bag during filling. After end of filling
the lifter goes down and catch clamp released to end filling.
2. Filling on the scale without lifter control : The bag, loop holders, the bag clamp mechanism etc.
are located on the weighing system. The big bag is placed on the holders and position of loop
holders are controlled by operator. After placing the bag valve to the material outlet, catch the bag
signal is applied to the BX30 Filling controller. After closing the clamp the feeding starts. During
feeding the vibration can be applied to the big bag to settle the material in the bag. The catch clamp
is released and Filling is ended output is produced after filling.
3. Filling from the weighing hopper : Refer to Bag filling machine related modes on pages 66.
4. Open big bag filling : You may fill open big bags by canceling valve catching operation.

Figure 7.10 - Bag filling on the platform

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 71 of 432

 Figure 7.11 - Bag filling by hanging the bag

Typical Applications :
• Big bag filling on the platform.
• Big bag filling by hanging scale.
• Open big bag filling.

Advantages and opportunities :

• Eliminates additional PLC in the cabinet to control complete machine.
• Increases the system reliability, speed and efficiency due to only one electronic instrument for
controlling whole machine.
• Vibration control for throwing gas from product at filling.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase accuracy.
• The operation may start with bag valve clapping or with lifting the big bag.
• Programmable digital inputs and outputs for peripheral control needs, e.g. signal to bag transfer
conveyor after releasing the bag, hanger movement for settling the material during filling etc.
• Material feeding control to the material bin on the bagging machine is available.
• Air blower control on the material feeding line is available.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.

Operation :
The diagram shown below indicates the operation of the filling machine with lifting control. Here material
feeding is started after closing the clamp.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 72 of 432

 Notes :
1) Bag puffing output can be produced from catch the bag output or “Bag clamp is closed” input or
feeding gate output or feeding is progress output ( selectable ) by timer function of any select
output, if any.
2) The air output to empty the feeding pipe can be produced from the fine feed output and timers 3
output of any select output.
3) The bag transfer system can be informed that the bag is dropped by using the complete output.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.6.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Input 2 Catch the big bag 3 2
Input 3 Lifter is at up position 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 Bag clamp is closed 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 73 of 432

 Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Lifter to up 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate 22 6
Output 7 Clamp ( Hold the bag ) 23 7
Output 8 Full ( EOF, 200ms) 24 8
Output 9 Complete ( Filled / Bag is released for 200ms ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions

If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the bagging machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

• Run enable • Reject • Logic inputs

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Empty scale fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume • Bypass

• Filling in progress • Vibration • Alarm

Selectable • Scale is empty • Filling errors • In zero range
output • End of batch • Tolerance error • Logic output
functions • Feeding is progress • Under filling error • Remote output of
fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 74 of 432

7.7 [VENT] Valve Mount Type Bag filling machine
This mode is used to control the valve type bag filling machines. The machine weights the bag during filling
and drops it on to the transport system after filling.

Figure 7.12 – Valve mount type bag filling machine

Typical Applications :
• Valve mount type bag filling machine

Advantages and opportunities :

• Eliminates additional PLC in the cabinet to control complete bagging machine.
• Increases the system reliability, speed and efficiency due to only one electronic instrument for
controlling whole machine.
• Vibration control for throwing gas from product at filling.
• Bag puffing control before start feeding and air exhaust control during filling and until dropping the
bag.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase accuracy.
• Programmable digital inputs and outputs for peripheral control needs, e.g. signal to bag transfer
conveyor after releasing the bag.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 75 of 432

 • Material feeding control to the material bin on the bagging machine is available.
• Air blower control on the material feeding line is available.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.

Operation :
The bagging starts by holding the bag and then feeding is start to fill the bag after blowing it. At the end of
filling the bag clamp is released to drop the bag.

• The “Close the bag clamp” input is applied to the controller after placing the bag.
• The bag clamp is closed and bag is puffed by pressured air.
• 2 or 3 speed filling start after opening the feeding gate. Air in the bag is exhausted during feeding
the material.
• Vibration is applied to the bag for throwing gas from material.
• At the end of filling the tolerance control is done.
• The bag clamp is dropped after bag clamp release delay.

Notes :
1) Bag puffing output can be produced from catch the bag output or “Bag clamp is closed” input or
feeding gate output or feeding is progress output ( selectable ) by timer function of any select
output, if any.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 76 of 432

 2) The air output to empty the feeding pipe can be produced from the fine feed output and timers 3
output of any select output.
3) The bag transfer system can be informed that the bag is dropped by using the complete output.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.7.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Input 2 Close the bag clamp 3 2
Input 3 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 Bag clamp is closed 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate 22 6
Output 7 Clamp ( Hold the bag ) 23 7
Output 8 Full ( EOF, 200ms) 24 8
Output 9 Bag is released ( complete, 200ms) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 77 of 432

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions
If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the bagging machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

• Run enable • Reject • Logic inputs

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Empty scale fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume • Bypass

• Filling in progress • Vibration • Alarm

• Scale is empty • Filling errors • In zero range
Selectable
• End of batch • Tolerance error • Logic output
output functions
• Feeding is progress • Under filling • Remote output of
error fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 78 of 432

7.8 [1BAG] Bagging machine with single weighing hopper
This mode is used to control the bagging machine which has a single weighing hopper without any PLC
requirement. The BX30Fill controls the bag clamp system, feeding rotary valve, pump, material silo empty
control etc. besides controlling of the accurate filling and emptying of the weighing hopper. The operation
can be started by emptying or by filling after power on, and ends after releasing the last filled bag.

Multicycle filling is available to fill containers / bags which their nominal weights are more than the scale
capacity. Selectable digital inputs and outputs of the instrument can be used to control other peripherals on
the filling machine.

Figure 7.13 - Bagging machine with a single weighing scale

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 79 of 432

Typical Applications :
• Filling machines with one scale for liquid or solid materials.
• Big bag filling machines with weighing hopper.

Advantages and opportunities :

• Eliminates additional PLC in the cabinet to control complete bagging machine.
• Increases the system reliability, speed and efficiency due to only one electronic instrument for
controlling the whole machine.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase accuracy.
• The operation may start with filling or with emptying.
• Vibration control for throwing gas from product at filling or at emptying.
• Free programmable digital inputs and outputs for peripheral control needs, e.g. signal to bag
transfer conveyor after releasing the bag.
• Material feeding control to the material bin on the bagging machine is available.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.

Operation :
The machine runs during the start input is active and ends after emptying the last filled bag. Use the Run
Enable input or level start input to stop the operation after emptying the last filled material in to the bag.

Bag clamp control

• Insert the bag to its place and hold it while applying Close the bag clamp input to the controller. Both
close the bag clamp input should be applied together, if the second close the bag clamp input “S2”
is selected from parameter 33-.
• The bag clamp is closed to catch the bag
• After emptying the weighted material from hopper, the bag clamp delay starts and then the bag
clamp releases the bag.
• The operator places the empty bag to the machine to go on bagging.

Filling the hopper

• The filling starts automatically after closing the emptying gate if Run Enable input is active.
• The hopper weight is zeroed after zeroing delay.
• 2 or 3 speed material feeding is done. The filling stops if the emptying gate is opened during filling.
• At the end of filling the tolerance control is done.
• End of filling output is produced if filling is in tolerances.
• The material is ready to empty to the empty bag.
• The feeding cut off values are adjusted automatically for following filling.

Emptying the hopper

• If the filled material is ready to empty from weighing hopper, and empty bag is catched after
releasing the previous filled bag.
• The emptying gate is opened.
• The material weight is controlled to down to the empty range and then emptying delay runs.
• The gate is closed at the end of the emptying delay and bag clamp delay starts to release the bag.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 80 of 432

 Notes :
1) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
2) The fine feed output is activated together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as
indicated in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated
after coarse feeding.

Descriptions on the selectable functions :

1) The Run enable, Filling inhibit and Resume functions are activated when inputs are at high
level, e.g. the start signal is executed if run enable input is at high level.
2) The Interrupt function is activated when input is at low level, e.g. the filling is interrupted if the
interrupt input is at low level.
3) Filling, Tolerance, Under filling errors can be used to warn the operator against various filling
related errors.
4) Filling in process output can be used to block some filling machine functions during filling, like
conveyors.
5) Scale is empty output can be used to transfer the empty container automatically to the filling
station.
6) Alarm output can be used to warn the operator in case of over filling of the container.
7) Logical functions and timers can be used for material silo level and feeding control.
8) Timers can be used for producing various control outputs.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 81 of 432

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.8.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling / Run 2 1
Input 2 Close the bag clamp 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 Bag clamp is closed 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready for bagging 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate 22 6
Output 7 Clamp ( Hold the bag ) 23 7
Output 8 Ready to discharge 24 8
Output 9 Bag is full ( EOF, 200ms ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 82 of 432

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions
If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the bagging machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

• Run enable • Reject • Bypass

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Logic inputs
Input functions • Interrupt • Empty scale • Remote input of
• Resume • S2 fieldbus

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • In zero range

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • Logic output
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration • Alarm fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 83 of 432

7.9 [nBAG] Bagging machine with up to 16 weighing
hoppers
This mode is mostly used to controls the whole bagging machine which has double or four weighing
hoppers without any PLC or HMI requirement. BX30 Fill weighing controllers control the bag clamp system,
feeding rotary valves, pump, material silo empty control, emptying sequence etc. additional to fill and
discharge the material.

The master controller transfers the receipt data to slave controllers before start filling. The master unit
controls emptying sequence, bag clamp control etc. additional to its filling process. Slave instruments
control the weighing and emptying cycles of their hoppers. Selectable digital inputs and outputs of both
instruments can be used to control other peripherals on the filling machine.

Figure 7.14 - Bagging machine with double weighing scale

Typical Applications :
• Bagging machines with 2 or more weighing hoppers.
• Select inputs and outputs can be used to level control of the material bin, feeding gate control,
rotary valve control etc.
• Vibration control for sticky materials or throw out the gas from bag.
• The feeder can be used as buffer to cummulate the material to increase the bagging capacity after
closing feeding gate.

Advantages and opportunities :

• Eliminates additional PLC in the cabinet to control complete bagging machine.
• Emptying the scales are done in sequence.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 84 of 432

 • Increases the system reliability, speed and efficiency due to only one electronic instrument for
controlling whole machine and filling.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase the accuracy.
• Vibration control for throwing gas from product at weighing or at emptying of the material.
• Free programmable digital inputs and outputs for peripheral control needs, e.g. signal to bag
transfer conveyor after releasing the bag.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.
• In case of malfunction at one of the controller, the other operates the machine with one scale.

Interconnection between two BX30 Fill and commissioning

Two filling controllers can be connected to each other via RS232C, RS485 or Ethernet TCP/IP serial ports for
master slave operation. The RS232C port can be used only at double BX30Fill connection. The serial port of
master controller must be addressed 01 ( scale 1 ) and the slave controller is addressed 02 ( scale 2 ) and
more in sequence. All parameters, receipt build, receipt entries and memory entries is done to the master
controller and transferred to the slave controllers automatically.
1. Enter interconnection port of master unit and set it to MASTER and address 01.
2. Enter the set-up mode of the slave controllers. Enter the parameter of the interconnection ports.
Select master slave operation MAST and set their address 02, 03, 04 etc. in sequence.
3. Connect instruments via serial port which will be used for interconnection after installing controllers
to the cabinet and cabling as described in this section.
4. Enter set – up parameters of master controller and set all parameter values including calibration
related parameters, capacity, division etc.
5. All parameter values are transferred automatically to the slave controllers at the exit from
programming. The zero and gain calibration coefficients are not transferred.
6. Perform calibration to each scale and test their weighing performance.
7. Build receipt and save the data in to memories at master controller.
8. Select the receipt at master controller and apply run input to start packing with four scales.
9. The operation will start after transferring the receipt data to slave instruments.

Operation
The filling and emptying are follows each other automatically after applying RUN input. The operation can
start from filling or emptying. The master scale controls the bag clamp additional to its filling and
discharging control. De-activate the run input to end the filling. The machine stops the filling after emptying
all hoppers.
Bag clamp control by master controller
• The bag is brought to the its filling place and the hold the bag input is applied to the master
controller. Both close the bag clamp input should be applied together, if the second close the bag
clamp input “S2” is selected from parameter 33-.
• The bag clamp is closed to hold the bag for filling.
• After emptying the weighing hopper the bag clamp delay starts and then the bag clamp releases.
• The operator places the empty bag to the machine to discharge the second scale.
Filling the each hopper
• The filling of the hopper starts if Run Enable input is active after discharge.
• The hopper weight is zeroed.
• Filling starts if the emptying gate is close.
• At the end of filling the tolerance control is done.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 85 of 432
 • End of filling output is produced if filling is in tolerances.
Emptying the hopper
• Master scale transmits discharge command to the scale which will be discharged via serial interface
if the bag is ready to fill.
• The emptying gate of the scale is opened.
• The scale load is controlled to down to the empty range and then gate delay runs.
• The gate closes at the end of the delay and end of discharge output is produced.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 86 of 432

 Notes :
1) Zeroing is done in frequency entered to the zeroing frequency.
2) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
3) The fine feed output is activated together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as
indicated in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated
after coarse feeding.
4) The material in the material tank / silo can be controlled via select inputs and outputs.
5) Tolerance controls only can be done during preact adjustment.
6) Statistical calculations are done during preact adjustment as a sampling for statistical quality
control.
IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.9.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.
Digital Inputs and Outputs of Master Controller ( Scale 1 ).

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Run 2 1
Input 2 Close the bag clamp 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate-1 is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate-1 is open 5 4
Input 5 Bag clamp is closed 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed-1 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed-1 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed-1 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate-1 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate-1 22 6
Output 7 Clamp ( Hold the bag ) 23 7
Output 8 Full ( EOF ) 24 8
Output 9 Bag is released ( complete, 200ms ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 87 of 432
 Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Digital Inputs and Outputs of Slave Controller ( Scales 2 / 3 / 4 … / 16 ).

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 2 1
Input 2 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate-2 is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate-2 is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed-2 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed -2 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed-2 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate-2 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate-2 22 6
Output 7 23 7
Output 8 Full ( EOF ) 24 8
Output 9 25 9
Output 10 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V 12 to 30 VDC power supply 16 17
-V Ground 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 88 of 432

Free programmable Input / Outputs
If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the bagging machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

• Run enable • Reject • Logic inputs

• Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
Master • Interrupt • Empty scale fieldbus
Selectable • Resume • Bypass
Input
• Reject • Logic inputs
functions
• Hold status • Remote input of
Slave • Empty scale fieldbus
• Bypass

• Filling in progress • Vibration • Alarm

• Feeding is progress • Filling errors • In zero range
Master • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • Logic output
Selectable • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
fieldbus
output
functions • Feeding is progress • Tolerance error • Logic output
• Scale is empty • Under filling error • Remote output of
Slave • Vibration • Alarm fieldbus
• Filling errors • In zero range

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 89 of 432

7.10 [nPAC] Packing machine with up to 16 weighing
hoppers
This mode is used to control the whole weighing section of the packing machine. The master BX30Fill
controller directs operation of all weighing scales and manages synchronization between weighing and
packing sections of the machine. BX30Fill controllers may be control the level of the material silo. In this
application, the scale which its addressed as 01 will be master and the address of slave shall be addressed
as 02, 03 and 04 sequentially. Refer to parameter 111 and 119.

The master controller transfers the receipt data to slave controllers and controls emptying sequence at the
weighing hoppers besides the filling and discharging of its scale. Select inputs or outputs of instruments can
be used to control other peripherals of the filling machine like material silo level control. Using of slave
controllers slave inputs and outputs as a select ports are suggested due to sharing the real time controls
between instruments.

Figure 7.15 - Packing machine with four weighing scale

Typical Applications :
• Packing machine with 4 weighing scale.
• Multi scale packing machine.

Advantages and opportunities :

• Eliminates additional PLC in the cabinet to control complete weighing section of the packing
machine.
• Signalization between weighing section and packing section of the packing machine.
• Emptying scales are done in sequence. Every filled scale is emptied in sequence against subsidence
of the material.
• Increases the system reliability, speed and efficiency due to eliminated PLC.
• Filling adjustment is done automatically to increase the accuracy.
• The operation may start with filling or with emptying.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 90 of 432
 • Vibration control for throwing gas from product at weighing or at emptying of the material.
• Free programmable digital inputs and outputs for peripheral control needs, e.g. signal to pack
transfer conveyor or material silo level control.
• The feeder can cumulate the material after closing feeding gate to increase the packing capacity.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.
• In case of malfunction at one of the controller, the second can be attended as master to go on
packing with 3 scales.

Interconnection between four BX30 Fill and commissioning

Filling controllers can be connected to each other via RS485 or Ethernet TCP/IP serial ports for master slave
operation. The serial port of master controller is addressed 01 ( scale #1 ) and the slave controllers are
addressed 02 ( scale #2 ), 03( scale #3 ) and 04( scale #4 ). All parameters, receipt build, receipt entries
and memory entries is done to the master controller and transferred to the slave controllers automatically.
1. Enter the set-up mode of the controllers. Enter parameter of the interconnection port. Select master
slave operation MAST and set master address 01 and slave addresses 02, 03 and 04 sequentially.
2. Connect instruments via serial port which will be used for interconnection after installing controllers
to the cabinet and cabling as described in this section.
3. Enter set – up parameters of master controller and set all parameter values including calibration
related parameters, capacity, division etc.
4. All parameter values are transferred automatically to the slave controllers at the exit from
programming.
5. Perform calibration of scales.
6. Build receipt and save the data in to memories at master controller.
7. Select the receipt at master controller and apply run input to start packing with four scales.
8. The operation will start after transferring the receipt data to slave instruments.

Operation :
The filling and emptying are follows each other automatically after applying RUN input. The operation may
set to start from filling or from emptying in automatic operation. The master scale controls the bag clamp
additional to its filling and discharging control.

Filling the hopper

• The material weighing starts if Run input is active after discharging.
• The hopper weight is zeroed.
• Filling starts if the emptying gate is close.
• At the end of filling the tolerance control is done.
• End of filling data is transferred to the master.
• Master activated Complete output which informs one of the scale is ready to empty.

Emptying the hopper

• Packing section of the machine sends start empty command to master unit.
• Master scale transmits discharge command to the scale which will be discharged.
• The emptying gate of the scale is opened.
• The gate closes at the end of the emptying. The filling starts automatically.
• Master is activated pack is filled (Complete) output to the packing section after complete delay.
Complete delay should be adjusted to fall the whole material in to the pack before closing it.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 91 of 432

 Figure 7.16 – Filling cycle for scale-1

Figure 7.17 – Signalization between the weighing and packing sections of the machine.

Notes :
1) Zeroing is done in frequency entered to the zeroing frequency.
2) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
3) The fine feed output is activated together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as
indicated in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated
after coarse feeding.
4) The material in the material tank / silo can be controlled via select inputs and outputs.
5) Tolerance controls only can be done during preact adjustment.
6) Statistical calculations are done during preact adjustment as a sampling for statistical quality
control.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 92 of 432

7.10.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs
RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

Digital Inputs and Outputs of Master Controller ( Scale 1 ).

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Run 2 1
Input 2 Start discharge ( from packing machine ) 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate-1 is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate-1 is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed-1 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed-1 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed-1 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate-1 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate-1 22 6
Output 7 23 7
Output 8 Ready to Discharge ( to packing machine ) 24 8
Output 9 Pack is filled ( to the packing machine, 200ms ) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 93 of 432

Digital Inputs and Outputs of Slave Controllers ( Scales 2 / 3 / 4 … / 16 ).

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 2 1
Input 2 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate-2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate-2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed-2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed -2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed-2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate-2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate-2 / 3 / 4…/ 16 22 6
Output 7 23 7
Output 8 24 8
Output 9 25 9
Output 10 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V 12 to 30 VDC power supply 16 17
-V Ground 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 94 of 432

Free programmable Input / Outputs
If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the bagging machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

• Run enable • Reject • Logic inputs

• Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
Master • Interrupt • Empty scale fieldbus
Selectable • Resume • Bypass
Input
• Reject • Logic inputs
functions
• Hold status • Remote input of
Slave • Empty scale fieldbus
• Bypass

• Filling in progress • Vibration • Alarm

• Feeding is progress • Filling errors • In zero range
Master • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • Logic output
Selectable • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output
of fieldbus
output
functions • Feeding is progress • Tolerance error • Logic output
• Scale is empty • Under filling error • Remote output
Slave • Vibration • Alarm of fieldbus
• Filling errors • In zero range

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 95 of 432

7.11 [TANK] Fill the Container from Tank Scale
This mode is used to fill the weighing tank with material(s) and discharging it to fill containers. Filling and
discharging can be done very accurately by saving proper receipts in to the receipt memory. You may use
some part of receipt memory for filling and some part of receipt memory for discharging. This mode can be
used at various batching and filling systems.

Figure 7.18 - Filling by weighing the tank or silo

Figure 7.19 - Filling from batching scale by using very simple PLC.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 96 of 432

Typical Applications :
• Filling the material tank with material and then filling containers from tank.
• Batching and filling at the same tank scale.
• Basic multicomponent batching.
• Discharging the ingredient to the tank / mixer at constant amounts.
• Filling the mixer and discharging it at specified amounts.

Advantages and opportunities :

• You may build up your receipt content.
• Some receipts in the memory can be used for filling and some of them can be used for discharging.
• Materials of the batch can be saved in to the receipt memory and each material can be filled after
selecting the material feeding system and its receipt from memory.
• Weighing controller controls accurate weighing of all materials.
• The start and discharge operations can be delayed.
• Vibration output can be used for settling the material in the tank, for mixing, for heating etc.
• Select In / Out’s can be used for controlling peripherals.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.

Operation :
The filling and discharging can be done independently as described below. Here;

Filling or discharging weight = Target + Overfill

The target and overfill values should be entered before start filling or discharging due to their common
usage at filling and discharging. Using separate receipts for filling and discharging is recommended.

Filling
• Enter target and feed-in values to the weighing controller or select the – filling - receipt from
memory.
• Select the material from cabinet in case of multi feeding tank.
• Apply filling start input to start filling of material in to the tank.
• If the discharge gate is closed, the feeding starts to fill the weighing tank after zeroing or taring.
• Tolerance control is done after settling time.
• At the end of filling the feeding gate is closed and Full ( EOF ) prompt displayed.
• This means the material is ready in the tank.
• You may fill the following material or discharge the tank in to containers or empty the tank.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 97 of 432

 Figure 7.20 – Filling cycle

Discharging
• Enter target and feed-in values to the weighing controller or select the – discharge – receipt from
memory.
• After receiving the discharge start input the scale tares automatically and discharging starts.
• Discharging is done accurately in multi speeds under feeding gate control. The feeding stops and
error signal produced if feeding gate opens during discharging.
• Tolerance control is done after settling time.
• The EOD output produced at the end of discharging.

Figure 7.21 – Discharge cycle

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 98 of 432

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.11.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.

BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit

I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Input 2 Start discharge 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14
Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready 17 1
Output 2 Coarse discharge 18 2
Output 3 Medium discharge 19 3
Output 4 Fine discharge 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate 21 5
Output 6 Fine feed 22 6
Output 7 Coarse feed 23 7
Output 8 End of filling (EOF) 24 8
Output 9 End of discharge (EOD) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 99 of 432

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions
If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the filling machine.. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available
functions are;

• Run enable • Reject • Logic inputs

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Empty scale fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume • Bypass

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • In zero range

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • Logic output
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration • Alarm fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 100 of 432
7.12 [WOUT] Weight-in / Weight-out
This mode is used to fill the material which has high viscosity and is not easy to empty the material from the
weighing hopper, or for weighing critical ingredients of batching systems. The accurate material weighing is
done during discharging at Weigh-in / Weigh-out mode. Filling and discharging are done in sequence for
having better accuracy due to remaining material which its weight affects the accuracy of weighing for risky
materials. The system accuracy increases for dust materials if the filling is done just before discharging.

In this operation;
Filling weight = Target + Overfill + Empty weight (Remaining material)
Discharge weight = Target + Overfill.

Filling is done one speed and discharging can be done up to 3 speeds. The recommended remaining
material weight is more than 5 % of the Target for accurate discharging which is depend on the material
fluidity.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 101 of 432
Typical Applications :
• High accurate weighing in multi-scale batching systems by weighing ingredients at discharge to
increase the batching accuracy of the formula.
• Filling or transfer materials which has high viscosity.
• Ingredient / additive weighing of the batch in high accuracy.
• Adding critical materials in to the batch.
• Weighing of sticky materials to add in to the batch at mixer.
• To place the raw materials on the transfer conveyor as a sandwich by adjusting discharge timings of
hoppers.

Advantages and opportunities :

• You may build up your receipt and program your operation for best.
• The instrument follows the material behavior at filling and discharging separately to increase the
system accuracy.
• Adjustments are done automatically to minimize deviations from targets at filling and discharging.
• Weighing controller checks the flow rates at weighing cycle to increase the accuracy.
• Vibration control is available for regular discharging.
• Programmable digital inputs and outputs for your machine requirements.
• Production does not stop in case of digital port malfunction! Use reserve inputs and outputs until
changing the digital In/Out board or unit.
• Batch or bulk discharging are available.

Operation :
The operations should start with filling and discharging is done if the weighing hopper is full. If the material
weight in the hopper is heavier than 98% of filling weight the EOF ( Full output ) is activated at power on .

Filling:
• Apply filling start input to start filling.
• If the discharge gate is closed, the feeding starts to fill the weighing hopper to filling weight [Target
+ Overfill + Empty weight ].
• At the end of filling the feeding gate is closed and Full ( EOF ) prompt displayed.
• The material is ready to transfer in the weighing hopper / tank.

Discharging;
• After receiving the discharge start input, discharging starts if the discharged weight is at least 98%
of the material weight in the hopper.
• The scale tares automatically and starts discharging.
• Discharging is done in multi speeds.
• Tolerance control is done after settling time.
• The EOD output produced at the end of discharging.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 102 of 432
 Notes :
1) There is a settling delay only if the preact adjustment is done after the filling ( refer to parameter
433).
2) The fine feed output is activated together with coarse feed output if parameter 316 is FC as
indicated in the drawing above. If this parameter is adjusted to C, the fine feed output is activated
after coarse feeding.

IMPORTANT NOTES: In case of malfunction at any digital input or output port, you can use reserve ports to
go on filling until receiving the new digital input / output board or unit. Refer to parameter groups 33- and
37-.

7.12.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs

RELATED PAGES: Refer to pages 28, 161, 162, 200.
BX30 Fill A RIO16 Unit
I/O Description
Terminal Terminal
Input 1 Start filling 2 1
Input 2 Start discharge 3 2
Input 3 Discharge gate is closed 4 3
Input 4 Feeding gate is open 5 4
Input 5 6 5
Input 6 Reset 7 6
Input 7 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 9 7
Input 8 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 10 8
Input 9 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 11 10
Input 10 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 12 11
Input 11 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) 13 12
Input 12 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) 14 13
Input 13 Select 7 ( Default: Disabled ) - 14

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 103 of 432
 Input 14 Select 8 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Input 15 Select 9 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
Input 16 ACK / Resume ( Default: Disabled ) - 17
Com Common for inputs 1, 8 9, 18
Output 1 Ready 17 1
Output 2 Coarse feed 18 2
Output 3 Medium feed 19 3
Output 4 Fine feed 20 4
Output 5 Open discharge gate 21 5
Output 6 Open feeding gate 22 6
Output 7 Feeding 23 7
Output 8 End of filling (EOF) 24 8
Output 9 End of discharge(EOD, 200ms) 25 9
Output 10 Error 26 10
Output 11 Select 1 / Reserve 1 ( Default: Disabled ) 27 11
Output 12 Select 2 / Reserve 2 ( Default: Disabled ) 28 12
Output 13 Select 3 ( Default: Disabled ) 29 13
Output 14 Select 4 ( Default: Disabled ) 30 14
Output 15 Select 5 ( Default: Disabled ) - 15
Output 16 Select 6 ( Default: Disabled ) - 16
+V +12 to 28 VDC 16 17
-V 0 VDC 15 18

Selectable Input / Outputs Functions

If you program selectable inputs and outputs for your usage, you will have additional digital interfaces to
control peripherals of the filling machine. Refer to section 12 on page 120 for details. The available functions
are;

• Run enable • Reject • Logic inputs

Selectable • Filling inhibit • Hold status • Remote input of
• Interrupt • Empty scale fieldbus
Input functions
• Resume • Bypass

• Filling in progress • Filling errors • In zero range

Selectable • Scale is empty • Tolerance error • Logic output
output functions • End of batch • Under filling error • Remote output of
• Vibration • Alarm fieldbus

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 104 of 432
8. OPERATION METHODS
Operation process can be described to the machine by defining filling method, tare type, machine type and
related functions additional to scale related features. In this section, the filling methods taring types and
adjustment technics are described.

8.1 Filling Methods

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 312, 344 and 41A.

BX30 Filling controller can control filling processes in 5 ways which are;

Methods Operation

The filling machine starts filling cycle after receiving start input of the
Continuous
automatic filling machine or semiautomatic filling machine.
filling
The following filling starts after receiving start input when the instrument
with pulse start input
is at ready status.

Continuous The start input should be a level input and is used as a run signal. The
filling filling machine operates continuously as an auto-start filling machine.
with level start input Automatic filling ends after removing the “ Start” input.

Batch filling is used to fill the product at specified quantity. The batch
counter start from the batch quantity and decreases to zero to follow the
Batch quantity
remaining quantity of the batch. The filling stops at the end of batch
filling
filling.
The new batch starts after entering the new batch quantity.

Batch total weighing is used to fill the product to the specified total
Batch total weight. The target weight is added in to the total after each filling. The
filling filling of the batch starts after entering the batch total and ends at the
end of the batch weighing.

Bulk total weighing is used to transfer the material accurately at the

specified total weight to the customer. The last pack can be less than
target to transfer the accumulated bulk weight accurately.
Bulk filling
Filling of the bulk starts after entering the total weight of the bulk and
ends after transferring the material accurately.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 105 of 432
8.2 Taring Types
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 413, 414 and 415.

BX30 Filling Controller tares the container weight in 3 ways in net filling which are;

Type Description

The weight of the container is zeroed automatically after receiving start

input in net filling. The gross weight should be positive and scale should
be stable for taring.
Automatic tare
If the gross weight is negative, zeroing can be done automatically
instead of taring at some filling modes.
Tare is cleared at the end of net filling.

The filling machine tares the scale to the average weights of containers
to increase the filling machine speed.
The average weight is calculated periodical as
Average tare
5 samples of 25 filling,
10 samples of 100 filling,
Or 10 sampling only at the start of batch/ bulk or at the start of the new
receipt.

The specific container weight PT can be entered in to the receipt for

Specific tare
specific taring.

8.3 Feeding Types

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 315 and 316.

Function of feeding outputs can be programmed as below.

Sequential output Par. item Timing diagram

Only releated output C

Fine output is
activated at coarse FC
and medium feedings.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 106 of 432
 Coarse&Medium&Fine,
Medium&Fine and
FMC
Fine feedings are
enabled sequentially.

8.4 Adjustment technics of feeding cut-offs

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 431and 432.

BX30 Filling Controller adjusts cut-off values automatically if enabled as;

Adjustment Description

None The feeding cut-off values are entered manually and not changed.

The fine feed cut-off weight value is adjusted automatically to minimize

filling error according entered to sampling quantity, adjustment
Automatic frequency and correction ratio.

Coarse cut off is not adjusted automatically.

This feature enables the fastest filling speed at specified fine feed time.
The coarse feeding cut-off weight value is adjusted automatically to
provide fine feed time. Fine feed adjustment frequency, sampling
Fine feed time quantity, and correction ratio are parameters for fine cut- off
adjustment.

Increase the fine feeding time, if there is high instability at coarse

feeding flow rate.

At this adjustment method, entries are target and fine feeding time.
Coarse and fine feeding cut-off weights are calculated by the instrument
at start up by setting cut-off values automatically, if coarse and fine
feeding cut-off value is equal zero.

Smart The smart operation is suggested if the coarse feeding is more than 2
seconds at filling.

Fine feed time can be changed by pressing key and then by pressing
or keys or enter numerically at ready status.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 107 of 432
8.5 Analogue output for material feeding control
RELATED PARAMETERS: Sub-block 45-.

BX30Fill can produce the analogue output as shown in the fugure below to control feeding speeds via
electrical motor or valve, if it is equipped with analogue output. The analogue output type, and the output
values for coarse, medium and fine feedings should be entered to activate this feature in parameter group
45-. Parameters of feeding speed values should be selected for receipt in receipt build block to enter
different feeding values for different materials easily.

8.6 Preact Adjustment

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 433, 434 and 435.

BX30 Filling Controller has 3 parameters to adjust cut-off values automatically which are;

Parameter Description
The preact adjustment is done in the preact adjustment frequency.
E.g. If parameter 433 is 10, the preact adjustment is done automatically
Preact adjustment
after each 10 filling.
frequency
In case of tolerance control at filling, preact adjustment frequency is equal
to the sampling quantity at operation.
The preact adjustment is done according to the mean error of the fillings
Sampling quantity in sampling quantity. I.e. If the sampling quantity is 3, the calculated filling
error is the mean error of these following three fillings.

The filling error changes the feed-in value after multiplying with correction
Correction ratio ratio. If the correction ratio is 50 per cent, the feed-in value will change by
adding half of the filling error.

The fine feed cut-off weight value is adjusted automatically to minimize filling error according to entered to
sampling quantity, adjustment frequency and correction ratio.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 108 of 432
 Figure 8.1 - Preact adjustment with sampling

The new Fine feed in value calculation is done as;

Fine feed in correction = Correction factor x ( Fill error1 + Fill error2 + …. + Fill errorN ) / N

Example: If sampling quantity is 3, correction ratio is 50 per cent and filling errors of following three samples
are 1 g, 3 g and 0 g , the new feed in is corrected 0.5 x ( 1 + 3 + 0 ) / 3 = 0.7 g. If fine feed-in
was 2.5 g, the new feed-in will be 3.2 g for the following 10 filling to reduce the material.

8.7 Master Slave Operation at Multi head Filling

APPLICATION : Linear and rotative liquid filling machines, cement bagging machines etc.
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 111, 119, 121, 129, 151, 153 and 319.

The multi head filling machines fills the same product at the same time, e.g. rotating liquid filling machine.
The set-up of the filling controllers on these machines are the same even they are running independently.
BX30 filling controller gives the opportunity to transfer set-up data and receipt from master instrument to
other instruments at multi head filling machines.

The master controller transfers the set-up and receipt data to up to 30 slave controllers at ready status, if
the filling mode is any standalone filling mode, e.g. any liquid filling mode.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 109 of 432
 Figure 8.2 – Master slave operation at rotating filling machine

Typical Applications :
• Multi head rotating or linear liquid filling machines,
• Multi head bagging machines,

Interconnection between thirty BX30 Fill and commissioning

Filling controllers can be connected to each other via RS485 or Ethernet TCP/IP serial ports for master slave
interfacing. The serial port of master controller is addressed 01 ( scale #1 ) and the slave controllers are
addressed 02 ( scale #2 ), 03( scale #3 ) and up to 30 ( scale #30 ). All parameters, receipt build, receipt
entries and memory entries is done to the master controller and required data is transferred to the slave
controllers automatically.
1. Connect instruments via serial port which will be used for interconnection after installing controllers
to the cabinet and cabling as described in this section.
2. Enter the set-up parameters of the slave controllers. Enter parameter of the interconnection port.
Select master slave operation MAST and set its address from 02 up to 30 sequentially.
3. Enter set-up parameters of master controller and set all parameter values including calibration
related parameters, capacity, division etc. Remember interconnection port of master unit will be set
to MAST and address 01.
4. All parameter values are transferred automatically to the slave controllers at the exit from
programming.
5. Perform calibration to scales.
6. Build receipt and enter receipt values at master controller.
7. Select the receipt at master controller.
8. Run the filling machine.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 110 of 432
8.8 Multicycle Packing or Bagging
Multicycle filling can be done at Packing and Bagging filling modes to fill the packages/bags heavier than
Maximum filling capacity of the filling machine which has the weighing hoppers.
IMPORTANT NOTES: Enable this feature if you will fill big packages/bags which is heavier than the Maxfill
(par. 317) of filling machine by selecting parameter 411 as MULT ( Multicycle filling ). If you will not fill your
container more than one cycle, never set parameter 411 as MULT.
The target weight of each weighing cycle is calculated automatically to minimize the bag filling error. The
machine compensates the filling error of the filled part at the following filling to minimize filling errors. Due
to the accurate filling, the weighing controller reads the material in the hopper each cycle before emptying it
even there is no any adjustment or tolerance control. Preact adjustment frequency parameter 433 should be
adjusted to 1 in this mode. The typical filling cycle is shown at drawing below for filling in 2 cycles.

For multicycle filling

1. Set parameter 411 as MULT to enable multicycle filling which means the filling is done more than
one time in to the container if filling weight is bigger than Maxfill.
2. Select preact correction frequency and its sample quantity as 1.
3. Enter the target and overfill for multicycle filling.
4. If the filing weight which is total of target and overfill is bigger than Maxfill of the machine, the BX30
instrument warns the operator for multicycle operation on the information display with
[ MULTICYCLE ? ]. Press key to confirm multicycle operation or press key to return.
Multicycle operation
1. Start input is applied to start filling.
2. The weighing hopper is filled to the calculated optimum weight for the first weighing.
3. The filling error is calculated after the first weighing.
4. The target of the second filling is corrected to compensate the filling error of the first cycle.
5. The second filling is done with this new calculated Target2 weight.
6. The following cycles are done as described at item 3 and item4.
7. The EOF output is produced at the end of the filling of the container.

Warning: The target and overfill values should be entered carefully against over filling of containers, if
parameter 411 is programmed to MULT.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 111 of 432
9. RECEIPT
The operation specific parameters are located in the receipt for accurate and high speed filling of various
materials or various filling application like batch filling. Elements of the basic receipt are target and feed
cutoff values as a default. The receipt content of the instrument can be expanded by adding material related
parameters in to the receipt to adjust them for every receipt.

9.1 Weight Value Entry Types

APPLICATION: The entry types of feeding cutoff values, tolerances etc. are defined as value or deviation.
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 315 and 341.

Weight Cut-off value

Target and overfill values should be entered as a weight value. Feeding cutoff points can be programmed to
enter as weight as shown in the example below. This type is not available at feeding entries.
Example: If the target is 20.0 kg, and coarse and fine cut off points are18.0 kg and 19.8 kg, enter
weight values as;
Target = 20.0
Coarse = 18.0
Fine = 19.8

This type of entry can be used if only the machine fills only one type of material and only one target.
Otherwise changing target value requires to change cutoff values too.

Deviation
This is the most common entry type at filling applications. Feeding cutoff points and tolerances can be
entered as deviations in weight from the target weight.
Example: If the target weight is 20.0 kg, tolerances are ±0.2 kg, and coarse and fine cut off points
are 18.0 kg and 19.8 kg the enter the values as;
Target = 20.0 kg
Coarse = Target – Coarse cutoff = 20.0 – 18.0 = 2.0 kg
Fine = Target – Fine cutoff = 20.0 – 19.8 = 0.2 kg
Tolerance = 0.2 kg

Changing target weight or overfill weight do not required coarse and fine values.

9.2 Filling Weight Entry Shortcut

You may access to the target weight value, tolerance(s) and overfill by pressing shortcut key to enter
new values.

1. Press key to display target weight value of the actual receipt.

2. Press numerical keys to enter new target weight value.
3. Press key to go to the Tolerances or press key to return operation after saving.
4. Press numerical keys to enter new tolerance.
5. Press key to go to the following entries or press key to return operation after saving.
6. The instrument goes back to the operation after last entry.
Warning: Entering any value is automatically saved in to the actual receipt.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 112 of 432
9.3 Feeding cut-off Entry Shortcut
You may access to the cut-off values of feedings by press key to display or edit them.

1) Press key to display Coarse value of the actual receipt.

2) Press numerical keys to enter new value.
3) Press key to go to Medium or press key to return operation after saving.
4) Press numerical keys to enter new Medium.
5) Press key to go to Fine or press key to return operation after saving.
6) Enter new value by pressing numerical keys.
7) Press key or key to return operation.
Warning: Entering any value is automatically saved in to the actual receipt.

9.4 Receipt Build

APPLICATION: You may build up your receipt from basic to more complex how much you need by adding
receipt related parameters in to the receipt. This feature gives you advantage to enter different values to the
parameters which are added in to the receipt.

Elements of the basic receipt are target and feed cutoff values as a default. These data in the receipt are
sufficient for most of applications which is used only one type of material filling. Values of receipt
parameters [4--] are used at all receipts.

At dissimilar material filling at the machine, it may be required to change values of some receipt parameters
at main block [4--] for accurate filling which is not practical. In this case, you may add required receipt
parameters in to your receipt by using the receipt build feature of BX30Fill.

Added parameter in to the receipt appears in the receipt and in the receipt memory to enter specific values,
and disappeared from receipt parameters, main-block [4--].

To build your receipt content;

1) Press Key more than 3 seconds.

2) Enter the supervisor password and press key to go in to the receipt build block.
3) The first parameter of sub-group appears on the display [ 411 G/N/MULT : PAR ]. Press or
keys to change it as RCPT to add this parameter in to the receipt.
4) Press key to go to the following parameter [ 412 TOL CONT : PAR ]. Press or keys to
change it as RCPT to add this parameter in to the receipt. Or select PAR to remove the parameter
from receipt.
5) Press key to go to the next parameter. Select RCPT to parameters which will be added in to the
receipt as described in item 4.
6) After selecting the last parameter press key to return operation.
Example: If tolerance, overfill, preact correction frequency and its sampling quantity are located in
the receipt together with target and feeding cutoff values, their parameters [ 412 ] , [ 419 ]
[ 431 ] , [ 433 ] and [ 434 ] should be set as RCPT in receipt build menu. These
parameters are located in the receipt and disappeared from set up, ei. from parameter
group [4--].

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 113 of 432
 Warning : Build up receipt is recommended before loading receipt(s) in to the receipt memory.

Attention : Parameters which are placed in the receipt will be disappeared from the main-group 4--
and are seen in the receipt.

Very important note on receipt memory :

1) Receipt content should be build before entering receipts in to the memory. If you add any parameter
in to the receipt, its’ value is transferred to all receipts. Adjust them for every receipt.
2) The last used value is loaded in to the parameter after removing any parameter from receipt.
3) After reselect any parameter in to receipt, its value at the unused receipt is the same as before
removing it.
4) Select or reselect any parameter in to the receipt may be require to check or reenter all receipts in
the memory for safety.

Receipt Edit
1. Press key and Press key after receipt password entry.
2. [ 401 R. NAME: RECE ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the receipt name up to 16 characters.
Press key.
3. [ 402 TARGET: 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the target weight of filling and press
key.
4. [ 403 TOL + ] prompt appears on the display, if tolerance is located in the receipt . Enter the
tolerance value of filling and press key.
5. [ 406 COARSE : 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the coarse value and press key.
6. [ 408 FINE : 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the fine value and press key.
7. The parameters located in the receipt are appears on the display sequentially by pressing key to
edit their values.
8. After editing to the last parameter, the first line of receipt item 2 is appears by pressing key.
Checking your receipt is suggested.
9. Press key to return operation.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If the actual receipt which is selected from the memory is edited as described
above, this edit is saved in to the receipt memory.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 114 of 432
10. RECEIPT MEMORY
BX30 filling controller has receipt memory for 250 items. The items in the memory have a receipt number
and the receipt name. The receipt memory transactions are done as described below or by IndFace
software.

10.1 Receipt Edit in to the Receipt Memory

Receipts are saved in the memory by its number and name. The receipt content should be defined before
starting the receipt entry. Refer to receipt build on page 113.

1. Press key more than 3 seconds and press key’s in sequence and then enter receipt
password.
2. [ REC: 009 ] appears on the information display. The data on the display are the receipt number
and the receipt name.
3. Press or keys to change the receipt or enter the receipt number by pressing numerical
keys.
4. Press key to start edit. [ 401 R. NAME: RECE ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the receipt
name up to 16 characters. Press key.
5. [ 402 TARGET: 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the target weight of filling and press
key.
6. [ 403 TOL + ] prompt appears on the display, if tolerance is located in the receipt . Enter the
tolerance value of filling and press key.
7. [ 405 OVERFILL ] prompt appears on the display, if overfill is located in the receipt. Enter the
overfill value and press key. Negative value entry is available.
8. [ 406 COARSE : 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the coarse value and press key.
9. [ 407 MEDIUM : 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the medium value and press key.
10. [ 408 FINE : 000.0 ] prompt appears on the display. Enter the fine value and press key.
11. Press key sequentially and enter their values to edit all parameters in the receipt.
12. After entry to the last parameter, receipt name parameter appears on the display. You may check the
receipt by pressing the enter key sequentially.
13. Press key to the return the operation.

10.2 Receipt Select

Receipts are saved in the memory by its number and name. Steps below are done to select receipt 123 for
filling.

1. Press key more than 3 seconds and press key’s in sequence and then enter receipt
password.
2. [REC: 001 ] appears on the information display.
3. Press or keys to change the receipt or enter the receipt number by pressing numerical
keys.
4. [REC: 123 ] appears on the information display. Press key to select the receipt.
5. [ USE RECEIPT 123 ] appears on the receipt.
6. Press key to select the Receipt 123 or
7. Press key to return without select the receipt.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 115 of 432
10.3 Receipt Copy
Copying the receipt and changing some parameter values is recommended to edit the new receipt easily.

1. Press key more than 3 seconds and press key’s in sequence and then enter receipt
password.
2. The actual receipt [ REC: 009 ] appears on the information display. Enter the receipt number
which will be copied, e.g. [ REC: 123 ].
3. Press key to copy [ REC: 123 ].
4. [ COPY TO 123] appears on the display. Enter the destination receipt number by keys [ COPY TO
222] and press key.
5. [ COPIED ] prompt is seen on the display for a while and the new receipt number is appears on the
display [ REC: 222 ].
6. Edit new receipt after copying for specified filling.
7. Press key sequentially to return operation.

10.4 Delete Receipt

Any receipt or all receipts can be deleted from the memory.

Delete one receipt:

1. Press key more than 3 seconds and press key’s in sequence and then enter receipt
password.
2. [ REC: 009 ] appears on the information display.
3. Press or keys to change the receipt or enter its number by pressing numerical keys.
4. Press key to delete the receipt.
5. [ DELETE : 123 ] prompt appears and press key to delete the receipt.
6. [ ARE YOU SURE ? ] prompt appears and press key to confirm it.
7. Or press key to return to the operation without delete the receipt.

Note: If you delete any receipt, you should delete the same code(s) of ID memory, if ID and receipt
memories are linked.

Delete all receipts:

1. Go to parameter 996 [ DEL RECEIPTS] in set-up. Refer to Section 17.
2. Press key to delete all receipt memory.
3. [ARE YOU SURE ? ] prompt appears and press key to confirm it.
4. [ INITIALIZING ] prompt is seen on the display for a while and 996 parameter is seen on the display.
5. Or press key to return operation without delete receipts when [ ARE YOU SURE ?] prompt on
the display.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 116 of 432
11. BATCH FILLING
APPLICATION : The filling machine packs the material to a specific quantity or total.
PARAMETERS: 41A.

BX30 filling controller can be used to fill the batch in quantity or in total weight or for filling the bulk to
transfer specified material to the customer. Receipts for batch quantity filling, batch total filling and bulk
total filling should be different. If any batch filling is set in the parameter 41A, other operations are disabled
and the system runs as select in this parameter. If the filling controller will fill the material in various ways,
select the parameter 41A in to the receipt. Refer to receipt build, page 113.

11.1 Batch Quantity Filling

RELATED PARAMETERS: Select batch quantity weighing in the receipt, par. 41A and F1 key should be
selected for batch quantity entry, Par. 353.

The batch quantity filling is used to pack the specified quantity at the filling machine. The programmed F1
key as BQTY is used to enter the specified quantity.

The filling machine operates continuous until entering the specific filling quantity in to the receipt and stops
at the end of batch filling.

1. Select the receipt which has batch quantity entry.

2. Press F1 key at ready status to change the quantity of the batch in the receipt.
3. Activate Run input to start batch filling.
4. After starting the batch filling, pressing F1 key indicates the remain quantity of the batch.
5. At the end of the batch, the instrument stops the filling and produces End output.
6. De-activate the run input.

After batch quantity filling;

• Set passive and then activate Run input to start the following batch to the quantity written in to
the receipt.
• Enter new batch quantity for the following batch via F1 key and then activate the run input.

11.2 Batch Total Filling

RELATED PARAMETERS: Select batch total weighing in the receipt, par. 41A and F2 key should be selected
for batch total entry, Par. 354.

The batch total filling is used to pack the specified total at the filling machine according to the nominal
weight of the pack. The programmed F2 key as BWGT is used to enter the specified total weight to be filled
at ready status.

The filling controller calculates the batch quantity.

Q = Round up ( Total / Target weight )

For example : If the Target is 3 kg and the Batch total is 1000 kg

Q = round up ( 1000 / 3 ) = Round up ( 333.33 ) = 334 packs .

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 117 of 432
 Pack no Fill weight Fillled weight Accumulation
1 3.000 kg 3.000 kg 3.000 kg
2 3.000 kg 3.001 kg 6.001 kg
… ………. ………. …………
333 3.000 kg 2.999 kg 999.004 kg
334 3.000 kg 3.000 kg 1002.004 kg End of Batch

The filling machine operates continuous until entering the specific filling quantity in to the receipt and stops
at the end of batch filling. Refer to parameter 41A to enable this feature.

1. Press F2 key and enter the total weight of the batch at ready status.
2. Activate Run input during batch filling.
3. Follow the filling start process according to your set-up.
4. After starting the batch filling, pressing F1 key ( if programmed as BQTY ) indicates quantity of
the batch and pressing F2 key announces the remaining batch weight.
5. At the end of the batch, the instrument stops the filling and produces End output.

After batch quantity filling

• Set passive and then activate Run input to start the following batch to the weight written in to
the receipt.
• Enter new batch total for the following batch via F2 key and then activate the run input.

11.3 Bulk Total Filling

IMPORTANT NOTE: This method is only used to transfer a bulk material to the customer accurately ; not for
to distribute containers or bags to the enduser.

The bulk total filling is used to transfer the material to the customer accurately without caring the last pack
weight. The actual filled material weights are accumulated at bulk total filling. The material in the last pack
might be less than the Filling weight to transfer the material to the customer accurately. Refer to parameter
41A to enable this feature.

The filling controller does not calculate the estimate the bulk quantity and accumulates the filled material
weights after each filling.

For example : If the Target is 3 kg , there is not any overfill and the Bulk total is 1000 kg.

Pack no Fill weight Fillled weight Accumulation Will be filled

1 3.000 kg 3.000 kg 3.000 kg 997.000 kg
2 3.000 kg 3.001 kg 6.001 kg 993.999 kg
… ………. ………. ………. …………
333 3.000 kg 2.999 kg 999.004 kg 0.996 kg
334 0.996 kg 0.996 kg 1000.000 kg 0.000 kg End of Bulk

1. Press F2 key and enter the total weight of the bulk at ready status if you will not use the weight
in the receipt.
2. Activate Run input during bulk filling.
3. Follow the filling start process according to your set-up.
4. After starting the bulk filling, pressing F1 key ( if programmed as BQTY ) indicates the remain
quantity of the bulk and pressing F2 key announces the remaining bulk weight.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 118 of 432
 5. At the end of the bulk, the instrument stops the filling and produces End output.

After bulk quantity filling

• Set passive and then activate Run input to start the following bulk to the weight written in to the
receipt.
• Enter new bulk total for the following batch via F2 key and then activate the run input.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 119 of 432
12. SELECTABLE INPUTS / OUTPUTS
APPLICATION : You may use selectable inputs and outputs additional to control your filling machine more
efficient by designating them some functions.

RELATED PARAMETERS: Sub-blocks 34- and 37-.

There might be a lot of type machine and filling operation which requires different digital input and output
functions. Even this filling controller has a lot of inputs and outputs, these ports might not be enough for all
requirements of the machine designer or control of peripheral equipment like additional feeder controls,
transport system synchronization, material silo level control, air blowing in to the material during filling,
collecting some material on the feeder for the following packing etc. This feature eliminates additional PLC,
timer or I/O in the cabinet and reduces your cost.

12.1 Selectable Inputs

Run enable Enables filling if this input is at high level. The filling is ended and the following
start input is not executed. The start inputs are executed during RUN input is at
high level if RUN function is selected as an input.
Fill inhibit This input is used to inhibit filling due to any reason on production line. Start
inputs are not executed while Fill inhibit is at high level.
Resume / Error This resume input is applied to the instrument after any error to continue the
acknowledgement operation. If tolerance control is done after filling, this input should be selected
to resume the filling error via input or one of the key. The filling result is
accepted and recorded after applying this input.
Reject This input is applied to cancel the filling in case of error at filling. The filling
result is not saved in to the records.
Interrupt Interrupt input is used to inform instrument the filling is interrupted in case of
any problem by operator or by host. Feeding is stopped during interrupt input
and goes on filling after removing interrupt input. The instrument goes to the
ready status if the reject or reset input is applied during interrupt. The start
input is not executed during interrupt.

Hold The filling stopped and other outputs hold their status during this input. After
removing the hold input the filling goes on.

Empty the scale The emptying gate / valve is opened during this input to empty the weighing
tank, hopper etc. The instrument should be at ready status to empty the scale.
Bypass The filling and emptying gates are opened and the coarse feeding is started to
empty the material tank / silo over the scale. The instrument should be at ready
status and the Bypass input should be applied minimum 3 seconds to empty
the material silo.
Fieldbus Remote The digital input data is transferred to the PLC via fieldbus like Profinet,
input Modbus, CC-link etc. as a remote input of the PLC.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 120 of 432
12.2 Selectable Outputs
Alarm
USAGE : Produces the alarm signal in case of overloading if the gross loading is heavier than the alarm value
at weighing and filling modes, or reset the filling if the valve cannot go through the bung hole of the
container and touch the top of it in modes BUNG ( Below Bung Hole Filling ) and BOTT ( Container Filling
from Bottom). The failing communication between Master and slave instruments is also activated the output.
VARIABLES: Alarm set point ( parameter 471) and alarm time ( parameter 472 ).
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as alarm ( Parameter block 33- ).

Over Load Alarm, continuous

The alarm is produced with comparing the
alarm set point and gross weight as shown
on the right.

Entries: Setpoint is entered and

alarm time is zero.

Over Load Alarm, with timer

The alarm is produced for an adjusted time
by comparing the alarm set point and gross
weight as shown on the right.

Entries: Setpoint is entered and

alarm delay is not zero.

ZR I Zero range of the indicated weight

USAGE: Announces the loading is in the zeroing range of the indicated weight which means the indicated
weight can be accepted zero.
VARIABLES: Zero range of indicated weight ( parameter 477 ).
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as ZR I ( Parameter block 33- ).

In Zero range at Indicated weight

The digital output is activated if the indicated
weight is in the zero range. Refer to parameter
477 to enter zero range value.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 121 of 432
ZR G Zero range of the gross weight
USAGE: Announces the loading is in the zeroing range of the gross weight which means the gross weight
can be accepted zero.
VARIABLES: Zero range of gross weight ( parameter 477 ).
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as ZR G ( Parameter block 33- ).

In Zero range at Gross

The digital output is activated if the gross
weight is in the zero range. Refer to
parameter 477 to enter zero range value.

Empty
USAGE: Announces the gross loading is below the empty value which means the scale can be accepted
empty, close to zero range, at emptying or to disable discharge.
VARIABLES: Empty setpoint ( parameter 41E )
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as EMPT ( Parameter block 33- ).

Empty
The digital output is activated if the gross
weight is smaller than the Empty value,
parameter 41E.

Filling / Batching in progress ( Running )

USAGE: The digital output is at high level during the filling cycle is running or the filling of the batch is
running.
VARIABLES: Qn ( quantity of batch ) and ∑n ( Bulk weight ) values specifies the usage is continuous or
batch. Parameters 41A.
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as PROG ( Parameter block 33- ).

at continuous filling
This output is at high level during the filling
cycle at continuous operation, if one of the
select input is selected as “ RUN ”.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 122 of 432
 at batch and Bulk filling.
This output is high level until end of the batch
filling from applying “ Run ” input, if one of
the select input is selected as “ RUN ”.

Feeding is progress
USAGE: To activate /dis-activate any operation while feeding is progress.
VARIABLES: -
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as FEED ( Parameter block 33- ).

Feeding Gate 2nd position

USAGE: To open the feeding gate totally during coarse and medium feedings.
PARAMETERS: 321.
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as FGAT ( Parameter block 33- ).

Vibration
VARIABLES: VIB MIN, VIB MAX setpoints and VIB DEL, VIB TIME timers ( parameters 473, 474, 475 and
476 ).
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as VIBR ( Parameter block 33- ).

The vibration output is used to settle the material in to the container / bag or to empty the weighing hopper.
The vibration can be done at various conditions. If there is no vibration in your system, you may use this
feature for different requirement due to its functions of two cutoff and timer.

Vibration at coarse filling with time

The vibration output is done while coarse
feed of filling.

Conditions: tvibdelay ≥ 0 ,
tvibration > 0 and
VIBMIN = VIBMAX = 0

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 123 of 432
 Vibration between 2 weights at filling
The output signal is produced between 2 set
points during filling or loading.

Conditions: VIBMIN < VIBMAX

Vibration at filling with timer

The timer is started if the weight is bigger
than the VIBMIN at filling or loading, and
vibration output is produced during a
vibration time.

Conditions: VIBMAX = 0 and

tvibration > 0

Vibration at discharging / emptying

The output is produced if the load is between
VIBMIN and VIBMAX at discharging or
emptying.

Conditions: VIBMIN > VIBMAX

Vibration at discharging / emptying with

timer
The timer is started if the weight is smaller
than the VIBMAX at discharging or emptying,
and vibration output is produced during a
vibration time.

Conditions: VIBMIN = 0 and

tvibration > 0 .

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 124 of 432
Timers
The BX30 filling controller has 3 free programmable timers. To use any timer, one set of select input and
select output should be programmed for this timer and its usage type should be selected, refer to parameter
sub-blocks 33- and 48-. Timers can be used in the filling operation to control machine or independently like
filling of material silo with timer. Typical usages of timers are material silo feeding, to activate some
systems during filling, to transmit some signals as a pulse to host, to delay the control of any point of the
filling machine, going to the fine feeding for a while after closing the feeding gate, fine feeding with jogging
etc.

Type A : Output for a specific time

Timer triggered by the increasing edge of the

input signal.

Type B : Flash/ repeated output

Output flashes during input signal.

Type C : Delay the signal

Timer delayed the input signal.

Type D: Delay the signal-low

Timer delayed the switch off the input signal.

Type E: Delayed output for specified time

The input signal is delayed and then the output

is produced by a timer.

Type F : Timer output at signal low

The timer output is produced by removing input

signal.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 125 of 432
End
USAGE : The digital output is at high level at the end of batch / bulk filling to warn the operator, host etc.
This output is the same with “Complete” output at continuous operation.
VARIABLES: -
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as END ( Parameter block 33- ).

End of batch / Bulk

The end output is active at the end of the batch
/ bulk.

End at continuous operation

The end output is active at the end of the filling
cycle which is the identical to the complete
output.

Logical functions
VARIABLES: Logical function define ( parameter block 4A- ).
OUTPUT : Set one of the select output as LOGI ( Parameter block 33- ).
INPUT : Set one of the select input as IN-A and another one as IN-B ( Parameter block 33- ).
The BX30 filling controller has logical functions as shown below if select inputs and outputs are
programmed. This feature eliminates PLC requirement only for basic logical I/O control. Logical outputs can
be use to adapt filling related output to the filling machine or independently.

A+B
This summing logical output is high if at
least one input is high. Other saying the
output is at low level if two inputs are low
level.

Usage: instead of parallel connection of 2

relay contact.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 126 of 432
 A.B
The multiplying output is high if both input is
high. Other saying the output is low if even
only one input is low.

Usage : Instead of serial connection of 2

relay contact.

A . B’
This function is multiplying A with the
inverse of B. The output is high if the A is
high and B is low.

Usage: Instead of serial connection of A ( NO

) and B ( NC ) contacts.

A + B’
The output is high if A is high or B is low.
Other saying the output is low if A is low and
B is high.

Usage: Instead of parallel connection of A (

NO ) and B ( NC ) contacts.

Set ( A ) – Reset ( B )
The output increases to high if A is high and
decreases to low if B is high.

A B Out
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0
0 0 Out (no change)

Typical usage: This function can be used to

fill the material bin with 2 sensors, high level
NO, low level NC ).

Note: If A is connected to high, output is

reversed the input signal B.
Set ( A’ ) – Reset ( B )
The output is high if A is low and the output
is low if B is high.

A B Out
1 0 Out (no change)
0 1 0
1 1 0
0 0 1

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 127 of 432
 Typical usage : This function can be used to
fill the material bin with 2 sensors, both NO.

Note: If both input connected to one signal,

output is reversed the input signal.

Error Fill
The digital output is activated when any filling related error ( including tolerance error ) is announced on the
display.

Error Tolerance
The digital output is activated if the filled material is out of tolerances. This output can be released by error
acknowledgement entry or by removing the load from the scale.

Error Under Filling

The digital output is activated if the filled material is lighter than the given under tolerance to warn the
operator at missed fillings. This output can be released by error acknowledgement entry or by removing the
load from the scale.

FBUS Fieldbus controlled output

The digital output can be controlled from PLC if the instrument is equipped with any fieldbus option. Refer to
related fieldbus command table to activate or deactivate the output.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 128 of 432
13. IDENTIFICATION
APPLICATION: To enter identification data to the instrument to printout or to transfer together with weighing
result.
RELATED PARAMETERS: Sub-block 36-.

One of the function key can be programmed as identification key for storing identification data ID which has
an alphanumeric identification header and data.

The identification data can be entered via keys or via serial interface; and selected from ID memory to
transfer together with the weight value. The length of identification header and data can be maximum 16
characters. ID header is entered in the programming mode or via IndFace2X PC software.

The identification data ID can be saved into the ID memory which has 250 items, each has 16 characters
identification data record size.

ID data in the memory can be linked to the receipt memory. This feature gives advantage to select the ID
automatically by selecting receipt from memory. i.e. if ID memory is linked to receipt memory, the 123th
record in the ID memory is loaded automatically after saving 123th receipt from receipt memory. Related
parameter is 363.

Identification data entering via alphanumeric keys

1. Press the function key which is set to ID.
2. Enter the identification data up to 16 digits via alphanumeric keys.
3. Confirm with key.

Identification data record into the ID memory

1. Press key more than 2 seconds in ready status. The [ MEMORY ] prompt will be displayed.
2. Press ID key to enter ID memory. The last used memory code appears as [ID : 123 ].
3. Enter the memory code numerically and press key.
4. The ID code and identification data in the memory appears on the display and press key.
5. Enter the new alphanumeric ID data up to 16 digits and press key.
6. The following memory code seen on the display to go on the ID data entry. You may press key
to enter ID data into the following memory or you may repeat from item 3 to enter the new memory
record number.
7. To return the operation press key.

Identification data selection from ID memory

1. Press the identification key. The ID data displayed.
2. Press key to go into the memory.
3. After the last used code seen [ ID1 :123 ], enter the ID memory code of the item.
4. Press key to select the identification data which is displayed short a while. The instrument
returns to the operation mode after loading the identification data. If there is any linked memory to
the ID memory, the linked memories are selected automatically.
5. Or press key to return without any select.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 129 of 432
Data Entry to the linked ID memory
In case of link memories, receipt and ID memories are linked each other by coupled the same codes of
memories.

After selected any code from receipt memory, the linked memory record at ID memory saved automatically.

For example, saving the receipt code 123 from memory for filling saves automatically the ID code 123 from
ID memory.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 130 of 432
14. SMARTAPP
APPLICATION: Smart operation together with visual information and acoustic warning.
RELATED PARAMETERS: Sub-blocks 31- and 32-. Parameters 213 or 214.

SmartAPP is a special function which helps the operator to follow the weighing results on the analog bar and
by changing the display color on filling cycle.

At SmartAPP operation;
1. The display background color changes to facilitate the usage. For example, the background color
changes automatically as red, green or yellow to indicate under tolerance, in tolerance or over
tolerance after filling.
2. The operator may follow the filling on the bar graph.
3. The digital inputs and outputs set to the filling machine type automatically.
4. You can control the level of the material silo, and you may configure various timer functions, logical
functions to control flaps or valves or to produce alarm / empty lambs. Refer to section 12, page
120.
5. The instrument adjusts itself automatically for higher accuracy and for more productivity.

Operation with display colour

The filling controller informs the filling result to the operator by changing the display colors at the end of the
filling. This feature gives advantage operation without lamb signals on the control cabinet.

Operation Under tolerance Okay Over tolerance

Figure 14.1 - Weight display and toolbar at filling.

If there is no tolerance control at filling machine the display colours will be;

Operation Filled

Figure 14.2 - Weight display and toolbar at filling.

The purple colour inform the operator if there is a weighing error, or malfunction on any digital output of the
digital 12 In / 14 Out board or unit.

Over loading of the scale

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 131 of 432
Bar graph
The bar graph on the right of the display is used to follow the filling on the bar as seen below.

Basic
weighing -
mode

Ready

Coarse
&
Medium
feeding
Filling
mode

Fine
feeding

End of
filling
and
result

Acoustic warning
The filling controller produces key sound at pressing keys. Additionally, the acoustic alarm is produced in
case of hardware, scale and weighing related errors.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 132 of 432
15. SERIAL DATA OUTPUTS
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 111, 121, 141, 151 and 161.

BX30 filling controller has RS232, RS485, USB and Ethernet interfaces. In this section, you will find the data
structure of different type of the data outputs via these serial ports. If, you transmit ASCII codes of P(print),
Z(zero), T(tare) or C(clear) letters to the serial port of BX30; it will act like the related key is pressed.

15.1 Continuous Data Output

Baykon continuous data output of the instrument is transmitted in the following data structure. The serial
ports of BX30 are suitable for bi-directional communication.

CR (Carriage return) and LF (Line feed) codes can be enabled or disabled from response.
CHK (Checksum) can be enabled or disabled from both command and response and only continuous data
output can be programmed for more than one interface.

The data format of continuous data output is;

Status Indicated Tare
STX STA STB STC D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 CR LF CHK

The including of the status bytes STA, STB and STC are;
Definition Table for Status A ( STA )
Bits 0, 1 and 2 Bits 3 and 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
0 1 2 Decimal point 3 4 Increment size
0 0 0 XXXXOO 1 0 X1
1 0 0 XXXXXO 0 1 X2
0 1 0 XXXXXX 1 1 X5
Always 1

Always 1
1 1 0 XXXXX.X X
0 0 1 XXXX.XX
1 0 1 XXX.XXX
0 1 1 XX.XXXX
1 1 1 X.XXXXX

Definition Table for Status B ( STB )

Bit 0 0 = Gross 1 = Net
Bit 1 0 = Weight positive 1 = Weight negative
Bit 2 0 = No Error 1 = Error
Bit 3 0 = Stable 1 = Unstable
Bit 4 Always = 1
Bit 5 Always = 1
Bit 6 0 = Not power on zeroed 1 = Zeroed with power on zero
Bit 7 X

Definition Table for Status C ( STC )

Bit 0 Always 0
Bit 1 Always 0
Bit 2 Always 0
Bit 3 Always 0
Bit 4 Always 1
Bit 5 Always 1
Bit 6 Always 0
Bit 7 X

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 133 of 432
CHK (Checksum) = 0 – ( STX + STATUS A + ..... + LF )
Error Messages: UNDER, OVER, A.OUT, L-VOLT and TILT are represented in Indicated data fields.

Note: The weight data is represented with right aligned and the error messages are represented with left
aligned.

15.2 Fast continuous data output

Fast continuous “indicated weight” data output can be used only for the instruments which can
communicate fast. The output rate is related with the baud rate. Use higher baud rate for faster data rate.
CR and LF can be enabled. You may reduce the data transfer speed by increasing the delay between data
output packages.

The data format of the fast continuous data output is;

[STX][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE][CR][LF]

Examples:

S+000123.4 (weight is stable and 123.4)

D+000123.4 (weight is unstable and 123.4)
M+000123.4 (Dynamic weighing result is 123.4)
------------- (Dynamic weighing in calculating)
+ (Over load)
- (Under load)
O (ADC out error)

15.3 Print Mode

15.3.1 Data transfer after filling
The data transfer is done automatically after filling if the printout related parameters are set single line, multi
line or EPL format. Refer to details in Section 17.4 on page 151. Single line data format is recommended to
transfer filling result to PC or PLC. Refer to section 15.3.3 for details on data output for service. Only one
serial port can be programmed to the print format.

SINGLE LINE
You can transmit the printout data in single line format by pressing key. This format is recommended to
send the print data to PC or to any host. The data output structure is;
12.02.2016 14:47 CN: 71 G: 3.007kg T: 1.001kg N: 2.006kg *ALB: 5*

DATE TIME Receipt Receipt ID ID CN GROSS PT or NET ALB C L

Header Name Header Data TARE R F
10 3 5 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 9 3 13 3 13 3 13 4 12 1 1

MULTI LINE
You can send the data in multiple line formats as seen in the label given below by pressing key. The
data output including can be programmed with printer parameters. The multiline data output can be
programmed for 16 byte narrow printers and for others.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 134 of 432
Format for 16 character printer :

Baykon A.S. Baykon A.S.

www.baykon.com Header www.baykon.com
Istanbul, Turkey Istanbul, Turkey

23.02.2017 23.02.2017
09:16 Date & Time 09:16
CN 34 Ticket no CN 34

COMPANY COMPANY
BAYKON INC. Identification BAYKON INC.

MATERIAL MATERIAL
ASCORBIC ACID Receipt ASCORBIC ACID

G 191.2 kg Gross/Tare/Net G 191.2 kg

weights T 1.2 kg
* Thank you * N 190.0 kg

* Thank you *
Footer

16F1 – Includes only Gross or 16F2 – Includes Gross or Gross\

Net weight value Tare\Net weight values

Format for minimum 26 or more character printer :

Baykon A.S. Baykon A.S.

www.baykon.com Header www.baykon.com
Istanbul, Turkey Istanbul, Turkey

Date 23.02.2017 Date 23.02.2017

Time 09:16 Date & Time Time 09:16
CN 34 Ticket no CN 34

COMPANY COMPANY
BAYKON COSMETIC INC. Identification BAYKON COSMETIC INC.

MATERIAL MATERIAL
TURKISH ROSE PARFUME Receipt TURKISH ROSE PARFUME

Gross 10.000 kg Gross/Tare/Net Gross 1.673 kg

weights Tare 0.673 kg
* Thank you * Net 1.000 kg

Footer * Thank you *

26F1 – Includes only Gross or 26F2 – Includes Gross or Gross\

Net weight value Tare\Net weight values

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 135 of 432
15.3.2 EPL format
The EPL format of the data output in Print mode is selected to print the label data in graphical format EPL
after filling. This feature eliminates to add PC or similar instrument in your filling system for labelling the
package.

You can design your label in EPL format by using the printer label design software and Baykon software as
describe below.
1. Connect BX30 filling controller to Baykon IndFace2x software.
2. Enter EPL print format window. You will find the command table which includes commands to get data
from weighing in the label design.
3. Open label design software of the printer. Design your label by using the commands in item 2.
4. Save/Compile/ Convert your design to EPL format in Label design software.
5. Import the EPL file into Indface window.
6. Load this file into filling controller.

Figure 15.1- Sample of the label printout of BX30 which is designed in EPL format.

You may use the default output of the EPL format for printers which has label design menu.

15.3.3 Test Mode

IMPORTANT NOTE: This format waits for the stability after each filling. Disable this mode after adjusting your
machine.

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 91B.

The test mode format is used to follow the filling process against changing important parameters. The data
below is transferred automatically at testing mode which are time, Filling weight, Coarse, fine, Preact
adjustment frequency and its sampling, adjustment ratio, Coarse and fine control delays, fine feeding time,
high resolution Filled weight , high resolution Filing error and filling time in sequence.

TIME Target Coarse Fine Fr Smp % Cdel Fdel FineT Filled Error FILLT
-----|------|------|-----|---|---|---|----|----|-----|---------|--------|-------
05:26 10.00 3.00 1.00 1 3 50 0.7 0.7 3.0 11.761 1.761 3.0
05:27 10.00 3.00 0.80 1 3 50 0.7 0.7 2.9 10.050 0.050 3.7
05:27 10.00 2.50 0.50 1 3 50 0.7 0.7 1.5 9.955 -0.045 3.2
05:28 10.00 3.00 0.50 1 3 50 0.7 0.7 1.0 10.000 0.000 2.9

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 136 of 432
15.4 BSI Data Structure for dialog with PC
Baykon instruments have to be capable of integration in a computer system, data acquisition system, data
logging system etc. BAYKON filling controller launched on the market support the standardized command
set BSI data form, depending on the functionality of the instrument. This easy data format gives the reliable
and speedy interface advantages with communicating PLC or PC for process control, or transactional
applications. BSI is divided into 3 levels which are;

BSI-BASE Command sets of basic weighing instruments, e.g. taring, zeroing, setpoint
loading etc.
BSI-PRO Extension of the command set for professional weighing indicators, e.g.
commands related with identification data application related commands etc.
BSI-DIALOG Extension of the command set for transactional applications.

If you will integrate BX30 into your computer or if you will interface BX30 with your PLC which do not have
any fieldbus interface, using BSI commands will help you to expand your system with additional BAYKON
scale without having to change your application programs.

Refer to Appendix 5 for details, page 207.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 137 of 432
16. FILLING REPORTS
Filling results, various accumulations and statistical reports can be transferred to printer or PC as described
below. Refer to Fieldbus sections in Appendixes for details on transferring data to PLC.

16.1 Accumulations
This instrument has various accumulations and accumulation printouts which are erasable totalization,
batch accumulation report, current day’s totalization, yesterday’s totalization, grand totalization.

The [ OVER ] appears on the display if any value is too high for displaying.

To display or to transfer accumulation data, one of the programmable F key should be programmed to
accumulation.

1. Press the F key which is set to Accumulation.

2. The batch total appears on the display as [ B :1234 123456789].
3. Erasable total appears [ Σ :1234 123456789 ] after pressing F key.
4. Current day report appears [ C :1234 123456789] after pressing F key.
5. Yesterday report appears [ Y :1234 123456789] after pressing F key.
6. Grand total [ GT: 123456789012 ] is displayed after pressing F key.
7. Press F key to exit from accumulations.

key can be used to exit from accumulations at any step above.

16.1.1 Erasable Accumulation

The erasable quantity and total are displayed as [ Σ :1234 123456789 ] on the information display.

Quantity. The displayed quantity on the left of the information display is quantity of the filled material(s) in a
specific time.
Total. The displayed total on the right of the information display is quantity of the filled material(s) in a
specific time.

Press key to transfer this accumulation to printer, PC or PLC when quantity or total are on the display.

To erase the quantity and total together, press key during Quantity or total on the display and confirm
by pressing the key.

Q and Σ keys are also can be used to display erasable quantity and total. The erasable accumulated report
can be also printed after pressing Q and Σ key at ready status.

Press key to transfer this accumulation to printer, PC or PLC when quantity or total are on the display.
The report is printed as shown below;

Single line
Accumulation Report 21.12.2018 12:30 Qty: 71 pcs Total: 10345.5 kg

Accumulation DATE TIME Qty: Qty pcs Total: Total Unit C L

Report weight R F
value
21 1 10 1 5 2 4 4 1 3 2 6 14 1 3 1 1

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 138 of 432
Multiple line

**************************
Accumulation Report
21.12.2018 12:30

Qtity : 71 pcs
TOTAL : 10345.5 kg
**************************

16.1.2 Accumulation of material at batch / bulk fillings

You may read the batch / bulk total by pressing function key sequentially which is programmed as ACCU,
the accumulation of the batch appears on the display as [ B :1234 123456789]

Press key to transfer this accumulation to printer, PC or PLC when quantity or total are on the display.

Single line
Batch Report 21.12.2016 12:31 Qty: 28 pcs Total: 200.0 kg

Batch Report DATE TIME Qty: Qty pcs Total: Total Unit C L
weight R F
value
21 1 10 1 5 2 4 4 1 3 2 6 14 1 3 1 1

Multiple line

**************************
Batch Report
21.12.2018 12:31

Qtity : 28 pcs
TOTAL : 200.0 kg
**************************

16.1.3 Current day’s Accumulation

Current day totalization is the quantity and total weight of the filled materials in the day. This totalization
starts at 00:00:00 and ends at 23:59:59 of the actual day. The accumulation is erased at the end of the day
after saving it in to the Yesterday Accumulation memory automatically.

This data appears on the display as [ C :1234 123456789]. Here the first is quantity and the second is the
total of today until now.
Press key to transfer this accumulation to printer, PC or PLC when quantity or total are on the display.

Single line
Report of Current day 21.12.2018 12:32 Qty: 99 pcs Total: 10545.5 kg

Report of DATE TIME Qty: Qty pcs Total: Total Unit C L

Current day weight R F
value
21 1 10 1 5 2 4 4 1 3 2 6 14 1 3 1 1

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 139 of 432
Multiple line

**************************
Report of Current day
21.12.2018 12:32

Qtity : 99 pcs
TOTAL : 10545.5 kg
**************************

16.1.4 Yesterday’s Accumulation

You may follow the filled quantity and filled material weight a day ago with this accumulation. This
accumulation is updates everyday at 24:00.
This data appears on the display as [ Y :1234 123456789]. Here the first is quantity and the second is the
total of the yesterday.

Press key to transfer this accumulation to printer, PC or PLC when quantity or total are on the display.

Single line
Report of Yesterday 21.12.2018 12:33 Qty:5248 pcs Total: 548340.5 kg

Report of DATE TIME Qty: Qty pcs Total: Total Unit C L

Yesterday weight R F
value
21 1 10 1 5 2 4 4 1 3 2 6 14 1 3 1 1

Multiple line

**************************
Report of Yesterday
21.12.2018 12:33

Qtity : 5248 pcs

TOTAL : 54340.5 kg
**************************

16.1.5 Grand Total

You may follow the total of filled material weight in long term by using this function. The grand total can be
used as monthly or annual total.
This data appears on the display as [ GT: 1234567890123 ] after pressing the Accumulations key
sequentially.

Press key to transfer this accumulation to printer, PC or PLC when quantity or total are on the display.

Press key to erase the grand total while it is on the display and confirm by pressing the key.

Single line
Grand Total Report 21.12.2018 12:34 Qty:5347 pcs Total: 558886.0 kg

Grand Total DATE TIME Qty: Qty pcs Total: Total Unit C L
Report weight R F
value
21 1 10 1 5 2 4 4 1 3 2 6 14 1 3 1 1

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 140 of 432
Multiple line

**************************
Grand Total Report
21.12.2018 12:34

Qtity : 5347 pcs

TOTAL : 558886.0 kg
**************************

16.2 Statistical Report

This instrument calculate statistical values average filling weight, standard deviation, Max, Min and Range
of batch and bulk fillings for online inspection of the filling machine. One of the programmable F key should
be selected to statistical to display or to print statistical results.

Statistical calculations are done for each 50 fillings which has the settling time in cycle for tolerance control
or preact adjustment at continuous operation. Sampling quantity and sampling frequency of statistical report
are defined by the sampling size and frequency of the preact adjustment, refer to parameters 434 and 433.
If preact adjustment frequency is entered 1, the statistical results will be result of 100 % inspection,
otherwise sampling ration of operation will be;

Sampled quantity = 50 x [ Sampling quantity ]

Sampling period = 50 x [ Preact adjustment frequency ]
Sampling ratio % = 100 x [ Sampling size of preact adjustment , in par 434 ] / [ Preact adjustment
frequency, in par 433 ]

Here;
Sampling size : Sampling size of the preact adjustment, parameter 434.
Preact adjustment frequency : The cycle of preact adjustment, parameter 433.

Statistical reports are updated at the end of the following cycle. The statistical report is produced at the end
of the batch filling which should be transferred until end the following batch.

Press selected F key which is programmed to indicate statistical values and then Press key to transfer
the statistical data to PC or printer.

Press key to erase the statistical data while it is on the display and confirm by pressing the key.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 141 of 432
**************************
Statistical Report
21.12. 2018 15:00

Machine Bagging #3
Receipt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Batch Qty : 125 pcs

Batch wgt : 2500 kg

Target wgt : 20.00 kg

Overfill : 0.03 kg
Filling wgt: 20.03 kg
+Tolerance : 0.20 kg
-Tolerance : 0.10 kg
Samp. Qty : 3 pcs
Samp. freq : 10
Sampled Qty: 39 pcs
Samp. ratio: 31 %

Avg. fill : 20.00 kg

Avg. tare : 0.76 kg
S.Deviation: 0.05 kg
Max : 20.01 kg
Min : 19.99 kg
Range : 0.02 kg
Okay : 125 pcs
Under : 0 pcs
Over : 0 pcs

Samp Tot : 780.1 kg

TOTAL : 2500.1 kg C
**************************

The statistical report should be transferred before starting the new batch or until end of the following
sampling period at continuous operation.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 142 of 432
17. PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION
You will find the programming and calibration procedure of BX30 Fill in this section. The arrow on navigation
keys indicates the function of the keys in programming menu. The basic meanings of these keys are;

Navigation Exit from any Go to Next block. Previous block. Go to Enter into the
between entry or block previous block next block parameter to
parameters or from or parameter. or parameter. edit it.
programming.
Parameters’ Exit with Move to the Next option Before option Move to the Confirm and go
value previous value left digit. right digit. to the
next parameter.

A set-up DIP switch is located near the load cell connector at the BX30’s rear side as shown in the figure
below and its position should be “ON” ( downward ) to change the metrological related parameters including
calibration.

DIP Switch Description

Calibration SW
1 OFF : Locked
ON : Set- up
2 Reserve

Figure 17.1- The location of calibration DIP switch.

17.1 Entering to the Programming and Calibration

Enter the programming menu as described below. Legally related parameters can be changed if the
calibration dip switch is at ON position. These parameters are marked with M symbol in the parameter
table in this section. If you will change any legally relate parameter or will perform calibration, set the
calibration switch to the ON position before entering to the programming.

Display Operation

[123.456 kg] Press key until [ PASSWORD : ] prompts seen.

Enter your 4 digit passport.
[PASSWORD]
( Default is 1111 )
[**** ] Press key.
You entered to the programming main menu and the first main
[1—INTERFACE ] block [1—INTERFACE ] prompt appears.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 143 of 432
17.2 Quick Access Parameter Blocks used Frequently
The instrument has fast access feature to the frequently adjusted parameters for easy usage or service. As
described in the previous section, if you press the keys below more than 2 seconds at main block
[1—INTERFACE ] , you will access to the parameter blocks fast.

Fast access key Function

Press this key to access the fieldbus parameters, Sub-block [ 19- ].

Press this key to access filling parameters, Sub-block [ 31- ].

Press this key to access the receipt parameters, Sub-block [ 41- ].

Press this key to access the calibration, Sub-block [ 621].

Press this key to access the diagnostic parameters, Main-block [ 9-- ].

17.3 Exit from Programming

Exit from programming after adjusting parameters and calibration as described in section 17.4. You may
save your adjustment for the usage or until power off the instrument for service. The original set-up and
calibration is used after power off the instrument once.

1. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen on the display.

2. Press key to save the changes into the memory or
3. Press key to change item to [ SAVE : NO ] prompt seen, press key to go out from
programming without saving the changes or
4. Press key to change item to [ SAVE : BACK ] prompt seen, press key to return menu or
5. Press key to change item to [ SAVE : TEMP ] prompt seen, press key to store the changes
until the power off the instrument.

[ WAIT ] message will be seen on the display for a little while, and the filling controller goes back to the
weighing mode or filling mode.

WARNING: Don’t forget switch off the instrument and bring the calibration DIP switch position to the “OFF”
before using your scale in trade.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 144 of 432
17.4 Programming and Parameters
BX30 filling controller is programmed under the seven main blocks in the programming menu which are
serial interface, configuration, machine related, receipt, scale, calibration, metrology and diagnostic.

Main blocks in the programming menu are displayed like [1-- INTERFACE ] and sub-blocks are displayed
like [11- RS232C ]. Parameters are located in the sub-blocks like [111 FORMAT: CONT ].
You can move in the blocks by pressing or keys. After reaching the desired block, press
key or key to enter it. After arriving the parameter to change, you may change its function by pressing
or keys. If the value will be entered to the parameter press numerical keys, then press ,
press key to go to the following parameter.

For example to change the Baud rate of RS485 serial interface to 57600;
1. After entering the programming, the [1-- INTERFACE ] sub-block prompt seen. Press key.
2. [11- RS232C ] prompt seen. Press key until appearing [12- RS485 ].
3. Press key until appearing [122 BAUD: 9600 ] prompt.
4. Press key until [122 BAUD: 57K6 ] prompt seen.
5. Press key to go to the following parameter.

Legally related parameters can be changed if the calibration dip switch is at ON position. The values of these
parameters limited according to the OIML against wrong set up. Legally related parameters are marked with
M symbol in the table below.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 145 of 432
[ 1-- INTERFACE ] Interface Block
The interface main block is shown below.

INTERFACE MAIN BLOCK

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 1-- INTERFACE ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

RS 232C SERIAL PORT

[ 11- RS232C ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 111 FORMAT : NO ] Data format of the serial port Page 109,

NO : Port is disabled 133, 207,
CONT : Continuous data output 219, 215,
FAST : High speed continuous data output
PRNT : Printout
BSI : BSI format for PC, PLC interface
MBHL : Modbus RTU High-Low format
MBLH : Modbus RTU Low-High format
MAST : Master unit - Slave unit interface
Press key to select output format different than Baykon
continuous data format while the selection is CONT in the
information display. Available functions are seen on the weight
display after pressing key sequentially. Press key after
selecting the data format.
Refer to Appendix 6 for details data structure.
[ BAYKON ] BAYKON : Baykon continuous format.
HBM : Commonly used by HBM, GSE, PT, Systec, Rinstrum.
TOLEDO : Commonly used by Toledo, Mettler Toledo.
SYSTEC : Commonly used by Systec.
SMA : Commonly used by USA producers, Cardinal, Rice
Lake etc.
SARTOR : Commonly used by Sartorious.
RINSTR : Commonly used by PT, Rinstrum, HBM, GSE.
AVERY : Commonly used by Avery E1205.
BASTER : Commonly used by Baster.
LM2 : Baykon LM2 ( BX1 par.000=6 ).
LLINE2 : Commonly used by Tunaylar.
[ 112 BAUD : 9600 ] Baud rate
1200 : 1200 19K2 : 19200
2400 : 2400 38K4 : 38400
4800 : 4800 57K6 : 57600
9600 : 9600
[ 113 LENGTH : 8 ] Data Length
7 : 7 bits
8 : 8 bits

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 146 of 432
 [ 114 PARITY : NO ] Parity
NO : No parity
ODD : Odd parity
EVEN : Even parity

[ 115 CSUM : NO ] Checksum at continuous and BSI formats.

NO : Checksum disable
YES : Checksum enable

[ 116 CR : YES ] Carriage return at continuous formats.

NO : Carriage return disable
YES : Carriage return enable
[ 117 LFEED : YES ] Line feed at continuous formats.
NO : Line feed disable
YES : Line feed enable
Data output delay at Modbus and BSI formats; delay between
[ 118 DELAY : 50 ]
continuous format data.
000 …. 999 milliseconds.

[ 119 ADDRESS : 00 ] Address of the port

00 …. 99.
00 means data format without address.

( at Master / Slave operation, address 01 is master. Slaves will be

addressed as Address. 02, 03, 04, 05 …. )

RS 485 SERIAL PORT

[ 12- RS485 ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 121 FORMAT : NO ] Data format of the serial port Page 109,

NO : Port is disabled 133, 207,
CONT : Continuous data output 219, 215.
FAST : High speed continuous data output
PRNT : Printout
BSI : BSI format for PC, PLC interface
MBHL : Modbus RTU High-Low format
MBLH : Modbus RTU Low-High format
MAST : Master unit - Slave unit interface

Press key to select output format different than Baykon

continuous data format while the selection is CONT in the
information display. Available functions are seen on the weight
display after pressing key sequentially. Press key after
selecting the data format.
Refer to Appendix 6 for details data structure.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 147 of 432
 [ BAYKON ] BAYKON : Baykon continuous format.
HBM : Commonly used by HBM, GSE, PT, Systec, Rinstrum.
TOLEDO : Commonly used by Toledo, Mettler Toledo.
SYSTEC : Commonly used by Systec.
SMA : Commonly used by USA producers, Cardinal, Rice
Lake etc.
SARTOR : Commonly used by Sartorious.
RINSTR : Commonly used by PT, Rinstrum, HBM, GSE.
AVERY : Commonly used by Avery E1205.
BASTER : Commonly used by Baster.
LM2 : Baykon LM2 ( BX1 par.000=6 )
LLINE2 : Commonly used by Tunaylar.
[ 122 BAUD : 9600 ] Baud rate
1200 : 1200 19K2 : 19200
2400 : 2400 38K4 : 38400
4800 : 4800 57K6 : 57600
9600 : 9600
[ 123 LENGTH : 8 ] Data Length
7 : 7 bits
8 : 8 bits

[ 124 PARITY : NO ] Parity

NO : No parity
ODD : Odd parity
EVEN : Even parity
[ 125 CSUM : NO ] Checksum at continuous and BSI formats.
NO : Checksum disable
YES : Checksum enable
[ 126 CR : YES ] Carriage return at continuous formats.
NO : Carriage return disable
YES : Carriage return enable
[ 127 LFEED : YES ] Line feed at continuous formats.
NO : Line feed disable
YES : Line feed enable
Data output delay at Modbus and BSI formats; delay between
[ 128 DELAY : 50 ] continuous format data.
000 …. 999 milliseconds.

[ 129 ADDRESS : 01 ] Address of the port

00 …. 99.
00 means data format without address.

( at Master / Slave operation, address 01 is master. Slaves will be

addressed as Address. 02, 03, 04, 05 …. )

USB
[ 14- USB ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 148 of 432
 [ 141 FORMAT : NO ] Data format of the serial port. Page 133,
NO : Port is disabled 207, 215,
CONT : Continuous data output
FAST : High speed continuous data output
BSI : BSI format for PC, PLC interface

Press key to select output format different than Baykon

continuous data format while the selection is CONT in the
information display. Available functions are seen on the weight
display after pressing key sequentially. Press key after
selecting the data format.
Refer to Appendix 6 for details data structure.
[ BAYKON ] BAYKON : Baykon continuous format.
HBM : Commonly used by HBM, GSE, PT, Systec, Rinstrum.
TOLEDO : Commonly used by Toledo, Mettler Toledo.
SYSTEC : Commonly used by Systec.
SMA : Commonly used by USA producers, Cardinal, Rice
Lake etc.
SARTOR : Commonly used by Sartorious.
RINSTR : Commonly used by PT, Rinstrum, HBM, GSE.
AVERY : Commonly used by Avery E1205.
BASTER : Commonly used by Baster.
LM2 : Baykon LM2 ( BX1 par.000=6 )
LLINE2 : Commonly used by Tunaylar.
[ 142 CSUM : NO ] Checksum at continuous and BSI formats.
NO : Checksum disable
YES : Checksum enable
[ 143 CR : YES ] Carriage return at continuous formats.
NO : Carriage return disable
YES : Carriage return enable
[ 144 LFEED : YES ] Line feed at continuous formats.
NO : Line feed disable
YES : Line feed enable
Data output delay at BSI formats; delay between continuous
[ 145 DELAY : 50 ]
format data.
000 …. 999 milliseconds.

ETHERNET TCP/IP
[ 15- ETHERNET ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 151 FORMAT : NO ] Data format of the Ethernet port Page 109,

NO : Port is disabled 133, 207,
CONT : Continuous data output 215, 237,
FAST : High speed continuous data output
PRNT : Printout
BSI : BSI format for PC, PLC interface
MBHL : Modbus TCP High-Low format
MBLH : Modbus TCP Low-High format
MAST : Master unit - Slave unit interface

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 149 of 432
 Press key to select output format different than Baykon
continuous data format while the selection is CONT in the
information display. Available functions are seen on the weight
display after pressing key sequentially. Press key after
selecting the data format.
Refer to Appendix 6 for details data structure.
[ BAYKON ] BAYKON : Baykon continuous format.
HBM : Commonly used by HBM, GSE, PT, Systec, Rinstrum.
TOLEDO : Commonly used by Toledo, Mettler Toledo.
SYSTEC : Commonly used by Systec.
SMA : Commonly used by USA producers, Cardinal, Rice
Lake etc.
SARTOR : Commonly used by Sartorious.
RINSTR : Commonly used by PT, Rinstrum, HBM, GSE.
AVERY : Commonly used by Avery E1205.
BASTER : Commonly used by Baster.
LM2 : Baykon LM2 ( BX1 par.000=6 )
LLINE2 : Commonly used by Tunaylar.
[ 152 IP : 250 ] IP address.
Default is 192.168.016.250

[ 153 ADDRESS : 01 ] Address of the port

00 …. 255.
00 means data format without address.

( at Master / Slave operation, address 01 is master. Slaves will be

addressed as Address. 02, 03, 04, 05 …. )

[ 154 SUB MASK : 000 ] Subnet mask address.

Default is 255.255.255.000
[ 155 GATEWAY : 253 ] Gateway address.
Default is 192.168.016.253
[ 156 LOCAL P1 : 502 ] Local port 1.
000 …. 65535
[ 157 LOCAL P2 : 503 ] Local port 2.
000 …. 65535
[ 158 LOCAL P3 : 504 ] Local port 3.
000 …. 65535
[ 159 DNS : 222 ] DNS address.
Default is 208.067.222.222
[ 15A MAC ADR : ] MAC address.
AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
[ 15B TIMEOUT : 5 ] Inactivity time out.
00 means disable.
01…. 60 sec.
[ 15C CR-LF : YES ] Carriage return and Line feed at continuous formats.
NO : Disable
YES : Enable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 150 of 432
 Data output delay at demand formats; delay between continuous
[ 15D DELAY : 50 ] format data.
000 …. 999 milliseconds.
[ 15E REMOTEIP : 000 ] Remote IP address.
Default is 0.0.0.0
[ 15F REMOTEPO : 0 ] Remote port.
0 …. 65535

PRINTER
[ 16- PRINTER ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 161 FORMAT : SING ] Data format of the printout. Page 134

SING : Single line
16F1 : Multiline Format 1 for 16 Character printer
16F2 : Multiline Format 2 for 16 Character printer
26F1 : Multiline Format 1 for 26 Character printer
26F2 : Multiline Format 2 for 26 Character printer
EPL : EPL Format

[ 162 NETSIGN : NO ] Net sign correction. Page 39

NO : Disable
YES : Enable

[ 163 METHOD : AUTO ] Printing method.

K AU : Printing with key and auto print after end of
filling.
AUTO : Auto print after filling end of filling.
REPO : Only reports are printed with key.

[ 164 PRT MSG : NO ] Display " PRINTING " message at printout.

NO : Disable
YES : Enable
[ 165 CN : YES ] Ticket number on printout. Page 134,
NO : Disable 157
YES : Enable
[ 166 DATE : NO ] Date printing on printout. Page 134,
NO : Disable 157
YES : Enable
[ 167 TIME : NO ] Time printing on printout. Page 134,
NO : Disable 157
YES : Enable

[ 168 RECEIPT : NO ] Receipt name on printout. Page 134,

NO : Disable 112,115,
NAME : Print Receipt name 164.
H+N : Print receipt header and name
[ 169 ID : NO ] ID printing on printout. Page 134

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 151 of 432
 NO : Disable 129, 164.
DATA : Print ID data
H+D : Print ID header and data

LABEL SETUP
[ 17- LABEL SETUP ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 171 HEADER 1 : ] Header of printout, the first line. Page 134

Maximum 20 characters.

[ 172 HEADER 2 : ] Header of printout, the second line. Page 134

Maximum 20 characters.

[ 173 HEADER 3 : ] Header of printout, the third line. Page 134

Maximum 20 characters.

[ 174 FOOTER 1 : ] Footer of printout, the first line. Page 134

Maximum 20 characters.

[ 175 FOOTER 2 : ] Footer of printout, the second line. Page 134

Maximum 20 characters.

[ 176 LF BEFO : +2 ] Line feed before printout.

: + = Forward , - = Backward
: NO,1,2….9 : Line feed quantity before data.

Example: +2 means 2 line feed forward.

[ 177 LF AFTE : +4 ] Line feed after printout.

: + = Forward , - = Backward
: NO,1,2….9 : Line feed quantity after data.

Example: -2 means 2 line feed backward.

[ 178 FORM FE : NO ] Form feed.

NO : Disable
YES : Enable
[ 179 LEFT SP : 0 ] Space from left of the label.
0…9

[ 17A COPY : 1 ] Copy quantity.

1…9

PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill PB )

[ 19- PROFIBUS ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the Profibus Page 254

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 152 of 432
 INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.

[ 192 ADDRESS : 001 ] Node address

001…125

PROFINET CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill PN )

[ 19- PROFINET ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the Profinet Page 275

INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.

IP address of Ethernet port.

[ 192 IP : 250 ]
Default is 192.168.16.250
[ 194 SUB MASK : 000 ] Subnet mask address of Ethernet port.
Default is 255.255.255.000
[ 195 GATEWAY : 253 ] Gateway address.
Default is 192.168.16.253
[ 196 S. NAME : FILL ] Station (device) name.
Default is FILLING-1

[ 19A MAC ADR : ] MAC address

AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF

CANOPEN CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill CO )

[ 19- CANOPEN ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the CANopen Page 298

INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.

FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.

[ 192 ADDRESS : 001 ] Node address

001…127

ETHERNET/IP CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill EI )

[ 19- ETHERNET IP ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the EtherNet/IP Page 320

INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point
implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 153 of 432
 IP address of Ethernet port.
[ 192 IP : 250 ]
Default is 192.168.16.250
[ 194 SUB MASK : 000 ] Subnet mask address of Ethernet port.
Default is 255.255.255.000
[ 195 GATEWAY : 253 ] Gateway address.
Default is 192.168.16.253
[ 19A MAC ADR : ] MAC address
AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF

ETHERCAT CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill EC )

[ 19- ETHERCAT ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the EtherCAT Page 324

INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.

CC-LINK CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill CC )

[ 19- CC-LINK ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the CC-Link Page 346

INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.
[ 192 ADDRESS : 001 ] Node address
001…64
[ 193 BAUD : 156K ] Baud rate
156K : 156 kbps
625K : 625 kbps
2.5M : 2.5 Mbps
5M : 5 Mbps
10M : 10 Mbps

POWERLINK CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill PL )

[ 19- POWERLINK ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

Page 387
[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the Powerlink
INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.

[ 192 ADDRESS : 001 ] Node address

001…239

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 154 of 432
 CC-LINK IE CONFIGURATION ( Only BX30 Fill IE )
[ 19- CC-LINK IE ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 191 FORMAT : INTG ] Data format of the CC-Link IE Field. Page 409
INTG : Signed 32 bit integer, no decimal point implied.
FLOA : 32 bit float, decimal point implied.
[ 192 STATION : 001 ] Station number.
001…120
[ 193 NETWORK : 001 ] Network number.
001…239

[ 2-- CONFIGURATIO ] Configuration Block

The Configuration main block is shown below.

CONFIGURATION MAIN BLOCK

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 2-- CONFIGURATIO ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

DISPLAY AND ACOUSTIC

[ 21- DSPLY ACUSTI ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 211 LIGHT : ON ] Backlight

OFF : Backlight disabled.
ON : Always bright.
AUTO : Automatic backlight to increase the battery life.

[ 212 COLOR : TURQ ] Backlight color at basic weighing

WHIT : White
LGRE : Light Green
GREE : Green
TURQ : Turquoise
BLUE : Blue
YELL : Yellow
AMBE : Amber
RED : Red
Warning the operator on filling result with the Page 131
[ 213 SMART : BAR ]
backlight colour.
NO : Disabled
BAR : Bargraph

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 155 of 432
 COLO : Colour change
C+B : Bargraph and colour change

Display colour changes for announcing under, okay Page 131

[ 214 CHANGE : YGR ]
or over after filling.
RGY : Red, Green, Yellow
YGR : Yellow, Green, Red
RGR : Red, Green, Red.

[ 215 KEYSOUN : YES ] Key sound

NO : Disable
YES : Enable
[ 216 REFRESH : 9 ] Display refresh rate
X : 1...9 times/sec.

START UP
[ 23- START UP ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

Page 37
[ 231 TARING : YES ] Taring at basic weighing.
NO : Disabled.
YES : Tare with key, via serial interface or via digital input.
Multitare.
Note : Preset taring is available only at automatic operation.
Refer to parameters 311, 411.

[ 235 FILTER : MEDI ] Adaptive digital filter.

NO : Disable. Fastest weighing; but the most sensitive to
environmental vibrations.
XLOW : Extra low
VLOW : Very low filtering
LOW : Low filter
MEDI : Medium filter
HIGH : High filter
VHIG : Very high filter. Slowest and the most stable weighing.
XHIG : Extra high.

Dynamic digital filter. Page 38

Increase this filter level step by step, if there is a
[ 236 DYNAMIC : NO ]
vibration on the filling scale which cannot be
eliminated with adaptive filter.
NO : Disable.
LOW : Low filter
MEDI : Medium filter
HIGH : High filter
[ 237 LANGUAGE : ENG ] User language. Page 39

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 156 of 432
 ENG : English
DEU : Deutsch
FRA : Français
ITA : İtaliano
ESP : Espagnol
TUR : Türkçe

ENTRIES
[ 24- ENTRIES ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 241 DATE : DMY ] Date format Page 38

DMY : DD.MM.YYYY
MDY : MM.DD.YYYY
YMD : YYYY.MM.DD
[ 242 DATE SET : ] Date setting Page 38
XX.XX.XX
[ 243 TIME SET : ] Time adjust Page 38
HH:MM
[ 244 CN : ] Consecutive number Page 134
1…100000
[ 245 S. NAME : FILL ] Scale name.
Maximum 16 characters.
Default is “FILLING1”

PASSWORD ENTRIES
[ 25- PASSWORDS ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.
Page 40
[ 251 KEY LOCK : ] Key lock password.
NEW - CONFIRM
To disable password : Do not enter any password as new and
confirm it.
[ 252 RECEIPT : ] Receipt and receipt memory password. Page 40
NEW - CONFIRM
To disable password : Do not enter any password as new and
confirm it.
[ 253 SUPERVIS : 1111 ] Supervisor password to enter user related Page 40
parameters of receipt build, set-up and
programming. This password has rights of the
previous password.
NEW - CONFIRM

To disable password : Do not enter any password as new and

confirm it.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 157 of 432
 Page 40
[ 254 SERVICE : 1111 ] Service password which has the highest authority to
interfere the instrument.
NEW - CONFIRM
[ 255 TARG KEY : FREE ] Target and feed cut-off keys' authorization. Page 40
FREE : Target entry is not required any password.
KEY : Target entry is available with the key lock password.
RECE : Target entry is required the receipt password.

[ 3-- MACHINE RELA ] Machine Related Block

The application main block is shown below.

MACHINE RELATED PARAMETERS MAIN BLOCK

Define your filling machine to the BX30Fill filling controller carefully in
this main block.
[ 3-- MACHINE RELA ]
Press key sequentially to access this main block,
or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

MACHINE TYPE
[ 31- MACHINE TYPE ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

Filling mode. Page 43

[ 311 FILLMOD : OPEN ]
Select the filling mode which matches your filling
machine.
OPEN : Open container filling. Page 45
BUNG : Bung- type container filling. Page 50
BOTT : Filling from bottom of the container with Page 55
lance control.
PACK : Packing machine. Page 61
BAG : Bag filling. Page 66
BIG : Big bag filling. Page 71
VENT : Valve type bag filling. Page 75
1BAG : Bagging machine with one weighing hopper. Page 71
nBAG : Packing / Bagging machine with up to 16 Page 84
weighing hopper.
( enter the quantity at par. 319 )
nPAC : Packing / Bagging machine with up to 16 Page 90
weighing hopper.
( enter the quantity at par. 319 )
TANK : Charging material to the tank and then filling Page 96
container from tank.
WOUT : Weighin - Weighout Page 96

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 158 of 432
 [ 312 F.START : LEVE ] Start input signal type Page 41,
105
PULS : Pulse ( button )
LEVE : Level ( switch )
AUTO : After loading the container ( liquid filling
modes, if the load is heavier than TAREMIN )
or automatic start filling after discharging
( BAG filling mode ).
Page 41
[ 313 D.START : LEVE ] Discharge input signal type
PULS : Pulse ( button )
LEVE : Level ( switch )
Start filling or emptying/discharging at power on. Page 131
[ 314 STRT BY : FILL ]
(Only at automatic operation of bunker weighing.)
FILL : Start operation with filling the hopper.
DISC : Start operation with emptying the hopper.

Feeding speed quantity.

[ 315 FEED SPD : 2 ]
Enter the feeding speed quantity of the machine.
1 : 1 speed filling ( fine )
2 : 2 speed filling ( coarse and fine )
3 : 3 speed filling ( coarse, medium and fine )

Feeding outputs can be programmed to your feeding Page 106

[ 316 FEEDOUTS : FC ]
system design which are:
C : Only related output is active, e.g. only coarse output is
activated at coarse feeding.
FC : Fine output is activated at coarse and medium feedings.
FMC : Coarse&Medium&Fine, Medium&Fine and Fine feedings
are enabled sequentially.

[ 317 MAXFILL : 0 ] Maximum target of filling / packing machine.

This entry limits the maximum filling weight of the machine.
( 0 means maximum target of filling checking is disable )

[ 318 MINFILL : 0.20 ] Minimum target of filling / packing machine.

This entry limits the minimum filling weight of
the machine.

[ 319 SCL QTY : 2 ] Scale quantity at master slave operation. Page 109

Enter the weighing hopper quantity at nBAG and nPAC machines.

The master controls the bag holder and emptying sequence of
scales.
Or enter the quantity of the filling machines which receipt will be
transferred at multi head filling machines. Only receipt data and
set-up is transferred to slave controllers at linear or rotating filling
machines.
up to 30. Default 00, no master slave operation between
instruments.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 159 of 432
 SIGNALIZATION IN THE MACHINE
This group defines switches and switch related operation of the filling
[ 32- SIGNALIZATION ] machine.
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

Feeding gate position control type. Page 162

[ 321 F GATE : NO ]
Select the control type of the feeding gate.
NO : No any control
1 POS : Feeding gate which has one position.
2 POS : 2 positioned feeding gate, [coarse /med] and fine.
IMPORTANT NOTE: One of the select outputs should be set to
feeding gate(FGATE) for 2 position control.
Feeding gate switch type.
[ 322 FGATE SW : NOPE ] Select the switch type on the feeding gate placed at the closed
position.
NO : There is not switch on the feeding gate.
NCLO : There is a normally closed switch on the gate.
NOPE : There is a normally open switch on the gate.

Switch type at the closed position of the discharge gate.

[ 323 DGATE SW : NOPE ] Select the switch type on the discharge gate placed at the closed
position.
NO : There is not position sensor on the discharge gate.
NCLO : There is a normally closed position sensor on the gate.
NOPE : There is a normally open position sensor on the gate.
Lance position control type. Page 55
[ 324 LANCEPOS : BIU ]
Defines locations of switches on the lance which are;
BIU : Switches at BOTTOM, IN and UP positions of lance.
BMIU : Switches are at BOTTOM, MIDDLE level, IN and UP
positions.
BIOU : Switches at BOTTOM, IN, OUT and UP positions.
BMIO : Switches are at BOTTOM, MIDDLE level, IN and OUT
positions.
Movement of valve or lifter before start feeding the material at
[ 325 MOVEMENT : NO ]
liquid filling modes.
NO : No
VALV : Move the valve down before start feeding
( only at bung hole container filling ).
LIFT : Move the lifter up before start feeding.
( at open or bung hole containers filling ).

Movement of valve or lifter before start feeding the material at big

[ 326 SEQUNCE : NO ]
bag filling mode.
NO : No bag clamp and lifter control before filling.
CLAM : Close bag clamp then start filling.
UP-A : Lift the big bag after closing the bag clamp then start
filling.
UP-B : Close the bag clamp, start feeding and lift the big bag
during filling (Refer to parameter 417).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 160 of 432
 SELECTABLE INPUTS / OUTPUTS
You may define selectable inputs and output functions for your usage.
[ 33- SELECT IN / OUT ]
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 331 SEL IN 1 : NO ] The function of Select input 1 Page120

NO : Disable.
RUN : Run enable.
INHI : Filling inhibit.
ACK : Error acknowledgment / Resume.
REJE : Reject / Do not record.
INTE : Interrupt.
HOLD : Stop feeding the material and holds status.
DROP : Drop catcher position sensor.
EMPT : Empty / Discharge the scale.
BYPA : Bypass.
S2 : The second close the bag clamp input for operator safety
at 1BAG and NBAG modes.
TMR1 : Start Timer 1.
TMR2 : Start Timer 2.
TMR3 : Start Timer 3.
IN-A : Input of the logic A.
IN-B : Input pf the logic B.
FBU1 : Remote Input of the PLC via Fieldbus or BSI.
FBU2 : Remote Input of the PLC via Fieldbus or BSI.
TILT : Tilting.
RSRV : Reserve input 1.
[ 332 SEL IN 2 : NO ] The function of Select input 2.
NO : Disable.
RUN : Run enable.
INHI : Filling inhibit.
ACK : Error acknowledgment / Resume.
REJE : Reject / Do not record.
INTE : Interrupt.
HOLD : Stop feeding the material and holds status.
DROP : Drop catcher position sensor.
EMPT : Empty / Discharge the scale.
BYPA : Bypass.
S2 : The second close the bag clamp input for operator safety
at 1BAG and NBAG modes.
TMR1 : Start Timer 1.
TMR2 : Start Timer 2.
TMR3 : Start Timer 3.
IN-A : Input of the logic A.
IN-B : Input pf the logic B.
FBU1 : Remote Input of the PLC via Fieldbus or BSI.
FBU2 : Remote Input of the PLC via Fieldbus or BSI.
TILT : Tilting.
RSRV : Reserve input 2.
[ 333 SEL IN 3 : NO ] The function of Select input 3.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 161 of 432
 NO : Disable.
RUN : Run enable.
INHI : Filling inhibit.
ACK : Error acknowledgment / Resume.
REJE : Reject / Do not record.
INTE : Interrupt.
HOLD : Stop feeding the material and holds status.
DROP : Drop catcher position sensor.
EMPT : Empty / Discharge the scale.
BYPA : Bypass.
S2 : The second close the bag clamp input for operator safety
at 1BAG and NBAG modes.
TMR1 : Start Timer 1.
TMR2 : Start Timer 2.
TMR3 : Start Timer 3.
IN-A : Input of the logic A.
IN-B : Input pf the logic B.
FBU1 : Remote Input of the PLC via Fieldbus or BSI.
FBU2 : Remote Input of the PLC via Fieldbus or BSI.
TILT : Tilting.
[ 334 SEL IN 4 : NO ] The function of Select input 4.
Refer to the Select Input 3, par. 333 for available functions.
[ 335 SEL IN 5 : NO ] The function of Select input 5.
Refer to the Select Input 3, par. 333 for available functions.
[ 336 SEL IN 6 : NO ] The function of Select input 6.
Refer to the Select Input 3, par. 333 for available functions.
[ 337 SEL IN 7 : NO ] The function of Select input 7. (Appears if RIO16 is installed)
Refer to the Select Input 3, par. 333 for available functions.
[ 338 SEL IN 8 : NO ] The function of Select input 8. (Appears if RIO16 is installed)
Refer to the Select Input 3, par. 333 for available functions.
[ 339 SEL IN 9 : NO ] The function of Select input 9. (Appears if RIO16 is installed)
Refer to the Select Input 3, par. 333 for available functions.
Page 121
[ 33A SEL OUT 1 : NO ] The function of Select Output 1.
NO : Disable.
PROG : Filling / Batching is progress.
EMPT : The scale is empty.
END : End of lot/batch.
FEED : Feeding is progress ( for pump, rotary valve etc. ).
FGAT : Open feed gate full at 2 position control of the feed gate.
VIBR : Vibration.
ALAR : Alarm.
ZR I : Zero range of indicated weight.
ZR G : Zero range of gross weight.
EFIL : Filling related errors.
ETOL : Tolerance error.
UNDE : Under filling ( W< T-Tol ) error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 162 of 432
 TMR1 : Timer 1 output.
TMR2 : Timer 2 output.
TMR3 : Timer 3 output.
LOGI : Logical output of A and B inputs.
FBU1 : Remote Output of the PLC controlled by Fieldbus or BSI.
FBU2 : Remote Output of the PLC controlled by Fieldbus or BSI.
RSVR : Reserve output 1
[ 33B SEL OUT 2 : NO ] The function of Select Output 2.
NO : Disable.
PROG : Filling / Batching is progress.
EMPT : The scale is empty.
END : End of lot/batch.
FEED : Feeding is progress ( for pump, rotary valve etc. ).
FGAT : Open feed gate full at 2 position control of the feed gate.
VIBR : Vibration.
ALAR : Alarm.
ZR I : Zero range of indicated weight.
ZR G : Zero range of gross weight.
EFIL : Filling related errors.
ETOL : Tolerance error.
UNDE : Under filling ( W< T-Tol ) error.
TMR1 : Timer 1 output.
TMR2 : Timer 2 output.
TMR3 : Timer 3 output.
LOGI : Logical output of A and B inputs.
FBU1 : Remote Output of the PLC controlled by Fieldbus or BSI.
FBU2 : Remote Output of the PLC controlled by Fieldbus or BSI.
RSVR : Reserve output 2
[ 33C SEL OUT 3 : NO ] The function of Select Output 3.
NO : Disable.
PROG : Filling / Batching is progress.
EMPT : The scale is empty.
END : End of lot/batch.
FEED : Feeding is progress ( for pump, rotary valve etc. ).
FGAT : Open feed gate full at 2 position control of the feed gate.
VIBR : Vibration.
ALAR : Alarm.
ZR I : Zero range of indicated weight.
ZR G : Zero range of gross weight.
EFIL : Filling related errors.
ETOL : Tolerance error.
UNDE : Under filling ( W< T-Tol ) error.
TMR1 : Timer 1 output.
TMR2 : Timer 2 output.
TMR3 : Timer 3 output.
LOGI : Logical output of A and B inputs.
FBU1 : Remote Output of the PLC controlled by Fieldbus or BSI.
FBU2 : Remote Output of the PLC controlled by Fieldbus or BSI.
[ 33D SEL OUT 4 : NO ] The function of Select Output 4.
Refer to the Select output 3, par. 33C for available functions.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 163 of 432
 [ 33E SEL OUT 5 : NO ] The function of Select output 5. (Appears if RIO16 is installed)
Refer to the Select output 3, par. 33C for available functions.
[ 33F SEL OUT 6 : NO ] The function of Select output 6. (Appears if RIO16 is installed)
Refer to the Select output 3, par. 33C for available functions.

HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Set the HMI related parameters in this group.
[ 34- HUMAN / MACHIN ]
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 341 FEEDENTR : DEV ] Preact, Medium and Fine feeding entries. Page 112
VAL : The weight value entry
DEV : Deviation from Target

[ 342 IND TYPE : INCR ] Weight displaying at Filling.

INCR : Weight indication is increase at filling.
DECR : Weight indication is decrease from target at filling.
[ 343 FULLDISP : FILL ] M Displaying after filling.
ACTU : Display actual weight
FILL : Display filled weight for 1 second.
TARG : Display target weight
Page 105
[ 344 INFO DIS : R+T ] Information data on the left of the alphanumeric
display.
NO :
No data
TARE :
Tare weight is displayed
GROS :
Gross weight is displayed
RCPT :
Receipt name
R+T :
Receipt name and target
R+Q :
Receipt name and quantity
( if Qn in usage, indicates Qn )
Q+∑ : Quantity and total
( if Qn or ∑n in usage, indicates the batch )
TOTA : Total
PHAS : Phase of the filling.

PROGRAMMING OF KEY FUNCTIONS

[ 35- KEY FUNCTION ] Define functions of programmable keys in this group.
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.
The function of magnify key Page 41
[ 351 MAGNIFY : HR ]
( for 10 seconds temporary displaying).
NO : Disable
HR : High resolution
LAST : Last filling
CMF : Coarse, medium and Fine feed in values
G-N : Temporary gross weight indication
PHAS : Phase of the filling.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 164 of 432
 [ 352 CHANGE : PHAS ] The function of unit - change key
NO : Disable
UNIT : Unit Change
ID : Identification data
R + T : Receipt name and target
LAST : Last filled
PHAS : Phase of the filling.
STBY : Standby mode enable/disable.
[ 353 F1 KEY : STRF ] The function of F1 key.
NO : Disable
STRF : Start Filling / Resume
STRD : Start discharge/ Resume
EMPT : Empty / Discharge the scale.
BYPA : Bypass ( Empty the material silo / tank )
RST : Reset
INTE : Interrupt
HOLD : Stop feeding, hold status
CHKF : Check stop at the end of filling
CHKD : Check stop at the end of discharge / emptying
CHKS : Check stop at the end of filling and discharging /
emptying.
BQTY : Batch Quantity entry.
CMF : Coarse, medium and Fine feed in values
LAST : Last filling.
AV FT : Average filling and average tare.
SDEV : Standard deviation.
MMR : Statistical values Max, Min and Range.
STAT : Statistical report.
FLOW : Coarse, Mid and Fine flow rates
ACCU : Accumulations.
ID : Identification data.

[ 354 F2 KEY : LAST ] The function of F2 key.

NO : Disable
STRF : Start Filling / Resume
STRD : Start discharge/ Resume
EMPT : Empty / Discharge the scale.
BYPA : Bypass ( Empty the material silo / tank )
RST : Reset
INTE : Interrupt
HOLD : Stop feeding, hold status
CHKF : Check stop at the end of filling.
CHKD : Check stop at the end of discharge / emptying
CHKS : Check stop at the end of filling and discharging /
emptying.
BWGT : Batch /bulk weight entry
CMF : Coarse, medium and Fine feed in values
LAST : Last filling.
AV FT : Average filling and average tare.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 165 of 432
 SDEV : Standard deviation.
MMR : Statistical values Max, Min and Range.
STAT : Statistical report.
FLOW : Coarse, Mid and Fine flow rates
ACCU : Accumulations.
ID : Identification data.
[ 355 F3 KEY : CMF ] The function of F3 key.
NO : Disable
STRF : Start Filling / Resume
STRD : Start discharge/ Resume
EMPT : Empty / Discharge the scale.
BYPA : Bypass ( Empty the material silo / tank )
RST : Reset
INTE : Interrupt
HOLD : Stop feeding, hold status
CHKF : Check stop at the end of filling
CHKD : Check stop at the end of discharge / emptying
CHKS : Check stop at the end of filling and discharging /
emptying.
CMF : Coarse, medium and Fine feed in values
LAST : Last filling.
AV FT : Average filling and average tare.
SDEV : Standard deviation.
MMR : Statistical values Max, Min and Range.
STAT : Statistical report.
FLOW : Coarse, Mid and Fine flow rates
ACCU : Accumulations.
ID : Identification data.
[ 356 F4 KEY : ACCU ] The function of F4 key.
Refer to F3 key selections.

[ 357 F5 KEY : RST ] The function of F5 key.

Refer to F3 key selections.

IDENTIFICATION DATA
[ 36- IDENTIFICATI ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 361 RCP HEAD : RECE ] Identification name of Receipt. Page 112

Enter header of the receipts on printout, e.g. Product.
Maximum 16 characters. Default is RECEIPT.

[ 362 RCP LINK : NO ] Linked memory to the Receipt memory. Page 130
NO : Disabled.
ID : ID memory.
Note : This parameter is shown as 40C in receipt menu.
[ 363 ID HEAD : ID ] Identification name of ID. Page 129
Enter header of the ID on printout, e.g. Customer.
Maximum 16 characters. Default is ID.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 166 of 432
 RESERVE IN / OUT FUNCTIONS
These ports are used as a reserve ports in case of any malfunction at
any input or output. This sub-group is activated if any Select port is
programmed as reserve. Refer to sub-group 34-.
[ 37- RSRV IN/OUT ]
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.
Page 200
[ 371 RSRV IN1 : 00 ] Reserve Input 1.
Enter input number of the input to assign to the reserve input 1.
Default 00 ( no assignment ).
Page 200
[ 372 RSRV IN2 : 00 ] Reserve Input 2.
Enter input number of the input to assign to the reserve input 2.
Default 00 ( no assignment ).
Page 200
[ 373 RSV OUT1 : 00 ] Reserve Output 1.
Enter output number of the output to assign to the reserve
output 1.
Default 00 ( no assignment ).
Page 200
[ 374 RSV OUT2 : 00 ] Reserve Output 2.
Enter output number of the output to assign to the reserve
output 2.
Default 00 ( no assignment ).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 167 of 432
[ 4-- RECEIPT ] Receipt Block
The receipt related parameters are located in this main block. Necessary parameters can be transferred to
the receipt from this block. Refer to Receipt Build section, page 113.

RECEIPT RELATED PARAMETERS MAIN GROUP

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 4-- RECEIPT ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

FILLING PROCESS RELATED PARAMETERS

[ 41- FILLING ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.
Page 111
[ 411 G/N/MULT : GROS ] Gross, net or multicycle filling.
Defines the weighing during filling. Multicycle filling is
available only at PACK and BAG modes.
NET : Net filling in to the container.
GROS : Gross filling in to the container
MULT : Multicycle gross filling.
( only PACK and BAG modes )
Page 18,
[ 412 TOL CONT : NO ] Tolerance control.
112
Defines the tolerance control method as;
NO : Disable
+/-T : One value entry for both sides of target
weight.
+T -T : Positive and negative tolerances are entered
separately for target.
+/-F : One value entry for both sides of filling
weight.
+F -F : Positive and negative tolerances are entered
separately for filling weight.
Note : Parameters are shown as 403 and 404 in receipt menu.
Page 106
[ 413 TARING : AUTO ] Taring at filling.
Select the taring method at filling.
AUTO : Automatic taring.
AV 5 : Average tare 5 /25.
AV10 : Average tare 10 /100.
ACON : Average tare 10 /∞ ( 10 sampling only
after select the receipt or after power on. )
SPEC : Specific tare PT.
Note : PT parameter is shown as 409 in receipt menu.
[ 414 TARE MIN : 0.00 ] Minimum tare value.
The material feeding does not start if the container is
lighter than the minimum tare weight value.
( 0 means minimum tare checking is disable )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 168 of 432
 [ 415 TARE MAX : 0.00 ] Maximum tare value.
The material feeding does not start if the container is
heavier than the maximum tare weight value.
( 0 means maximum tare checking is disable )

[ 416 V FORCE : 1.00 ] Valve force.

It means the valve could not go in to the container and applied
force to it. If this force is bigger than the entered value, the
movement is cancelled and error signal is produced.

[ 417 LANCE B : 2.00 ] The load which starts movement of the lance from BOTTOM to
LIFT W upward.
Lance moves upward from BOTTOM if the load is heavier than this
value.
This value starts lifting system of big bag machine if parameter
326 is set to UP-B.

[ 418 LANCE M : 5.00 ] The load which starts movement of the lance from middle waiting
point at middle waiting control types BMIU and BMIO.
Lance moves upward from middle waiting point if the load is
heavier than this value.
Page 17,
[ 419 OVERFILL : 0.00 ] Overfill weight.
112
Enter the over fill quantity which may be required by law.
± XXXXXX kg
Note : This parameter is shown as 405 in receipt menu.
Page 105
[ 41A BATCH : NO ] M Batch filling availability of the receipt to transfer
product in batch or bulk. Only selected operation is 122,126,
permitted, others are restricted at receipt. 139

NO : Disabled.
QTY : Only Batch filling in quantity.
∑T : Only Batch filling in total.
Q+∑T : Batch quantity filling and batch total are available.
BULK : Bulk filling which transfers the total accurately.
Note : Parameters are shown as 40A and 40B in receipt menu.
[ 41B SOFTSTRT : NO ] Start filling with fine or medium feeding.
Select if there is any splash risk at the start of the filling.
NO : Disabled.
FINE : Start with fine feeding.
MED : Start with medium feeding.

[ 41C SOFT T : 3.0 ] Soft start time.

Soft start feeding is done during this time, then coarse
feeding starts.
XX.X seconds.

[ 41D EMPTYPE : TIME ] The emptying / discharge type.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 169 of 432
 TIME : Opening time of the discharge gate is controlled by
empting timer. There is not the weight checking at
emptying.
LOAD : Discharge time is started after lowering the material
weight below Empty / Discharge weight.

[ 41E EMPTY W : 1.00 ] Empty/Discharge weight / Remaining weight.

REMAIN The weight which the scale accepted unloaded at container fillings
and at fillings by weighing hopper / silo.
Remaining material weight after discharge is entered here at
Weigh in - Weigh out mode.

[ 41F EMPTY T : 1.0 ] Emptying / discharge time.

Enter the time to minimize the residual material after emptying.
The emptying / discharge gate opens during this time at filling
machines with weighing hopper. This delay starts after reducing
weight to the Empty / discharge weight ( par. 41E ) value, if there
is weight control at emptying / discharge.
XX.X seconds.

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENTS
This block defines the adjustment technic of the instrument to minimized
[ 43- ADJUSTMENT ] filling errors.
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.
Page 107
[ 431 ADJ TECH : AUTO ] Correction technic at Feeding / Discharging.
NO : Disabled.
AUTO : Automatic correction.
TIME : Fine feeding time optimization
SMRT : Smart start up and correction
Page 108
[ 432 FINE TIM : 2.0 ] Fine feeding time.
The coarse feeding cut off is adjusted automatically to
ensure the fine feeding time.
XX.X seconds
Page 108
[ 433 PRE FREQ : 15 ] Preact adjustment frequency.
Defines the quantity of filling to readjust the fine feed
cutoff. I.e. the preact adjustment is done after each 15
filling if the parameter is set to 15.
Page 108
[ 434 SAMPLING : 3 ] Sampling quantity.
Defines the sampling quantity to adjust the fine feed
cutoff. I.e. The error calculation is done after reading
3 filling results, if sampling rate is 3.
Page 108
[ 435 RATIO : 50 ] Preact correction ratio in percent.
The adjustment is done at percent of the calculated
filling error.
XX %

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 170 of 432
 [ 436 Z FREQ : 50 ] Zeroing frequency.
Defines the frequency of zeroing of the weighing hoppers.
Default is zeroing at each 50 filling.
Note: Zeroing is done automatically in every 120 minutes, if the
time is longer than 120 minutes between two zeroing.

[ 437 JOGGING : NO ] Jogging.

Feeding some material in to the container in case of less material
filling to get in to tolerances.
NO : Disable
TIME : Jogging is done only one time for jogging on time.
AUTO : Automatic jogging until get in to tolerance.

[ 438 JOG ON : 0.5 ] Jogging on time.

Defines the feeding time of jogging process in case of
under filling.
XX.X seconds.
[ 439 JOG OFF : 1.0 ] Jogging off time before start tolerance checking.
XX.X seconds.

[ 43A MIN ERR : 0.02 ] Minimum filling error limit to make preact adjustment.
The fine adjustment is not done if the filling error is
smaller than minimum error.
XXXXXX kg
[ 43B MAX ERR : 1.00 ] Maximum error limit to make preact adjustment. The
fine adjustment is not done if the filling error is bigger
than maximum error.
XXXXXX kg

[ 43C M WINDOW : 1 ] Motion window at filling process.

This parameter defines the motion window during filling process to
increase the filling speed. This motion window is used especially
to minimize the feeding adjustment times.
NO : Disable.
0.5d : ± 0,5d
1d : ± 1d
2d : ± 2d
3d : ± 3d
5d : ± 5d
8d : ± 8d
10d : ± 10d
15d : ± 15d

TIMERS OF FILLING
[ 44- TIMERS ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 171 of 432
 [ 441 Z DELAY : 2.5 ] Zeroing delay.
Zeroing is delayed to settle the scale after closing the
emptying / discharge gate.
XX.X seconds.
[ 442 T DELAY : 2.0 ] Taring delay.
Taring is delayed to settle the scale after loading the
container on to the scale.
XX.X seconds.
[ 443 STB CHK : 0.7 ] Stability check delay.
Stability checking after filling delayed to settle the
product in the container after feeding.
XX.X seconds.
[ 444 STB MAX : 5.0 ] Maximum stability time.
Defines the maximum limit of the settling time of the
scale after filling.
XX.X seconds.
[ 445 STRT DEL : 0.0 ] Start delay.
Delays the start of filling / closing the clamp to catch the bag.
XX.X seconds.
[ 446 EOB DEL : 0.0 ] End of batch output delay.
Enter the delay time to produce delayed trigger signal to any
mechanism at the end of batch, if need be.
EOB or EOF output is delayed to indicate the filling result a while
before producing the EOB output.
XX.X seconds.
[ 447 COARSE D : 0.7 ] Coarse and medium feed control delay.
The weight is not controlled at the beginning of feedings for a
while to eliminate the shock effects of feeding initiations. The
weight control starts after ending this time at feedings.
Caution: Longer time may obstacle the feeding control.
XX.X seconds.
[ 448 FINE DEL : 0.7 ] Fine feed control delay.
The weight is not controlled at the beginning of fine feeding for a
while to eliminate the effects of feeding at initiation. The weight
control starts after ending this time at fine feeding.
Caution: Longer time may obstacle the feeding control.
XX.X seconds.
FG DEL : Maximum delay time of the switch signal on
[ 449 FG DEL : 3.0 ]
the feeding gate and discharge gate at bagging, packing
VALV DEL
etc.
LIFT DEL
VALVDEL : Maximum delay time between the valve
output and its switch signal at liquid fillings.
LIFTDEL : Maximum delay time between the lifter output
and its switch signal at liquid fillings.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 172 of 432
 If the switch signal is not received in this time - which means the
required action is not done-, error prompt is produced.
XX.X seconds.
[ 44A CMPL DEL : 0.0 ] Complete delay.
The complete output is delayed to transfer the product or container
to the following step and the following step started with complete
output. The next filling does not wait for the complete output, i.e.
filling starts after closing the emptying / discharge gate at packing
machine.
XX.X seconds

[ 44B CATC DEL : 0.0 ] Catch delay.

Closing the clamp to catch the bag.
XX.X seconds.

[ 44C CLAMPDEL : 2.0 ] The clamp release delay.

The clamp releases the bag after this delay after filling it. This
parameter is used to settle the material in the pack after filling.
XX.X seconds.

[ 44D MAXFILLT : 999 ] Maximum filling time.

The filling process is ended and error message is displayed, if the
filling is not finished in this time.
XXX seconds.

ANALOGUE OUTPUT
[ 45- ANALOG OUT ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 451 TYPE : NO ] Analogue output type.

NO : Disabled.
0-20 : 0 mA - 20 mA
0-10 : 0 VDC - 10 VDC

[ 452 COARSE : 00.00 ] Analogue output value for Coarse feed.

[ 453 MEDIUM : 00.00 ] Analogue output value for Medium feed.

[ 454 FINE : 00.00 ] Analogue output value for Fine feed.

FILLING ON THE PALETTE

[ 46- PALETTE ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 173 of 432
 [ 461 OPERATIO : NO ] Weighing operation type of the machine.
The subtractive or additive taring can be used for
taring at palette filling.
NO : Disabled.
ADDI : Taring does not reduce the weighing range.
SUBT : The taring reduces the net weighing range.

[ 462 QUANTITY : 4 ] Container quantity on the palette.

[ 463 BATCH : FILL ] Operation at Batch filling.

This parameter defines the filling method of the last
palette of the batch.
STOP : Apply the Batch quantity / batch weight absolutely
and stop filling even palette is not fulfilled.
FILL : Fill all containers on the last palette at batch filling.

USAGE of SELECTABLE FUNCTIONS

Adjust your selectable functions like alarm, vibration etc in this group.
[ 47- SELECT USAGE ]
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 471 ALARM SP : ] Alarm Setpoint. Page 121

The instrument produces the alarm output if the gross load is
heavier than this value and if alarm feature is selected in sub-
block 34-.
Default is 9999.99
[ 472 ALARM T : 5.0 ] Alarm time. Page 121
Alarm output is active during alarm time, if
programmed. 00 means timer is disabled.
XX.X seconds.
[ 473 VIB MIN : 0.00 ] The weight to activate vibration output. Page 123
Default is 0.

[ 474 VIB MAX : 0.00 ] The weight to release the vibration output. Page 123
Default is 0.

[ 475 VIB DEL : 0.0 ] Vibration delay. Page 123

Vibration output is delayed after start feeding.
XX.X seconds.
[ 476 VIB TIME : 0.0 ] Vibration time. Page 123
The value of this parameter defines Vibration time.
XX.X seconds.
[ 477 ZR [d] : 1.0 ] Zero range in XX.X division. Page 121
The output is active if the indication is lower than zero range.
For example: if the scale division is 0.5 kg and you want zero
range output if the load is heavier than 1.2 kg , enter
1.2 /0.5 = 2.4 division.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 174 of 432
 TIMERS of SELECTABLE FUNCTIONS
[ 48- SELECT TIMERS ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

Timer 1 Trigger.
[ 481 TIMER 1 : SELE ]
Defines trigger of Timer 1.
SELE : Selectable input which is selected as TMR1.
Refer to sub-block 33-.
IN : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger Timer 1.
OUT : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger Timer 1.
[ 482 NUMBER : 1 ] Number of digital input or output to trigger Timer 1.
XX
Timer 1 Type. Page 125
[ 483 TMR1 TYP : A ]
Defines the usage of Timer 1.
A : Type A
B : Type B
C : Type C
D : Type D
E : Type E
F : Type F

[ 484 TMR1 ON : 0.0 ] Timer 1 On time.

XX.X seconds.
[ 485 TMR1 OFF : 0.0 ] Timer 1 Off time.
XX.X seconds.
Timer 2 Trigger.
[ 486 TIMER 2 : SELE ]
Defines trigger of Timer 2.
SELE : Selectable input which is selected as TMR2.
Refer to sub-block 33-.
IN : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger Timer 2.
OUT : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger Timer 2.
[ 487 NUMBER : 1 ] Number of digital input or output to trigger Timer 2.
XX
Timer 2 Type. Page 125
[ 488 TMR2 TYP : A ]
Defines the usage of Timer 2.
A : Type A
B : Type B
C : Type C
D : Type D
E : Type E
F : Type F

[ 489 TMR2 ON : 0.0 ] Timer 2 On time.

XX.X seconds.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 175 of 432
 [ 48A TMR2 OFF : 0.0 ] Timer 2 Off time.
XX.X seconds.
Timer 3 Trigger.
[ 48B TIMER 3 : SELE ]
Defines trigger of Timer 3.
SELE : Selectable input which is selected as TMR3.
Refer to sub-block 33-.
IN : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger Timer 3.
OUT : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger Timer 3.
[ 48C NUMBER : 1 ] Number of digital input or output to trigger Timer 3.
XX
Timer 3 Type. Page 125
[ 48D TMR3 TYP : A ]
Defines the usage of Timer 3.
A : Type A
B : Type B
C : Type C
D : Type D
E : Type E
F : Type F

[ 48E TMR3 ON : 0.0 ] Timer 3 On time.

XX.X seconds.
[ 48F TMR3 OFF : 0.0 ] Timer 3 Off time.
XX.X seconds.

LOGICAL of SELECTABLE FUNCTIONS

Press key or key again to enter this menu.
[ 4A- SELECT LOGIC ]
Or press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

Page 126
[ 4A1 LOGIC - AB : A+B ] Logical Function of ( A, B ).

One of the select output should be selected as logic output.

The function of the logic output can be defined as;
A+B : Sum A and B
AxB : Multiply A and B
A+NB : Sum A and inverse of B
AxNB : Multiply A and inverse of B
S–R : Start (A) – Reset (B)
NS-R : Inverse of set (A) – Reset (B)
N∑ : Inverse of sum A and B
NAB : Inverse of muliply A and B
[ 4A2 A TRIGG : SELE ] Defines the trigger of the logic A.
SELE : Selectable input which is selected as IN-A.
Refer to sub-block 33-.
IN : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger logic A.
OUT : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger logic A.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 176 of 432
 [ 4A3 NUMBER : 1 ] Number of digital input or output to trigger logic A.
XX
[ 4A4 B TRIGG : SELE ] Defines the trigger of the logic B.
SELE : Selectable input which is selected as IN-B.
Refer to sub-block 33-.
IN : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger logic B.
OUT : Enter the number of the digital input to trigger logic B.

[ 4A5 NUMBER : 1 ] Number of digital input or output to trigger logic B.

XX

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 177 of 432
[ 5-- SCALE ] Scale Block
This blocks are related with the measurement related parameters which are described the usage of the
scale. The most important parameter is 511which limit the usage of the parameters in main blocks 5, 6 and
8.

IND Industrial weighing Selections of parameters at set up and calibration are free
for industrial usage of the instrument.

INDG Industrial weighing Autozeroing, taring and power on zero are disabled.
only gross ( recommended for tank /silo weighings in gross.)

INDN Industrial weighing net Autozeroing and power on zero are disabled.
( taring can be enabled ) ( recommended for tank /silo weighings in gross and net.)

OIML Approved scale Metrology related parameters are restricted to limits of OIML
according to OIML R76 and EU type approval of the instrument.

After setting parameter 511, even you set any parameter out of the accepted range of selection of par 511,
it is saved in the acceptable limit. For example, if taring is activated at INDG selection, it will be disabled
while exiting from set up. For approved scales, set the parameters in main blocks 5, 6 and 8 perform
calibration carefully due to sealing of the scale in legal usage.

SCALE RELATED PARAMETERS MAIN BLOCK

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 5-- SCALE ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

SCALE SET UP
[ 51- SET UP ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 511 APROVAL : IND ] M Approval

IND : Industrial. All parameters can be freely selected.
INDG : Industrial weighing of tank, hopper or silo in gross.
(Taring, AZTrack and Power on Zero are disabled)
INDN : Industrial weighing in Net of tank, hopper or silo.
(disabled AZT and Power on Zero, enabled Tare )
OIML : OIML approved scale.

Page 41
[ 512 HIGHRES : TOGG ] M High resolution
TEMP : Temporary indication with key.
TOGG : Toggle. Start and end high resolution by pressing key in
sequence.
ALWA : Always high resolution.

[ 513 PWR ZERO : NO ] M Power on zero.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 178 of 432
 NO : Disable.
2% : ± 2%
2%LK : ± 2%, [ POWER ON ZERO ERR ] prompt cannot be
erased. Call service.
10% : ± 10%
15-5 : + 15%, - 5%
20% : ± 20%
Page 37
[ 514 ZEROING : 50% ] M Zeroing range.
NO : Disable.
2% : ± 2%
3% : ± 3%
20% : ± 20%
50% : ± 50%

[ 515 AZTRACK : NO ] M Automatic zero tracking.

Be careful to activate automatic zero tracking function
against wrong zeroings at the beginning of feedings.
NO : Disable.
0.3d : ± 0,3d
0.5d : ± 0,5d
1d : ± 1d
2d : ± 2d
3d : ± 3d
Stability detection range at static weighing
[ 516 STABLE : 0.5d ] M
and for printout.
NO : Disable.
0.3d : ± 0,3d
0.5d : ± 0,5d
1d : ± 1d
2d : ± 2d
3d : ± 3d
4d : ± 4d
5d : ± 5d
9d : ± 9d
[ 517 STBTIME : 0.7 ] Stability time.
The scale is accepted as a stable to process, If the scale is stable
during this time.
0.1…. 9.9 seconds.

Tilt switch to prevent wrong weighing results in mobile scales.

[ 51A TILT : NO ] M
Set any select input as TILT.
NO : Not used.
OPEN : Normally open contact.
CLOS : Normally closed contact.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 179 of 432
 SCALE BUILD
Press key or key again to enter this menu.
52- BUILD ]
Press key to go to the next sub-block or press key to go to
the next main-block.

Page 38
[ 521 UNIT : KG ] M The scale unit.
(Primary unit which calibration is done.)
Select NO, g, kg, t, lb or klb.

[ 522 RANGE : SING ] M Scale range.

SING : Single Range
2MR : 2 x Multi Range
3MR : 3 x Multi Range
2MI : 2 x Multi Interval
3MI : 3 x Multi Interval

[ 523 MAX : ] M Scale capacity Max and division (d).

MAX1/d1 Enter scale capacity and division after press key.
MAX2/d2 Capacities and divisions of MR and MI scales are
MAX3/d3 entered as Max1, d1, Max2, d2, Max3, d3.

[ 524 OVER : 9d ] M Limit of Indication.

NO : Over indication after Max
1d : 1 division more than Max
5d : 5 division more than Max
9d : 9 divisions more than Max
2% : 2% more than Max
5% : 5% more than Max

[ 525 LC mV/V : 2.00 ] M Load cell sensitivity.

Enter load cell sensitivity of the load cell from
catalogue as X.XX up to 9.99mV/V.
Enter 9.99 if the load cell sensitivity is between
9.90mV/V to 15mV/V.
[ 526 TARETYPE : SUB ] M Tare type.
SUB : Subtractive tare. Taring reduces the maximum net.
ADD : Additive tare. Taring is limited to MaxTare and Net
weighing is done up to Max due to weighing range is
not reduced after taring.
BOTH : Subtractive and additive taring are available and can
be selected in the receipt.

[ 527 MAXTARE : 0.00 ] M Maximum tare at additive tare.

Enter the maximum tare of the scale which is written
on the marking label as;
T= + XXXX.X at additive tare
Default is 0.0 which means no limit.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 180 of 432
 DIGITAL LOAD CELL SETUP (Only BX30DFill)
53- DLC SETUP ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 532 QUANTITY : 01 ] M Quantity of digital load cell

Enter the quantity of DLC used in the scale.
The quantity can be entered between 1 and 30.

[ 533 ADDRESSING ] M Addressing of digital load cells

Enter serial number after press key.

SHIFT / ECCENTRICITY ADJUSTMENT (Only BX30DFill)

[ 54- SHIFT ADJUST ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 541 METHOD : CELL ] M Adjustment method

CELL : Individual load cell shift adjust
PAIR : Sectional pair shift adjustment

[ 542 AUTO ADJUST ] M Automatic Eccentricity Adjustment

The eccentricity correction of scale is performed automatically.

[ 543 MANUAL ADJUS ] M Manual Adjustment

The eccentricity correction of scale is performed manually.

[ 544 SET TO 1 : NO ] M Temporarily set shift constants to 1

NO : Normal operation
(Entered shift constants are used).
YES : Test mode
(Shift constants are equal to 1).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 181 of 432
Addressing Digital Load cells
IMPORTANT NOTE: You can connect all DLC to junction box for Flintec digital load cell but you must connect
each Baykon digital load cell separately at addressing.

The following diagram shows the recommended load cell addressing principle. Remember, if pair
shift adjustment is selected, 1 and 2, 3 and 4 etc. will be sectional pairs.

1 3 5 7 9

Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 5

2 4 6 8 10

Figure 17.2 - The addressing principle of the digital load cells.

Addressing of Baykon digital load cells

1. Press key at the [ 533 ADDRESSING ] prompt to start the addressing.

2. At the [ WAIT ] prompt for a short time and then [ CONNECT DLC :01 ] message appears and
connect the DLC number 1 to connector of junction box. Here 01 is the address of the DLC.
3. Press key to enter the serial number of the DLC.
4. After the [ SERIAL: ] prompt, type the serial number value via numerical keys.
5. Press key to start addressing the digital load cell. [ ADDRESSING DLC ] message will
shown on the display 10 seconds while addressing is being performed.
6. After the [ DISCONNECT DLC :01 ] prompt, disconnect the DLC number 1 from connector of
junction box and press key.
7. The following DLC number seen on the display. You may press key to enter the serial
number and you may repeat from item 2 until all DLCs have been addressed.
8. After all load cells have been assigned addresses, [ CONNECT ALL DLC ] message appears.
9. Connect all load cells to the scale and press key. [ 532 QUANTITY :XY ] message
appears.
10. Press key to access to Shift adjustment block or press key until [ SAVE : YES ]
prompt seen on the display and press key to save the changes into the memory.

Manually Addressing an Individual Baykon digital load cell

The manual addressing of load cell is done to change any load cell or to change the instrument
without performing shift adjustment and calibration.
To address any load cell manually,

1. Press key at the [ 533 ADDRESSING ] prompt to start the addressing.

2. At the [ WAIT ] prompt for a short time and then [ CONNECT DLC :01 ] message appears to
indicate load cell address.
3. Press key until appearing the address which the new load cell will install.
4. Disconnect all load cells from the Junction box and connect the new load cell.
5. Press key to start address the load cell.
6. Enter the serial number of the load cell. Press key for addressing the load cell.
7. After the [ DISCONNECT DLC :01 ] prompt, connect all load cells to the junction box.
8. Press key after connecting all load cells, then press key. [ 532 QUANTITY :XY ]
message appears.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 182 of 432
 9. Press key to access to Shift adjustment block or press key until [ SAVE : YES ]
prompt seen on the display and press key to save the changes into the memory.

Addressing of Flintec digital load cells

1. Press key at the [ 533 ADDRESSING ] prompt to start the addressing.

2. At the [ WAIT ] prompt for a short time and then [ DLC NUMBER :01 ] message appears.
Here 01 is the address of the DLC.
3. Press key to enter the serial number of the DLC.
4. After the [ SERIAL: ] prompt, type the serial number value via numerical keys.
5. Press key to start addressing the digital load cell. [ ADDRESSING DLC ] message will
shown on the display 10 seconds while addressing is being performed.
6. The following DLC number seen on the display. You may press key to enter the serial
number and you may repeat from item 4 until all DLCs have been addressed.
7. [ 532 QUANTITY :XY ] message appears after addressing all load cells.
8. Press key to access to Shift adjustment block or press key until [ SAVE : YES ]
prompt seen on the display and press key to save the changes into the memory.

Manually Addressing an Individual Flintec digital load cell

The manual addressing of load cell is done to change any load cell or to change the instrument
without performing shift adjustment and calibration.
To address any load cell manually,

1. Press key at the [ 533 ADDRESSING ] prompt to start the addressing.

2. At the [ WAIT ] prompt for a short time and then [ DLC NUMBER :01 ] message appears to
indicate load cell address.
3. Press key until appearing the address which the new load cell will install.
4. Connect the new load cell to junction box.
5. Press key to start address the load cell.
6. Enter the serial number of the load cell. Press key for addressing the load cell.
7. After the following DLC number seen on the display, then press key. [ 532 QUANTITY
:XY ] message appears.
8. Press key to access to Shift adjustment block or press key until [ SAVE : YES ]
prompt seen on the display and press key to save the changes into the memory.

Shift adjustment method

The shift adjustment is done to eliminate weight reading differences at placing the load on different
positions on the platform. The calibration is required after shift adjustment.
Each load cell or each sectional pair should be loaded for eccentricity adjustment. Individual shift adjustment
is used to eliminate errors in installations that have excessive eccentricity errors. Typical application of
sectional pairs is rolling loads on the platform like truck scales. Sectional pairs adjustment is more easy and
faster.

Automatic Shift Adjustment

IMPORTANT NOTE: This adjustment must be performed before calibration. Load the scale few times before
performing automatic shift adjustment.
Small mismatches in mechanical and electronic gain of the load sensing paths can cause the same test
weight to produce slightly different readings, depending on the location of the test weight on the scale. To
eliminate these eccentricity errors, shift adjustment is performed as;

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 183 of 432
 1. Press key at the [ 542 AUTO ADJUST ] prompt to start the shift adjustment.
2. At the [ ZERO CALIBRATION ] prompt, press key to go to next step.
3. [ UNLOAD THE PAN] prompt, remove any weight on the platform, then press key.
4. The filling controller automatically starts to capture zero and the [ WAIT ] message
indicating the operation is in progress.
5. After the [ LOAD DLC NO : 01 ] or [ LOAD PAIR NO : 01 ] prompt, place the weight of at
least 10% of the DLC capacity as close as possible to the independent load cell or sectional
pair 01. Press key.
6. The filling controller automatically starts to capture the values from DLCs and the [ WAIT ]
message indicating the operation is in progress.
7. The following load cell address or pairs number appears on the display and you may repeat
from item 5 until all DLCs have been adjusted.
8. After end of adjustment the following sub-block appears.

Manual Shift Adjustment

IMPORTANT NOTE: The shift adjustment must be performed before calibration.
Manual shift adjustment is done to improve the small shift errors manually, to enter shift coefficients of load
cells after changing the instrument which eliminates to perform automatic shift adjustment.

1. Press key at the [ 543 MANUAL ADJUS ] prompt to start the manual shift adjustment.
2. At the [ DLC COEFF :01 ] and [ 1.0000 ] prompt, enter the coefficient by pressing the
numerical keys and press key to go to following item.
3. After entering the value of the last coefficient press key to check values again or press
key to exit.
4. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen on the display. Press key to save the
changes into the memory.

Setting Shift Coefficients of all Load cells to 1

Setting all coefficients to 1 temporary might be needed to give service to the scale without losing the shift
coefficients.

1. Press key at the [ 544 SET TO 1 : NO ] prompt to adjust the parameter.

2. It will be [ 544 SET TO 1 : YES ], press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen on the
display.
3. Press key to save the changes into the memory.

Do not forget to reload coefficients after testing the scale as;

1. Press key at the [ 544 SET TO 1 : YES ] prompt to adjust the parameter.
2. It will be [ 544 SET TO 1 : NO ], press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen on the
display.
3. Press key to save the changes into the memory.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 184 of 432
[ 6-- CALB / ADJUST ] Calibration and Adjustment Block
The Calibration and Adjustment main block is shown below.

SCALE ZERO AND SPAN SETTING MAIN BLOCK

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 6-- CALIB / ADJUST ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

CALIBRATION
[ 61- CALIBRATION ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 611 TEST WEIGHT ] M Scale calibration with test weight

[ 612 LINEARIZATIO ] M Multipoint scale calibration to increase linearization

[ 613 ELECTRONIC ] M eCal electronic calibration without test weight

ADJUSTMENTS
[ 62- ADJUSTMENT ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 621 ZERO ADJUSTM ] M Zero adjustment

[ 622 SPAN ADJUSTM ] M Span adjustment

[ 623 S UNDER LOAD ] M Span adjustment of loaded scale

Span adjustment under load
Span adjustment with temporary zeroing

[ 624 GRAVITY CAL ] M Gravity acceleration of the place of the calibration.

[ 625 GRAVITY USAG ] M Gravity acceleration of the place of the usage.

CALIBRATION COEFICIENTS
[ 63- COEFFICIENTS ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 185 of 432
 [ 631 LOAD COEFFIC ] M The load weight used at the calibration is indicated here.

[ 632 ZERO COEFFIC ] M This coefficient is determined the zero point of the scale.

[ 633 GAIN COEFFIC ] M This coefficient is related with the gain factor of the scale.

Calibration

Calibration involves emptying the scale then placing a known test weight on an empty platform and allowing
BX30 to capture values for zero and span. The load cell signal during calibration is announced on the
information display. Calibration is performed as;

1. Press key at the [ 611 TEST WEIGHT ] prompt to start the calibration.
2. At the [ UNLOAD THE PAN] prompt, remove any weight on the platform, then press key.
3. The filling controller automatically starts to capture zero and the [ WAIT ] message appears during
zero adjustment.
4. The test weight value will be used for the calibration is seen on the display as [ LOAD THE SCALE ]
[ XXXXXX ] after zero adjustment. Enter the test weight value via numerical keys. A minimum test
load requirement is 20% of scale capacity for accurate calibration. BAYKON recommends test load
between 50% to 75% of the capacity.
5. Place the test weight on the scale.
6. Press key to start span calibration. [ WAIT ] message will shown on the display 10 seconds
while span calibration is being performed.

Linearity Correction

Because of the load cell non-linearity or mechanical scale hardware, you may see non linearity on the scale
performance. Multipoint calibration in this parameter improves the scale performance.

1. Press key at the [ 612 LINEARIZATIO ] prompt to start the calibration.

2. At the [ UNLOAD THE PAN] prompt, remove any weight on the platform, then press key.
3. The filling controller automatically starts to capture zero and the [ WAIT ] message appears during
zero adjustment.
4. At the [ LOAD 1 ] [ XXXXXX ] prompt, the test weight value will be used for the first step calibration
is seen on the display. A test load requirement is between 35% to 60% of capacity. Load the scale
and enter the test weight value via numerical keys.
5. Place the test weights or another practical weight on the scale.
6. Press key to start span calibration. [ WAIT ] message will shown on the display 10 seconds while
the first span calibration is being performed.
7. At the [ LOAD 2 ] [ XXXXXX ] prompt, the test weight value will be used for the second step
calibration is seen on the display. Place test weight on the platform at least 90% of scale capacity,
preferable at scale capacity. Enter the weight value by numerical keys.
8. Press to start second step span calibration. [ WAIT ] message will shown on the display 10
seconds while the span calibration is being performed.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 186 of 432
Zero and Span Adjustments

In this sub-block you can only perform zero adjustment or span adjustment automatically without
performing full calibration. Do not perform span calibration if eCal electronic calibration.

Automatic Zero Adjustment

1. Press key at the [ 621 ZERO ADJUSTM ] prompt to start the zero adjustment.
2. At the [ UNLOAD THE PAN] prompt, remove any weight on the platform, then press key.
3. The filling controller automatically starts to capture zero and the [ WAIT ] message appears
during zero adjustment.

Automatic Span Adjustment

1. Press key at the [ 622 SPAN ADJUSTM ] prompt to start the span adjustment.
2. At the [ LOAD THE SCALE ] [ XXXXXX ] prompt, the test weight value will be used for the
calibration seen on the display. Enter the test weight value via numerical keys. A minimum test
load requirement is 20% of scale capacity for accurate calibration. BAYKON recommends test
load between 50% to 75% of the capacity.
3. Place the test weights on the scale.
4. Press to start span calibration. [ WAIT ] message will shown on the display 10 seconds
during span calibration.

Automatic Span Adjustment Under Load

This parameter is being used to perform span adjustment of a scale without lifting the load on it.
This operation especially used for span adjustment tank / silo which have some material in it. You
can make span adjustment without emptying the tank.

1. Press key at the [ 623 S UNDER LOAD ] prompt to start the span adjustment under load.
2. [ P.ZERO ] prompt appears on the display to indicate the scale load will be determined as
temporary zero.
3. Press key and the display will show [ WAIT ] message during temporary zero adjustment.
4. At the [ LOAD THE SCALE ] [ XXXXXX ] prompt, the test weight value will be used for the
calibration is seen on the display. Enter the test weight value via numerical keys. A minimum
test load requirement is 20% of scale capacity for accurate calibration. BAYKON recommends
test load between 50% to 75% of the capacity. Sum of the preload of the scale and test weight
must be less than capacity.
5. Place the test weights on the scale.
6. Press to start span calibration. [ WAIT ] message will shown on the display 10 seconds
during span calibration.
7. Zero adjustment is recommended after emptying the scale.

eCal Electronic Calibration

IMPORTANT NOTE: The eCal electronic calibration is based on the zero adjustment by entering the dead load
value or automatic zero adjustment and span adjustment by entering the load cell data.
WARNING: If the primary unit is no kg, the selected unit should be saved by exit from set-up and then
perform eCal.

1. Full calibration cancels the eCal performed before.

2. Span adjustment is cancels the eCal performed before.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 187 of 432
 3. Gravity adjustment cannot be done after eCal.
4. “Span adjustment under load “ cannot be done after eCal.
5. Shift adjustment cancelled the eCal performed before.

This parameter lets you to perform calibration without using any test weights. A/D coefficients of the filling
controller are adjusted in production for increasing eCal accuracy. The calibration coefficients are calculated
by scale capacity, total load cell capacity, load cell full scale output and estimated dead load. If the
conditions are convenient for zero calibration, you may perform automatic zero adjustment instead of
entering estimated preload.

[TOTAL LC CAPACIT ] ( only BX30 Fill )

[XXXXXX]
Enter total load cell capacity via numerical keys and press key to go to the next step.

Example : If the weighing system has 4 pcs 1000 kg load cell, enter 4000.

[AVARAGE LC OUT ] ( only BX30 Fill )

[XXXXXX]
Enter load cell output in mV/V via numerical keys. If the weighing system has more than one load
cell, calculate the mean value of load cells outputs mV/V indicated on the certificates of the load
cells. Press key to go to the next step.

Example: If load cell outputs are LC1: 2.0010, LC2: 1.9998, LC3:1.9986 and LC4:2.0002, the mean
value will be;
Mean of LC outputs = ( 2.0010 + 1.9998 + 1.9986 + 2.0002 ) ÷ 4 = 1.9999 mV/V.

[ZERO ADJUST ]
If the scale is empty and you want to make automatic zero adjustment instead of entering estimated
dead load ( look next step ), press key appears [ UNLOAD THE PAN ] and press key to start
zero calibration after unloading the scale. The display will show [ WAIT ] message during zero
adjustment. In this while the scale must be unloaded and stable. Approximately 10 seconds later
electronic calibration is performed.

If the scale is not empty or you prefer to enter estimated preload value, press the key before
pressing the key.

[ESTIM DEAD LOAD]

[XXXXXX]
Enter the dead load value of the weighing system in current unit by using numerical keys. Press the
key to go to the next step.

Notes:
Dead load correction: You may change the dead load value after testing the scale and adding the
displayed gross weight value of unloaded scale to the dead load value. Do not press key after
switch on the instrument after calibration, and the power on zero and automatic zero tracking
should be disabled to determine the dead load error.
Dead load value is cancelled after automatic zero adjustment.

Gravity adjustment
WARNING: This parameter should ONLY be used at the scale that will be initially verified in two stages by
gravity adjustment in legal metrologic applications.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 188 of 432
The gravity acceleration values of the place of the calibration and of the place of the usage are entered in
this parameter.

1. Press key to access this parameter.

2. [ 624 GRAVITY CAL : 9.80255] prompt seen. Enter the gravity acceleration value of the calibration
place. Confirm with key.
3. [ 625 GRAVITY USAG : 9.80255] prompt seen after pressing key. Enter the gravity acceleration
value of the place of the usage.
4. Confirm with key.

Calibration coefficients
Calibration coefficients are calculated after calibration and saved in to the memory for usage until next
calibration. Note these coefficients to use them in case of calibration lost. Changing them slightly improves
the scale accuracy without recalibration. Entering these values to another the indicator may cause slightly
reducing the weighing accuracy due to offset differences between two analogue digital circuits.

[ 8-- METROLOGY ] Metrology Block

The metrology main block is shown below.

METROLOGY MAIN BLOCK

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 8-- METROLOGY ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

ALIBI MEMORY
[ 81- ALIBI MEMORY ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 811 ALIBI : NO ] M Alibi memory Page 203

NO : Disable
YES : Enable
[ 812 PORT : PRNT ] Select the Alibi data transfer port.
PRNT : to the printer port.
R232 : to the RS232C.
USB : to the USB
ETH : to the Ethernet TCP/IP.

[ 813 ACCESS : NUM ] Access to the Alibi memory record Page 203
NUM : Search by Alibi number
DATE : Search by date
NET : Search by net value (absolute)
GROS : Search by gross value
TARE : Search by tare value
CN : Search by Consecutive value

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 189 of 432
 [ 814 TRANSFER : NO ] Transfer Alibi memory records Page 204
NO : No
ALL : Transfer alibi memory record to
the printer port

[ 815 ALIBI ABOUT ] Transfer alibi memory information. Page 204

[ 816 FORMAT : NO ] M Format alibi memory SD card. Page 204

NO : No
YES : Start formatting alibi SD card.
Attention : Only authorized person !!!

METROLOGIC INFORMATION
[ 82- INFORMATION ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

This counter announces interfering quantity to the

instrument with service password when calibration
[ 821 CAL COUNTER ] switch enabled. Count number increases at exit from
set-up mode if service password is used and
calibration is enabled to enter set-up mode.

This non-resettable and protected counter announces

[ 822 CONFIG COUNT ] interfering quantity to the instrument. Count number
increases at every exit from set-up mode.

[ 823 NEXT VERIFIC ] Date of the next verification Page 40

[ 9-- DIAGNOSTIC ] Diagnostic Block

The diagnostic main block is shown below.

DIAGNOSTIC MAIN BLOCK

Press key sequentially to access this main block,
[ 9-- DIAGNOSTIC ] or press key or key to enter configuration parameters,
or press key to go to the next block,
or press key to exit from programming.

HARDWARE TESTING
[ 91- HARDWARETEST ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 911 KEY TEST ] Key testing

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 190 of 432
 [ 912 RS232 ] RS232C serial port testing

[ 913 RS485 ] RS485 serial port testing

[ 914 RS422 ] RS422 serial port testing

[ 915 USB ] USB port testing

[ 916 INPUTS ] Digital Input testing

[ 917 OUTPUTS ] Digital Output testing

[ 918 DISPLAY ] Display testing

[ 919 LC SIGNAL mV ] Load cell signal measuring in millivolt (only BX30 Fill)
[ 919 DLC COUNTS ] Internal count values of the digital Load cell(s) (only BX30DFill)

[ 91A PRINTER ] Printer testing

[ 91B TESTPRNT : NO ] M Data output format for easy adjustment the machine at service.
NO : No
YES : Data transfer to follow the machine performance at
service.
WARNING: Disable this parameter after service.

HISTORY
[ 92- HISTORY ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 921 PEAK LOAD ] The last 20 peak loads listed in this parameter.

[ 922 UNDER LOGS ] The last 20 under errors listed in this parameter.

[ 923 ERROR LOGS ] The last 20 errors listed in this parameter.

[ 924 ENTRY LOGS ] The last 20 Service/User entry listed in this parameter.

[ 925 FILL ERRO ] The last 20 Filling errors are listed in this parameter.

BACKUP / RESTORE
[ 96- BACKUP/RESTO ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 961 BACKUP : ALL ] Backup to SD card. Page 206

ALL : Backup the instrument’s all parameter to SD card.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 191 of 432
 [ 962 RESTORE : RCPT ] M Restore the instrument from SD card. Page 206
RCPT : Receipt build configuration and receipt in the usage
(4-- parameter group).
SETP : Parameters of 1-- , 2-- and 3-- parameter groups.
CAL : Parameter group 5-- and calibration coefficients.
ALL : All parameters and calibration.
WARNING: CAL and ALL items can be loaded if the calibration
switch is at ON position.

FIRMWARE INFORMATION
[ 97- FIRMWARE ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Or press key to go to the next sub-block.

[ 971 INSTRUMENT ] XX.XX

[ 972 OPTION ] XX.XX

[ 973 UPGRADE ] M Firmware upgrade

Call Baykon service or dealer to upgrade.
[ 974 DLC BOARD ] XX.XX (only BX30DFill)

[ 975 I/O BOARD ] XX.XX

DEFAULTS LOADING
[ 99- DEFAULT ] Press key or key again to enter this menu.
Press key to go to beginning of the sub-block or press key
to go to the next main-block.

[ 993 PARAMET DEF ] M Load parameter's default

( Receipt build and Calibration settings do not change )
[ 994 FACTORY DEF ] M Load factory defaults

[ 995 DEFAULT ADDR ] M Load default address to digital load cell. (only BX30DFill)
The default address feature solves the problem and provides
access to the load cell functions even if its address and its serial
number are not known.
WARNING: The DLC must be disconnected from the network and
connect as single.
[ 996 DEL RECEIPTS ] Delete all receipts.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 192 of 432
18. SEALING OF APPROVED SCALE

Sealing of Calibration switch Sealing of Load cell connector

Alibi SD card sealing

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 193 of 432
19. TROUBLE SHOOTING
BX30 filling control had been designed as a very reliable and virtually error free instrument. However if there
is an error occurs, do not attempt to repair the equipment before understanding what caused the error. Note
the problems you have with your instrument and the error messages shown on the display. Then try to solve
the problem according to the error table given below.

19.1 Display Messages at Filling Process

The messages below are shown on the display in the filling cycle or if there is any error in the filling.

DISPLAY MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

READY The controller is ready to start filling or discharging.
TARING Announces taring before feeding.
COARSE FEED Announces the coarse feeding is progress.
MIDDLE FEED Announces the middle feeding is progress.
FINE FEEDING Announces the fine feeding is progress.
ZEROING Announces automatic zeroing before start feeding.
FILLING Announces the filling process at TANK and WOUT modes.
VALVE TO DWN Announces the filling valve is going down.
VALVE TO UP Announces the filling valve is going up.
SETTLING Announces the stable checking for preact adjustment or sampling.
This message is shown at the end of filling. The message is shown until the
END OF FILL
container is removed from the platform in OPEN, BUNG and BOTT modes.
DISCHARGING Announces the discharging process at bagging and packing modes.
DSCHRG DELAY Emptying/ Discharge delay time in function.
RUN INACTIVE Start input is not executed due to run input is not active.
INHIBITED Announces the inhibit input is active and the filling is inhibited.
LANCE POSITI Announces the lance position is not at start-up position.
STAND BY Announces the standby function is active.
BATCH END Bulk/Batch process is ended.
BYPASS Announces the By-Pass input is active and bypass is started.
RESET Announces the process is resetted.
INTERRUPTED Announces the interrupt input is active and filling is interrupted.
HOLD Announces the hold input is active and filling is holded.
CHK FILL STP Announces that stopped the filling/packing process at the end of filling.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 194 of 432
 Announces that hold the filling process at the end of discharge / emptying to
CHK DISC STP
follow the discharging / emptying.
ALARM Announces the alarm output is active.
MULTICYCLE? Announces start filling process as multi cycle method.
SETUP LOADING Announces related parameters are sending to slave instrument(s).
Announces the slave instrument is not communicate with the master
M/S COMM ERR
instrument.
WGHT MODE Announces the controller is at basic weighing.

19.2 Filling Process Related Errors

ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
P01 FEEDING GATE Feeding Gate position error.
This message appears if tare of the container is not between minimum tare
and maximum tare values entered in receipt parameters in 414 and 415.
P02 TARE RANGE
This error is acknowledged by Start key/input or ACK Input, if the tare goes
in to the range.
This message appears if Taring could not executed.
For example, if the weight is negative or scale is not stable. When the
P03 TARING FAIL
conditions become normal, error is acknowledged by Start key/input or ACK
Input.
This message appears if zeroing cannot be done at the beginning of filling
because of the zeroing range ( par. 514 ) or unstable load.
P04 ZEROING FAIL
Applying Start key or ACK inputs restarts the filling cycle.
This error means the weight is out of Empty weight (par. 41E) at the
P05 ZEROING RANG
beginning of Filling cycle. Can be acknowledged by Start key or ACK inputs.
This prompt announces that the filling is not finished in the filling time and is
P06 FILLING TIME ended. Can be acknowledged by ACK input or Error is cancelled by Reset
input. Refer to parameter 44D.
This prompt is displayed and feeding stops, if “Valve is at down position”
P07 VALVE POSITI input becomes passive during feeding. Feeding starts again after “Valve is at
down position” input becomes “active”.
While the filling valve is going down, if the weight is bigger than Valve Force
P08 WRONG POSITI weight (Par. 416) this message appears.
Can be acknowledged by ACK input or Error is cancelled by Reset input.
The weight is less than discharging target.
P10 MAXFILL LIMI
Error is cancelled by Reset input.
This message appears if there is over tolerance. Error is acknowledged by
P11 OVER TOLERAN
the ACK. Reset or reject inputs cancels the filling.
This message appears if the weight is not stable for 5 times consecutively (If
P12 STABLE ERROR
tolerance is disabled) at the end of filling.
Bag holder error. Appears if the bag holder is not closed in Catch delay time
P13 CLMP IS OPEN
( par. 44B ).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 195 of 432
 P14 OUT OF RANGE Load exceeds the operation range.

This message appears in case of under tolerance. Error is acknowledged by

P15 UNDER TOLERA
the ACK or Start input. Reset and reject inputs cancels the filling.

P16 DSCHRG GATE Discharge Gate position error.

P17 TILTED Announces the tilt position error.

Announces the smart start up feature is not executed. Check the fine time
P18 SMRT STRT ER
value and material feeder speeds.
Announces the multicycle filling feature is not executed. Check the
P19 CHECK MAXFIL
maximum filing limit ( par. 317 ).

19.3 General Error Codes

ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION THINGS TO DO
Weight is too low - Check the load
- Load cell or instrument could be
Over Load broken.

- Check the load

- Check the calibration
LC Err Load exceeds the operation range
- Load cell or instrument could be
broken.
+POWERONZEROERR
Weight is out of power on zero - Press key to start indication
range. Without zeroing and call service.
-POWERONZEROERR
Power source voltage is less than
LOW VOLT PWR OFF
9 VDC.
- Check the power supply voltage.
HIGH VOLT PWROFF Voltage is more than 30 VDC.
- Too much tilting for operation.
TILTED The tilt position error. - Check the tilt equipment.
- Change the tilt input.
ADC initialization error.
ADC could not initialize at power
E01 ADC ERROR - Power off the instrument reenergizes
on. ADC or its interface circuitry
it after 30 seconds.
has a malfunction.
- Check external load cell connection.
ADC conversion error. - Check load cell connector in the
ADC could not convert the load instrument.
E02 ADC ERROR cell signal. ADC or its load cell - Change main board.
connection circuitry may have a
malfunction.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 196 of 432
 ADC data is out of the range.
ADC could not convert the load
cell signal in range. ADC or its
E03 ADC ERROR
load cell connection circuitry may
have a malfunction or load cell
excitation voltage is too low.
- Power off the instrument reenergizes
Communication error between
E09 DISPLAY COMM it after 30 seconds.
display board and main board.
- If not, change main board.
- If you changed the E2ROM ( U12 and
NVM version error. Factory U13 ) press Enter key. The factory
E10 NVM VERSION
default will be loaded. defaults will be loaded.
- If not, change main board.
- Check the scale performance.
Checksum error of calibration
E20 CALIBRATION - Recalibrate the scale.
coefficients.
- Change mainboard.
- Check the scale performance.
E21 SETUP ERROR Check sum error of parameters. - Recalibrate the scale.
- Change mainboard.
E22 CHECKSUM ERR Checksum error of the data. - Change E2ROM ( U12 ).
- Press enter key and re-enter the
E23 HEADER FOOTE Header checksum error. headers.
- Change E2ROM ( U13 ).
- Press enter key and re-enter the
E24 HEADER FOOTE Footnote checksum error. footers.
- Change E2ROM ( U13 ).
- Press enter key and re-enter the
E25 FBUS SETUP E Fieldbus set up error. fieldbus setup.
- Change E2ROM ( U13 ).
- Change CR2032 battery.
E28 CLOCK ERROR Clock error.
- Change the main board.
- Change main board.
E29 HEADER FOOTE ID header checksum error.
- Change E2ROM ( U13 ).
- Press enter key and re-load the EPL
Checksum error of EPL printout
E32 LABEL ERROR code.
format.
- Change E2ROM ( U13 ).
ADC output is not changed - Recalibrate the scale.
E34 NOT LOADED
enough to make span calibration. - Change mainboard.
The load cell output is decreased - Check load cell connections.
E35 LC CONNECTIO
after loading. - Check test weight loading.
The load is not enough for span - Recalibrate the scale.
E36 ADD LOAD
calibration. - Change mainboard.
- Wait until scale become stable.
The load is not stable at - Check grounding wiring.
E37 UNSTABLE
calibration. - Recalibrate the scale.
- Change mainboard.
- Disable Alibi memory if not required.
Alibi memory SD card is not
E40 NO ALIBI SD - Check Alibi SD card.
installed.
- Change mainboard.
Alibi SD card is not supplied from
E41 ALIBI ERROR - Install Baykon Alibi SD card.
BAYKON.
Alibi memory serial number error. - Format the alibi memory SD
E42 NEW ALIBI
The new alibi SD card is installed. card. Refer to parameter 816.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 197 of 432
 Alibi memory could not be - Check alibi memory SD card
E43 ALIBI ERROR
initialized. - Change main board.
E44 ALIBI ERROR Alibi CSUM error. - Check alibi memory records.
- Change Alibi memory SD card.
E47 ALIBI ERROR Alibi information CSUM error. - Change main board.

E48 ALIBI ERROR Wrong SD card at alibi memory. - Order Alibi SD card.

The DLC Board is broken or not - Re-energize controller.

E50 DLC CARD FAI
installed. - Change the DLC Board.
The I/O Board or RIO16 is broken - Re-energize controller and RIO16.
E60 DIG I/O COM
or not installed. - Change the I/O Board / RIO16.
- Change E2ROM ( U13 ).
E61 FLASH ERROR E2PROM Error (U13).
- Change main board.
- Change E2ROM ( U12 ).
E62 FLASH ERROR E2PROM Error (U12).
- Change main board.
- Re-energize controller.
E69 MODULE FAULT Fieldbus module is not initialized - Change the fieldbus module.
- Change the fieldbus board.
- Check data format of other interfaces.
E70 MB SELECT ER Modbus selection error - Other interfaces should not be
Modbus.
- PT is not entered or PT checksum
error.
E78 NO PT RECORD Preset tare memory error.
- Enter PT.
- Call service
- Reverify the scale after checking the
scale hardware, load cells,
E80 VERIFY SCALE Reverify the scale.
performance etc.
- Press enter key to on filling.
- Check the DLC connection (RS-485 &
E81 CANNOT ADDR DLC could not addressed. Power supply) hardware.
- Check the DLC and S/N.
- Check addressing is done correctly.
Shift adjustment is not available - Check test weight loading on
E82 SHIFT ADJUST due to load cell coefficients are the correct DLC.
out of limits. - Check the load cell installation and
scale installation.
- Reenergize the controller.
No regular response from load - Check the DLC connection (RS-485 &
E83 DLC ERR
cell Power supply).
- Change load cell.
- Check the DLC and S/N.
E84 SN NOT MATCH The address and S/N of the load
- Reenergize the controller.
DLC yy (1) cell do not match.
- Readdress the DLC.
- Check the DLC connection (RS-485 &
E85 DLC ERR
Communication time out Power supply) hardware.
DLC yy (1)
- Check the DLC and S/N.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 198 of 432
 E86 DLC COM ERR
Status error of load cell - Change load cell.
DLC yy (1)

E87 OVER UNDER - Check mechanical installation and

The DLC is under
DLC yy (1) DLC.

E88 OVER UNDER - Check mechanical installation and

The DLC is over
DLC yy (1) DLC.

- Check termination resistors.

E89 DLC ERR
Checksum error - Check the DLC connection (RS-485 &
DLC yy (1)
Power supply) hardware.

Power supply of DLCs could not - Check the main board.

E90 DLC PWR ERR
detected.

Internal communication error

- Change the DLC board.
E91 DLC ERR between the DLC board and the
- Change the main board.
controller.

Capacity of the load cell is

E92 DLC UNMATCH - Check capacity of the DLC
different.

- Re-energize the instrument.

- Change the fiedbus board.
HWERR xx (2) Hardware error
- Change the main board.
- Call Baykon service or dealer.

1) yy = Number/Address of the digital load cell.

2) xx = Error code.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 199 of 432
20. APPENDIX 1. DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
APPLICATION: Digital inputs are used to control the filling machine and the digital outputs are used to control
gates, valves, feeders etc. or to produce alarm. Refer to section 12 for details. The reserve inputs and
outputs can be attended instead of malfunctioned inputs or outputs until receiving the new PCB or unit.

BX30 Fill filling controller has two variants. The first variant is equipped with internal 12 digital inputs and 14
digital outputs and the second variant is connected to the DIN rail mount type Remote Input Output Unit
RIO16 -which has 16 inputs and 16 outputs- via RS422 serial interface. The configuration of these inputs
and outputs are the same and defined after selecting the filling machine type.

Variant Description Digital I/O Connection

BX30 Fill with internal digital I/O board; Digital
The ‘BX30 Fill A’ variant has the internal Inputs/Outputs
Filling Machine
digital I/O board which has 12 digital Control
BX30 Fill A
inputs and 14 digital outputs. The
digital I/O terminals are located on the
top of the rear panel.
BX30 Fill with external digital I/O unit;
RIO16
The ‘BX30 Fill N’ variant hasn’t the RS422
Filling Machine
BX30 Fill N internal digital I/O board and is 4 wire connection
Control
BX30 Fill R connected to the DIN rail mount RIO16
digital I/O unit via RS422 serial port to
control filling machine.

Input and output terminal configuration of these two variants is identical. The only difference between two
variants is the digital I/O cabling from the instrument of from the unit on the DIN rail. The functions of digital
inputs and outputs for different filling applications are described in section 7, page 43.

Selectable inputs / outputs

The selectable input and output feature of the instrument eliminates the PLC requirement in the cabinet for
frequently used functions at filling machines like level control of the material bin on the filling machine.
These inputs can be used to interrupt the filling, for error acknowledgement, to control or inhibit filling
operation, to set or reset some function etc. Refer to section 12 for details of available digital input and
output functions for your usage.

Reserve inputs / outputs

If any input or output of the instrument has any malfunction due to any external reason, you may use reserve
port until receiving the new PCB or unit without stopping your filling machine. This feature gives you
opportunity to go on production until repairing the instrument. Refer to sub-block 37- to set-up.

20.1 Hardware and connection of the digital inputs and

outputs
Digital inputs
Galvanically isolated Input signals are actuated by applying voltage between input terminal and common
terminal. The polarity of the input can be positive or negative. The equivalent circuit of inputs are drawn

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 200 of 432
below. Buttons, switches, contacts or PLC outputs can be connected to inputs as seen below. The input
current is 10 mA at 24VDC input.

Figure 20.1 – Digital input connection diagram.

Digital outputs
Galvanically isolated Digital outputs are solid state relay output which are protected against short circuit. The
polarity of the output is positive and actuated high voltage. The equivalent circuit of outputs are drawn
below. Relays, Inductors or PLC inputs can be connected to outputs as seen below. The reverse diodes shall
be connected in parallel to connected loads. The maximum output current is 100 mA.

Figure 20.2 – Digital output connection diagram.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 201 of 432
21. APPENDIX 3. ALIBI MEMORY
RELATED PARAMETERS: Main block 8--

You can fulfill your weight data recording obligations with the alibi memory in certified operation without
having paper archive. The weight data is saved into the alibi memory after every weighing operation
together with date and time. The alibi record number may also be found on the print out data.
The alibi memory recording principle is a loop memory which is deletes the oldest record after the capacity
limit 19 999 reached to overwrite the latest weighing. You can quickly access to the record of specific
weighing by entering the suitable search criteria.

21.1 Installation of Alibi SD card

Alibi memory requires the Alibi SD card at the SD1 card slot on the bottom of the main board as shown in
the pictures below. If you install the alibi memory SD card, order Alibi SD pack from Baykon or dealer.

Figure 21.1- Location of Alibi SD card slot

Inserting or removing the Alibi SD card

1. Deenergize the instrument and wait 30 seconds before interfering the instrument.
2. Remove 6 pcs M4 screws of the backplane.
3. Draw out the back plane and mainboard from the body of the enclosure. The location of the alibi
card is on the rear side of the main board which is named as SD2.
4. Insert the Alibi SD card into the slot until it locks into place. Or remove the SD card by pressing it
gently. Do not use screw driver to install or remove SD card.

5. Place the sealing sticker as indicated at the sealing section.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 202 of 432
 6. Place the main card in to the instrument and mount the backplane to the body.
7. Energize the instrument.

21.2 Activating Alibi Memory

1. Go to the parameter [ 8-- METROLOGY] main block in set up.
2. Press key 2 times to access parameter 811.
3. Press key after selecting YES in the parameter.
4. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen on the display and press key to save the
changes into the memory. [ E42 NEW ALIBI ] message appears.
5. Reenter the set-up and format the SD memory card in parameter 816.
6. Press key until [ SAVE : YES ] prompt seen on the display and press key to exit from
set up.

21.3 How is the Data Recorded into the Alibi Memory?

After the following actions the transferred data is recorded into the alibi memory:
1. Press key to print the label,
2. Automatic printing ( automatic print data transferring ),
3. Interface command ASCII < P >,
4. BSI commands which request the stable weight,
5. Print commands of fieldbus interfaces,

21.4 Recall Data from Alibi Memory

RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameter 813.

You may display the alibi record by selecting the criteria which are alibi number, date, net weight, gross
weight or tare weight. You also may transfer alibi memory records to your PC.

Access to Alibi records:

1. Go to the parameter [ 8-- METROLOGY] main block in set up.
2. Press key 4 times to access parameter 813.
3. Select the suitable criteria by pressing or keys which are NUM ( Alibi number), DATE
( weighing date ), NET ( net weight ), GROS ( gross weight ), TARE ( tare weight ) or CN
( consecutive number ).

Alibi records displaying sequence on the display:

The alibi record of the selected weighing is displayed in the sequence below.
1. Alibi record number
2. Date
3. Time
4. Gross weight
5. Net weight
6. Tare weight
7. Consecutive number

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 203 of 432
 Search with Alibi record number:
1. Press key after selecting NUM in parameter 813.
2. Press numerical keys to enter alibi number in the printout data and press key. You
may navigate in the alibi memory with or keys after entering alibi number.
3. The weighing data in the alibi memory is indicated on the display.
4. Press key to print this record and the previous nine weighing.
5. Press key 4 times to return operation.

Search with date:

1. Press key after selecting DATE in parameter 813.
2. Press numerical keys to enter date in the printout data and press key. The date
format entry should be as in the operation. e.g. date entry should be DDMMYY if
parameter 241 is set to DMY. You may navigate in the alibi memory with or
keys after entering the date.
3. The weighing data in the alibi memory is indicated on the display.
4. Press key to print this record and the previous nine weighing.
5. Press key 4 times to return operation.

Search with weight value:

1. Press key after selecting NET, gross or tare which is suitable in parameter 813.
2. Press numerical keys to enter weight value in the printout data and press key.
3. The alibi record is indicated on the display.
4. Press key to print this record and the previous nine weighing.
5. Press key 4 times to return operation.

Transfer all Alibi records:

1. Go to the parameter [ 8-- METROLOGY ] main block in set up.
2. Press key 5 times to access parameter 814.
3. Press or keys to select PRNT and press key to start transferring.
4. Or you may stop transferring by pressing key.

About Alibi Memory:

1. Go to the parameter [ 8-- METROLOGY ] main block in set up.
2. Press key 6 times to access parameter 815.
3. Press key to print alibi information.

Format Alibi Memory:

Warning : Alibi memory formatting should be done by authorized person. Otherwise erasing alibi memory
may bring you undesired legal responsibility.

Warning : Alibi memory should not be inserted to the PC.

You may need to format alibi memory after installing the used SD card, to erase previous records before
starting usage in legal or to erase alibi memory if you don’t need previous records legally. This process runs
if the calibration switch is at programming position.

1. Go to the parameter [ 8-- METROLOGY ] main block in set up.

2. Press key 7 times to access parameter 816.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 204 of 432
 3. Select YES and press key.
4. The warning prompt [ ARE YOU SURE? ] appears on the display.
5. Press key to start formatting or Press key to escape.
6. Press key 3 times to return operation.

The empty fields are indicated as [ ------- ] and transferred as [ NO RECORD ]; and the corrupted
records are indicated as [ Error ] and transferred as [ CORRUPTED ].

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 205 of 432
22. APPENDIX 4. INSTALLATION OF SD CARD
Some features of the BX30 requires SD card which its slot is located on the rear of the instrument. Some
options might be activated by SD pack which should be supplied from Baykon. Up to 16 GB standard SD
cards can be used for data logging and backup&restore the setup.

Inserting the SD card

1. Deenergize the instrument and wait 30 seconds.

2. Insert the SD card into the slot until it locks into place.

3. Energize the instrument. BX30 read the SD card at power on to initiate its function.

Removing the SD card

1. Deenergize the instrument.

2. Gently press on the SD card to release the lock, then carefully pull the card out.

3. Insert the new SD card as described above, if need be.

4. Energize the instrument 30 seconds later power off.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 206 of 432
23. APPENDIX 5. BSI PROTOCOL TO INTERFACE WITH PC
AND PLC
New generation BAYKON weighing indicators launched on the market support the standardized command
set BSI (Baykon Serial Interface) data form, depending on the functionality of the instrument. This easy data
format gives the reliable and speedy interface advantages with communicating PLC or PC for process
control or transactional applications.

BSI is divided into 3 levels which are;

BSI-BASE Command sets of basic weighing instruments, e.g. taring, zeroing, setpoint loading.
BSI-PRO Extension of the command set for professional weighing indicators, e.g. commands
related with identification data application related commands.
BSI-DIALOG Extension of the command set for transactional applications. This command set is for
transactional terminals, e.g. BX26.

The BX30 Filling controller can interface with BASE and PRO commands.

General Rules:

1. Commands are only in CAPITAL.

2. CHK (2 ASCII char) can be enabled or disabled from both command and response.
3. Weight data and limit values are 8-byte with dot and non-significant zeros on the left.
4. Headers are 16-byte length.
5. ID identification data are 16-byte length.
6. APW at piece weighing are 12-byte length.
7. Address (2 ASCII char) will be located in the structure, if not 00.

Command format:
A general description of the command is the following:
[ADR][COMMAND][CHK][CR][LF]

Response format with weight:

A general description of the response is the following;
[ADR][COMMAND][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT][CHK][CR][LF]

Response format without weight:

[ADR][COMMAND][STATUS][CHK][CR][LF]

Note: CHK, CR and LF will not be shown in below data format descriptions in this section.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 207 of 432
Status Table:
The status data in the interfacing are listed below;

A Ack, the command is operated successfully

D Dynamic, unstable weight
E Errors except of H, L, O, +, −.
H High voltage detected
I The weight is in range
L Low voltage detected
M Mean (Average)
N Nack, the command couldn’t be operated
O ADC out
S Stable weight
X Syntax error ( not recognized the received command )
+ Overload
− Underload

Checksum Calculation:
CHK is transmitted as two ASCII characters calculated with the Checksum formulation.
Checksum = 0 – (SUM of all response data before CHK)

Example: Read stable current weight data.

BSI Examples: (CHK is enabled and instrument address is 01)

Command: 01P[CHK][CR][LF]
Checksum = 0 − (0x30 + 0x31 + 0x50)
= 0 − 0XB1
= 0x4F
= Char ‘4’ and ‘F’

Response: 01PS+000123.4[CHK][CR][LF]

Checksum = 0 − (0x30 + 0x31 + 0x50 + 0x53 + 0x2B + 0x30 + 0x30 + 0x30 + 0x31+ 0x32 + 0x33 +
0x2E + 0x34)
= 0 − 0x02B7
= 0x49
= Char ‘4’ and Char ‘9’

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 208 of 432
23.1 BSI-Base Commands
BSI-BASE Command Table:

Description Command Response

Read all weight data [ADR][A] [ADR][A][STATUS][SIGN][NET W] [SIGN][TARE
immediately W] [SIGN] [GROSS W]
Read Gross weight value [ADR][B] [ADR][B][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
immediately
Clear the tare memory [ADR][C] [ADR][C][A]
Print the label ADR][DJ] [ADR][DJ][A]
Read the last printed data ADR][DO] [ADR][DO][A][ single line data format]
Read voltage value of DC [ADR][G] [ADR][G][STATUS][VOLTAGE VALUE]
power supply
Read current weight [ADR][I] [ADR][I][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
(indicated) value immediately
Read the stable weight [ADR][P] [ADR][P][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
Read Status [ADR][S] [ADR][S][STATUS-1][STATUS-2] [STATUS-3]
Tare [ADR][T] [ADR][T][STATUS]
Read digital inputs [ADR][U] [ADR][U][STATUS][Inputs]
Read digital outputs [ADR][V] [ADR][V][STATUS][Outputs]
Set/Reset digital outputs [ADR][W][Outputs] [ADR][W][STATUS]
Read weight value in [ADR][X] [ADR][X][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
increased resolution
Zero [ADR][Z] [ADR][Z][STATUS]

BSI-Base Commands and Responses:

A Read all weight data immediately

B Read Gross weight value immediately
C Clear the tare
DJ Print the label
DO Read the last printed data
G Read voltage value of DC power supply
I Read current weight (indicated) value immediately
P Read the current stable weight value
S Read Status
T Tare
U Read digital inputs
V Read digital outputs
W Set/Reset digital outputs
X Read current weight value in increased resolution immediately
Z Zero

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 209 of 432
 A Read all weight data
Command : [ADR][A]
Response : [ADR][A][STATUS][SIGN][NET W][SIGN][TARE W][SIGN][GROSS W]
Example :
Command : 01A
Response : 01AS+000123.4+000111.1+000234.5
01AD+000123.4+000111.1+000234.5
01AO ( ADC out error )
Comments :
The response is net, tare and gross weight values or error status.
All weight data is transmitted immediately after receiving the command.

B Read Gross weight

Command : [ADR][B]
Response : [ADR][B][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
Example :
Command : 01B
Response : 01BS+000123.4 (gross weight is stable and 123.4)
01BD+000123.4 (gross weight is dynamic and 123.4)
01B− (under load)
Comments :
The response is the gross weight value (stable or dynamic) or error status.
Gross weight data is transmitted immediately after receiving command.

C Clear the tare memory

Command : [ADR][C]
Response : [ADR][C][A] (Cleared and the scale is in gross mode)

Comments :
The response status is always Ack in weighing or force mode.

DJ Print the label

Command : [ADR][DJ]
Response : [ADR][DJ][STATUS]
Example :
Command : 01DJ
Response : 01DJA (Printing is done successfully )
01DJN (Could not print)

Comments :
Checks status and it must be stable. Else Nack status is send.

DO Read the last print data

Command : [ADR][DO]
Response : [ADR][DO][single line data format]
Example :
Command : 01DO
Response : 01DOA[single line data format] (Printing is done successfully )
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 210 of 432
Comments :
Refer to section 15.3.1 for single line data format details.

G Read voltage value of DC power supply

Command : [ADR][G]
Response : [ADR][G][STATUS][VOLTAGE VALUE]
Example :
Command : 01G
Response : 01GA234 (Power supply is 23.4 VDC)
01GA150 (Power supply is 15.0 VDC)
Comments :
Voltage value is 3 byte and sends with 0.1 V increment.

I Read indicated weight

Command : [ADR][I]
Response : [ADR][I][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
Example :
Command : 01I
Response : 01IS+000123.4 (Weight is stable and 123.4)
01ID+000123.4 (Weight is dynamic and 123.4)
01I+ (Overload)
Comments :
Indicated weight value (stable or dynamic) is transmitted immediately.
The weight value may be in gross or net.

P Read the stable weight

Command : [ADR][P]
Response : [ADR][P][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
Example :
Command : 01P
Response : 01PS+000123.4 (Weight is stable and 123.4) or
01PN (Could not print)
Comments :
Checks status and it must be stable. Else Nack status is send.
Status can be Stable or Nack.

S Read Status

Command : [ADR][S]
Response : [ADR][S][STATUS-1][STATUS-2][STATUS-3]
Example :
Command : 01S
Response : 01SSGI (Stable, Gross, In Range)
01SDGL (Dynamic, Gross, Low voltage error)
Comments :
The response includes 3 status information.
STATUS-1 can be Stable or Dynamic.
STATUS-2 can be Gross or Net.
STATUS-3 can be ‘In range’, ‘Out of range’, ‘+ Over’, ‘- Under’, ‘Low voltage’, ‘High voltage’ or ‘Errors’.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 211 of 432
 T Tare

Command : [ADR][T]
Response : [ADR][T][A] (Taring is done successfully and scale is in net)
[ADR][T][N] (Taring could not executed)
[ADR][T][X] (Taring is disabled)

Comments :
The tare value is overwritten by the new tare weight value.
Status must be stable in 2 seconds time out delay. If so, Ack is send.
If it cannot be stable in time out delay, Nack is send.

U Read digital inputs

Command : [ADR][U]
Response : [ADR][U][STATUS][Inputs]
Example :
Command : 01U
Response : 01UA00000003 (Input 2 and Input 1 are active)
01UA00004296 (Bypass, Reject, Inhibit, Input 5,3 and 2 are active)
01UA000000FF (All 8 inputs are active)
01UN (Could not read inputs)
Comments :
Data length change according to number of digital inputs.
Inputs are implemented to ASCII char of 4-bit. ‘1111’ inputs are implemented to char ‘F’.
INTERRUPT
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used

TIMER-3
TIMER-2
TIMER-1

BYPASS

INPUTS
REJECT
FBUS-2
FBUS-1

INHIBIT
EMPTY
DROP
HOLD
IN-B
IN-A

RUN
IN-6
IN-5
IN-4
IN-3
IN-2
IN-1
TILT

ACK
S2

Bit wise 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
ASCII 0 0 0 0 4 2 9 6

V Read digital outputs

Command : [ADR][V]
Response : [ADR][V][STATUS][Outputs]
Example :
Command : 01V
Response : 01VA00000003 (Output 2 and Output 1 are active)
01VA00004296 (Feed, Output 10,8,5,3 and 2 are active)
01VA000000FF (All 8 outputs are active)
01VN (Could not read outputs)

Comments :
Data length change according to number of digital outputs.
Outputs are implemented to ASCII char of 4-bit. ‘1111’ is implemented to char ‘F’.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 212 of 432
 VIBRATION
Not used
Not used
Not used

Not used
TIMER-3
TIMER-2
TIMER-1
OUTPUTS

OUT-10
FBUS-2
FBUS-1

ALARM

EMPTY
FGATE

OUT-9
OUT-8
OUT-7
OUT-6
OUT-5
OUT-4
OUT-3
OUT-2
OUT-1
UNDE

PROG
EFILL
ETOL

FEED
ZR-G
LOGI

END
ZR-I
Bit wise 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
ASCII 0 0 0 0 4 2 9 6

W Write ( Set/Reset ) digital outputs

Command : [ADR][W][Outputs]
Response : [ADR][W][STATUS]
Example :
Command : 01W18000000
Response : 01WA (FBU1 and FBU2 are activated)
01WN (Outputs could not be activated)
Comments :
Data length change according to number of digital outputs.
Outputs are implemented to ASCII char of 4-bit. ‘1111’ outputs are implemented to char F’.
The parameter of output(s) must be programmed as ‘FBU1 or FBU2’ for this feature in process ( Page 164).
VIBRATION
Not used
Not used
Not used

Not used
TIMER-3
TIMER-2
TIMER-1

OUTPUTS

OUT-10
FBUS-2
FBUS-1

ALARM

EMPTY
FGATE

OUT-9
OUT-8
OUT-7
OUT-6
OUT-5
OUT-4
OUT-3
OUT-2
OUT-1
UNDE

PROG
EFILL
ETOL

FEED
ZR-G
LOGI

END
ZR-I

Bit wise 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ASCII 1 8 0 0 0 0 0 0

X Read weight value in increased resolution

Command : [ADR][X]
Response : [ADR][X][STATUS][SIGN][WEIGHT VALUE]
Example :
Command : 01X
Response : 01XS+00123.41 (weight is stable and 123.41) or
01XD+00123.41 (weight is dynamic and 123.41) or
01XE (Error)
Comments :
The response includes weight data with divided the increment to 10.

Z Zero

Command : [ADR][Z]
Response : [ADR][Z][A] (Zeroed)
[ADR][Z][N] (Zeroing could not be operated)
[ADR][Z][X] (Zeroing is disabled)
Comments :
Zero command cannot work in net weighing.
Weight must be in zeroing range for all operating modes.
Status must be stable in 2 seconds time out delay. If so, Ack is send.
If it cannot be stable in time out delay, Nack is send.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 213 of 432
23.2 BSI-PRO Commands
BSI-PRO Commands and Responses:

Description Command Response

ID name and data write DA 1 [16d name ] [16 digit data] DAA
Receipt name and data DA 2 [16d name ] [16 digit data] DAA
write
ID name write DH 1 [16 digits name] DHA
ID data write DI 1 [16 digits data] DIA
Receipt name write DH 2 [16 digits name] DHA
Receipt data write DI 2 [16 digits data] DIA
ID name and data read DK 1 DKA [16d name ] [16 digits data]
Receipt name and data read DK 2 DKA [16d name ] [16 digits data]
Key lock / unlock DL 1(0) DLA

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 214 of 432
24. APPENDIX 6. CONTINUOUS DATA FORMATS
RELATED PARAMETERS: Parameters 111, 121, 141 and 151.

Continuous data output can be programmed to the some common formats besides Baykon continuous
formats. To select one of the described format below press the key sequentially. Press key to go
to the next parameter.

Baykon®
Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
number

Description STX STA STB STC Indicated weight Tare weight CR LF CHK

☻ } ♠
Example-1

ASCII 1 0 0 7 5 0 2 5 0

Hex 02 7D 31 30 20 20 30 37 35 30 20 20 20 32 35 30 0D 0A 06

Function Description
STX Start of transmission character.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bits 4 and 3 Bits 2,1 and 0
Decimal
4 3 Increment 2 1 0
point
0 1 x1 0 0 0 XXXX00
1 0 x2 0 0 1 XXXXX0
STA
Always 0

Always 1

Always 1

1 1 x5 0 1 0 XXXXXX
( STATUS A )
0 1 1 XXXXX.X
1 0 0 XXXX.XX
1 0 1 XXX.XXX
1 1 0 XX.XXXX
1 1 1 X.XXXXX
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
1 = Zeroed with
power on zerp

1 = Unstable

1 = Error (1)

0 = Weight
negative

1= Net

STB
Always 0

Always 1

Always 1

( STATUS B )
0 = Not power

0 = No Error

0 = Weight
0 = Stable

0 = Gross
on zeroed

positive

STC
Always 0 as ASCII ( 30 hex ).
( STATUS C )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 215 of 432
 These seven characters are a string containing the current weight not
Indicated Weight
including the decimal point.
These seven characters are a string containing the tare weight not
Tare Weight
including the decimal point.
CR Carrige Return.
LF Line Feed.
Checksum byte. Checksum calculation is;
CHK
CHK (Checksum) = 0 – ( STX + STATUS A + ..... + LF )

(1) Error Messages: UNDER, OVER, A.OUT, L-VOLT and TILT are represented in Indicated data fields as
left aligned.

HBM®

Description STX Sign Indicated weight S1 S2 S3 S4 Unit ETX

Example ☻ 0 . 7 5 0 N 1 k g ♥

Toledo®

Description STX A B C Indicated weight Tare weight CR LF CHK

Example ☻ } 1 0 0 7 5 0 2 5 0 ♠

SysTec®

Description Status Indicated weight SP Unit CR LF

Example S 0 . 7 5 0 k g

SMA

Description LF S R N M F Indicated weight Unit CR

Example 1 N 0 . 7 5 0 k g

Function Description
LF Line Feed ( 0A hex )
Z = Centre of zero, O = Over cap, U = Under cap, E = Weight not currently
S being displayed.
“ “(space) = None of the above conditions.
Range.
R
1 = First range, 2 = Second range, 3 = Third range.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 216 of 432
 Mode.
G = Gross weight,
T = Tare weight,
N
N = Net weight,
g = Gross weight in increased resolution.
n = Net weight in increased resolution.
Motion.
M M = Motion,
“ “(space) = No motion.
F Always a space as ASCII ( 20 hex ).
These ten characters are a string containing the current weight including
Indicated Weight
the decimal point.
Unit Unit of weight value are kg, g, lb, klb, N or kN as left aligned.
CR Carrige Return ( 0D hex )

Sartorious®

Description Ignore Sign SP Indicated weight SP Unit CR LF

Example + 0 . 7 5 0 k g

Rinstrum®

Description STX Sign Indicated weight ST ETX

Example ☻ 0 . 7 5 0 N ♥

Avery® E1205

Description STX Indicated weight SP Unit SP ST CR LF ETX

Example ☻ 0 . 7 5 0 k g N ♥

Baster®

Description Indicated Weight LF

Example 0 . 7 5 0

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 217 of 432
LM2
Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
number

Description Indicated Weight Unit SP NET LF CR

Example-1 0 . 7 5 0 K g N E T LF CR
Example-2 1 . 0 0 0 K g LF CR

Function Description
These eight characters are a string containing the current weight not
Indicated Weight
including the decimal point.
Unit Unit of weight value are Kg, G, Lb, N or KN as left aligned.
Only sent a space character in Net operation. Otherwise there is no any
SP
character.
These three characters are only sent in Net operation. Otherwise there is
NET
no any character.
LF Line Feed ( 0A hex )
CR Carrige Return ( 0D hex )

Tunaylar® Load Line-2

Description STX A B C Indicated Weight Tare Weight ETX CHK CR

SP

SP

Example ☻ ! 1 0 0 0 2 4 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ♥

Registered trademarks
Terms and product names mentioned in this publication are trademarks, registered trademarks or service
marks of their respective owners. Use of a term should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any
trademark, registered trademark or service mark.
HBM® is a registered trademark of Hottinger Baldwin Messtechnik.
TOLEDO® is a registered trademark of Mettler-Toledo.
SysTec® is a registered trademark of Systemtechnik und Industrieautomation.
Sartorious® is a registered trademark of Sartorious.
Rinstrum® is a registered trademark of Rinstrum.
Avery® is a registered trademark of Avery Weigh-Tronix.
Baster® is a registered trademark of Baster.
Tuanylar® is a registered trademark of Tunaylar.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 218 of 432
25. APPENDIX 7. MODBUS RTU
BX30 controller has a Modbus RTU interface over RS485 or RS232C serial port. This interface can be
programmable to High-Low or Low-High for different type of PLC’s. You can find below the difference of
these data formats and some companies using these formats. Two types are available as;

25.1 Modbus RTU Data Structure

IMPORTANT NOTE: Scale configuration, calibration and receipt parameters (address 40127 and above) must
be loaded at Ready status.

After programming RS485 or RS232C serial port for Modbus RTU, it can be used as a Modbus RTU slave on
Modbus RTU network. The Modbus slave address is defined in the RS-485 address ( Page 147 ). Functions
code ‘0x03’ (Read Holding Registers), ‘0x06’ (Single Write Register), ‘0x17’ (Read/Write Multiple Registers)
and ‘0x10’ (Preset Multiple Registers) are supported.

Modbus RTU High-Low: In two word registers, the data is stored to the registers in big-endian format.
Least significant word is stored to the highest register address; and most significant word is stored to the
lowest register address.

Modbus RTU Low-High: In two word registers, the data is stored to the registers in little-endian format.
Least significant word is stored to the lowest register address; and most significant word is stored to the
highest register address.

Parameter’s set-up:
Set the RS 485 / RS 232C Data Format : Modbus RTU High-Low or Modbus RTU Low-High
RS-485 Data Length & Parity : 8 none 1, 8 odd 1 or 8 even 1
RS-485 Address : 01 to 31
Make the RS485 / RS232C parameter settings as defined on Page 147,146.

Please find Modbus information in the web site of http://www.modbus.org

Modbus RTU Command Table;

Address R/W Word Command Definition

40001 R 2 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
40003 R/W 2 Tare weight
40005 R 2 Gross weight
Bit Definition
B0 Not used
B1 Not used
B2 0 – Weight is Stable 1 – Weight is unstable
B3 0 – Gross mode 1 – Net mode
40007 R 2 Status B4 0 – Preset tare is passive 1 – Preset tare is active
B5 0 – Not power on zeroed 1 – Zeroed with pwr on zero
B6 0 – First Unit (power on) 1 – Second Unit
B7-B10 Not used
B11 0 – Key lock is passive 1 – Key lock is active
B12 0 – Out of center of zero 1 – Weight is in center of zero

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 219 of 432
 B13 0 – High res. is passive 1 – High res. is active
B14-15 Not used
B16 0 – Fill mode 1 – Basic weighing mode
1 – Process error.
B17 0 – No filling error
Refer to 40045 for details.
B18 0 – Interrupt is passive 1 – Interrupt is active
B19 0 – Inhibit is passive 1 – Inhibit is active
B20 0 – By-Pass is passive 1 – By-Pass is active
B21 0 – Hold is passive 1 – Hold is active
B22-26 Not used
B27 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.XXXX
B28 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.XXX
B29 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.XX
B30 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.X
B31 0 – None 1 – No decimal point
Bit Definition
B0 0 – No Error 1 – Low voltage det.
B1 0 – No Error 1 – In programming mode
B2 0 – No Error 1 – System error
Error B3 0 – No Error 1 – ADC under range
40009 R 2
Status B4 0 – No Error 1 – ADC over range
B5 0 – No Error 1 – ADC out of range
B6 0 – No Error 1 – Tilt Switch is active
B7 0 – No Error 1 – Master/Slave comm. error
B8-B31 Not used
Heartbeat for connection checking, this value is increased
40011 R 2 Heartbeat
every 100 milliseconds.

40013 R 2 Last filled weight

This value is increased automatically after filling, if The
40015 R/W 2 CN (Label number)
preact adjustment is done.
Quantity of Refer to section 11 and par. 41A to enable this feature.
40017 R 2
Batch/Bulk Refer to 40537 and 40539 to enter Batch/Bulk Quantity and
40019 R 2 Total of Batch/Bulk total weight.
40021 R/W 4 Not used
Dec Definition
0 None
1 Zero at basic weighing mode Page 37
2 Tare at basic weighing mode Page 37
3 Clear at basic weighing mode Page 37
4 Print at basic weighing mode Page 37
Commands ( * ) 5 Reprint the last label Page 134
40025 R/W 2
6 High resolution enable
Page 41
7 High resolution disable
8 Unit change (from first to second unit)
Page 38
9 Unit change (from second to first unit)
10 Keylock enable
Page 40
11 Keylock disable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 220 of 432
 12 Switch to Filling mode
(continuation of Page 38
13 Switch to Basic weighing mode
previous page)
14 Start of filling Page 41
15 Start of emptying / discharge Page 41
16 Reset Page 41
17 RUN enable
Page 120
18 RUN disable
19 By-Pass enable
Page 120
20 By-Pass disable
21 Hold enable
Page 120
22 Hold disable
23 Interrupt enable
Page 120
24 Interrupt disable
25 Filling inhibit enable
Page 120
26 Filling inhibit disable
27 Error acknowledgment / Resume Page 120
28 Reject / Do not record Page 120
29 Empty / Discharge the scale Page 120
30 Standby enable/disable
31-39 Not used
Save receipt parameters to controller.
40 ( first, Load receipt parameters between 40521 to
40827 )
0 None
1 Command is processing…
40027 R 2 Commands status
2 Command is successfully.
3 Command failed.
40029 R/W 9 Reserve
40038 R/W 1 Year as BCD format
Date and time setting.
40039 R/W 1 Month & day as BCD format
Refer to sub-block 24-.
40040 R/W 1 Hour & minute as BCD format
Bit Definition
B0 Input-1
B1 Input-2
B2 Input-3
B3 Input-4
B4 Input-5
B5 Input-6
B6 Not used
0 – Passive
40041 R 2 Status of Inputs B7 RUN
1 – Active
B8 INHI
B9 ACK
Refer to related filling mode
B10 REJE and select inputs for details.
B11 INTE Page 44 and 164.
B12 HOLD
B13 DROP
B14 EMPT
B15 BYPA

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 221 of 432
 B16 S2
(continuation of B17 TMR1
previous page) B18 TMR2
B19 TMR3
B20 IN-A
B21 IN-B
B22 FBU1
B23 FBU2
B24 TILT
B0 Output-1
B1 Output-2
B2 Output-3
B3 Output-4
B4 Output-5
B5 Output-6
B6 Output-7
B7 Output-8
B8 Output-9
B9 Output-10
B10 Not used
B11 PROG
B12 EMPT
0 – Passive
B13 END
1 – Active
40043 R/W 2 Status of Outputs B14 FEED
B15 FGAT
B16 VIBR Refer to related filling mode
B17 ALAR and select outputs for
B18 ZR I details. Page 44 and 162.
B19 ZR G
B20 EFIL
B21 ETOL
B22 UNDE
B23 TMR1
B24 TMR2
B25 TMR3
B26 LOGI
B27 FBU1
B28 FBU2
Dec Description
0 No process error
1 Batch Finished
2 By-Pass
3 Not used
Process
4 Reset
Warning Messages
5 Interrupted
40045 R 2 Refer to section 19.1 6 Hold Status
7 Check Fill Stop
8 Check Discharge Stop
9 Alarm
10 Inhibited
128 Feeding Gate position error.
Process 129 Tare Range Error
Error Messages 130 Taring could not execute.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 222 of 432
 131 Zeroing Fail
Process 132 Zeroing Range
Error Messages 133 Filling Time
134 Valve Position
Refer to section 19.2 135 Wrong Position
136 Not used
137 Maxfill Limit
138 +Tolerance Error
139 Stable Error
(continuation of 140 Clmp Is Open
previous page) 141 Loadcell Error
142 -Tolerance Error
143 Discharge Gate
144 Tilted
145 Not used
146 Multicycle filling?
Dec Description
0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
1 Weight Mode
2 Ready
3 Taring
4 Zeroing
5 Coarse Feed
6 Middle Feed
7 Fine Feeding
8 Valve to Down
Process states
40047 R 2 9 Valve to Up
Messages
10 Settling
Refer to sectiSon 19.1 11 Filling
12 End of Fill
13 Discharging
14 Discharging Delay
15-19 Not used
20 Run Inactive
21 Inhibited
22 Lance Position
23 In Standby mode
Quantity of
40049 R/W 2
Erasable Accumulation
Refer to section 16.1.1
Total of
40051 R/W 2
Erasable Accumulation
Quantity of the
40053 R 2
Current day’s Accu.
Refer to section 16.1.3
Total of the
40055 R 2
Current day’s Accu.
Quantity of
40057 R 2
Yesterday’s Accu.
Refer to section 16.1.4
Total of
40059 R 2
Yesterday’s Accu.
40061 R/W 2 Quantity of Grand Total
Refer to section 16.1.5
40063 R/W 4 Grand Total

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 223 of 432
 Scale Configuration and Calibration Parameters
Dec Description
0 No
40127 R/W 2 Dynamic filter 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
40129 R/W 2 Digital filter
4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
40131 R/W 2 Power on zero
3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
40133 R/W 2 Zeroing Range 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%
0 Disable
1 ± 0,3d
2 ± 0,5d
40135 R/W 2 Auto Zero Tracking
3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
40137 R/W 2 Tare
1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Stability 3 ± 2d
40139 R/W 2
Detection Range 4 ± 3d
5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
40141 R/W 2 Stability Time Refer to parameter [518] on page 179
40143 R/W 10 Reserve
Dec Description
0 g ( Gram )
1 kg ( Kilogram )
40153 R/W 2 Unit 2 t ( Ton )
3 lb ( Libre )
4 No unit ( without unit )
5 kLb ( Kilolibre )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 224 of 432
 Dec Description
0 Single range
1 2 x MR
40155 R/W 2 Range
2 3 x MR
3 2 x MI
4 3 x MI
40157 R/W 2 MAX-1 Refer to parameter [523] on page 180
Dec Description
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
40159 R/W 2 Decimal point-1 2 XXXXXX
3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
Dec Description
0 X1
40161 R/W 2 Increment-1
1 X2
2 X5
40163 R/W 2 MAX-2
40165 R/W 2 Decimal point-2
40167 R/W 2 Increment-2
40169 R/W 2 MAX-3
40171 R/W 2 Decimal point-3
40173 R/W 2 Increment-3
Dec Description
0 Over indication after Max.
1 1 division more than Max.
40175 R/W 2 Limit of Indication 2 5 division more than Max.
3 9 division more than Max.
4 2% more than Max.
5 5% more than Max.
0 Subtractive tare
40177 R/W 2 Tare type 1 Additive tare
2 Both
40179 R/W 2 Maximum tare Refer to par. [527] page 180
40181 R/W 4 Reserve
Decimal Definition
0 None
Calibration
Commands (*) 188 Adjust Zero Calibration command
40185 R/W 2 Adjust Span Calibration command
(continuation 220
( first, load test weight value to 40187 )
of previous
page) Apply the coefficients of eCal
23205
( first, load 40189, 40191 and 40193 )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 225 of 432
 40187 R/W 2 Span Calibration Value
40189 R/W 2 Total Load Cell capacity for eCal
eCal
40191 R/W 2 Average mV/V value for eCal
Coefficients
40193 R/W 2 Dead load value for eCal
Bit Definition
B0 Ready for calibration
B1 Zero calibration in process …
B2 Span calibration in process …
Calibration Timeout
B3
- Restart calibration
ADC Error
B4 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument

Calibration Instrument cannot be calibrating

40195 R 2 B6
Process Status - Load cell signal is very low or too high
& Errors
Calibration Error
- Calibration loading is not enough
B7
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
Calibration load value entry Error
B8 - Test weight is too small. Increase the
weight
Scale unstable
B9 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring

The Calibration switch is not ‘On’ position.

B10
- Check the calibration DIP switch.

40197 R/W 10 Reserve

Voltage of The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment for

40207 R 2
power supply DC variant.

Millivolt value of active scale is indicated with 0.01

Load cell millivolt value
40209 R 2 mV increment. For example: 2.34 mV is indicated
(only BX30 Fill)
as integer 234 value.
Load parameter’s
40211 R/W 2 Write 0x6BB6 value to load parameter’s defaults.
defaults

40213 R/W 2 Load factory defaults Write 0x7CC7 value to load factory defaults.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 226 of 432
 Machine Related Parameters Main Group
Refer to parameter [311] on page 158
0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
40255 R/W 2 Filling modes 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to parameter [312] on page 159
0 PULS
40257 R/W 2 Start input signal type
1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to parameter [313] on page 159
40259 R/W 2 Discharge input signal type 0 PULS
1 LEVE
Start filling or Refer to parameter [314] on page 159
40261 R/W 2 emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on 1 DISC
Refer to parameter [315] on page 159
40263 R/W 2 Feeding speed quantity 0 1
1 2
2 3
Refer to parameter [316] on page 159
0 C
40265 R/W 2 Feeding outputs
1 FC
2 FMC
40267 R/W 2 Maximum target of filling Refer to parameter [317] on page 159
40269 R/W 2 Minimum target of filling Refer to parameter [318] on page 159
Scale quantity at master
40271 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [319] on page 159
slave operation
40273 R/W 12 Not used
Refer to parameter [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
40285 R/W 2
control type 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Refer to parameter [322] on page 160
Switch type on the feeding
40287 R/W 2 gate for checking its 0 NO
position. 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to parameter [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
40289 R/W 2
gate 1 NCLO
2 NOPE

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 227 of 432
 Refer to parameter [324] on page 160
0 BIU
40291 R/W 2 Lance position control type 1 BMIU
2 BIOU
3 BMIO
Refer to parameter [325] on page 160
Movement of valve or lifter 0 NO
40293 R/W 2
at liquid filling modes 1 VALV
2 LIFT
Refer to parameter [326] on page 160
0 NO
Movement of valve or lifter
40295 R/W 2 1 CLAM
at liquid big bag mode
2 UP-A
3 UP-B
40297 R/W 18 Not used
Refer to parameter [331] on page 161
0 NO
1 RUN
2 INHI
3 ACK
4 REJE
5 INTE
6 HOLD
7 DROP
8 EMPT
40315 R/W 2 Select input 1 9 S2
10 BYPA
11 TMR1
12 TMR2
13 TMR3
14 IN-A
15 IN-B
16 FBU1
17 FBU2
18 TILT
19 RSRV (only for Select input 1 &2 )
40317 R/W 2 Select input 2 Refer to parameter [332] on page 161
40319 R/W 2 Select input 3 Refer to parameter [333] on page 161
40321 R/W 2 Select input 4 Refer to parameter [334] on page 162
40323 R/W 2 Select input 5 Refer to parameter [335] on page 162
40325 R/W 2 Select input 6 Refer to parameter [336] on page 162
40327 R/W 2 Select input 7 Refer to parameter [337] on page 162
40329 R/W 2 Select input 8 Refer to parameter [338] on page 162
40331 R/W 2 Select input 9 Refer to parameter [339] on page 162
Refer to parameter [33A] on page 162
0 NO
1 PROG
2 EMPT
40333 R/W 2 Select output 1 3 END
4 FEED
5 FGAT
6 VIBR

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 228 of 432
 7 ALAR
(continuation of previous 8 ZR I
page) 9 ZR G
10 EFIL
11 ETOL
12 UNDE
13 TMR1
14 TMR2
15 TMR3
16 LOGI
17 FBU1
18 FBU2
19 RSVR (only for Select output 1 &2 )
40335 R/W 2 Select output 2 Refer to parameter [33B] on page 163
40337 R/W 2 Select output 3 Refer to parameter [33C] on page 163
40339 R/W 2 Select output 4 Refer to parameter [33D] on page 163
40341 R/W 2 Select output 5 Refer to parameter [33E] on page 164
40343 R/W 2 Select output 6 Refer to parameter [33F] on page 164
Refer to parameter [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
40345 R/W 2 0 VAL
feeding entries
1 DEV
Refer to parameter [342] on page 164
40347 R/W 2 Weight displaying at Filling 0 INCR
1 DECR
Refer to parameter [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
40349 R/W 2 Display after filling
1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to parameter [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
3 RCPT
40351 R/W 2 Information display
4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
40353 R/W 22 Not used
40375 R/W 2 The function of magnify key Refer to parameter [351] on page 164
40377 R/W 2 The function of change key Refer to parameter [352] on page 165
40379 R/W 2 The function of F1 key Refer to parameter [353] on page 165
40381 R/W 2 The function of F2 key Refer to parameter [354] on page 165
40383 R/W 2 The function of F3 key Refer to parameter [355] on page 166
40385 R/W 2 The function of F4 key Refer to parameter [356] on page 166
40387 R/W 2 The function of F5 key Refer to parameter [357] on page 166
40389 R/W 16 Not used
40405 R/W 2 Reserve Input 1 Refer to parameter [371] on page 167
40407 R/W 2 Reserve Input 2 Refer to parameter [372] on page 167
40409 R/W 2 Reserve output 1 Refer to parameter [373] on page 167
40411 R/W 2 Reserve output 2 Refer to parameter [374] on page 167

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 229 of 432
 Receipt Related Parameters Main Group
40521 R/W 2 Target
40523 R/W 2 + Tolerance
40525 R/W 2 - Tolerance
Overfill weight.
40527 R/W 2
( The same as 40565)
40529 R/W 2 Coarse Refer to section 3 for meaning of parameters.
40531 R/W 2 Medium
40533 R/W 2 Fine
40535 R/W 2 PT (Specific Tare)
40537 R/W 2 Quantity of Batch/Bulk
40539 R/W 2 Total of Batch/Bulk
40541 R/W 8 Not used
Refer to parameter [411] on page 168
Gross, net or multicycle 0 NET
40549 R/W 2
filling 1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to parameter [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
40551 R/W 2 Tolerance control
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to parameter [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
1 AV 5
40553 R/W 2 Taring at filling. 2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
40555 R/W 2 Minimum tare value. Refer to parameter [414] on page 168
40557 R/W 2 Maximum tare value. Refer to parameter [415] on page 169
40559 R/W 2 Valve force Refer to parameter [416] on page 169
40561 R/W 2 Lance Bottom / Lift Weight Refer to parameter [417] on page 169
40563 R/W 2 Lance Middle Refer to parameter [418] on page 169
40565 R/W 2 Overfill weight. Refer to parameter [419] on page 169
Refer to parameter [41A] on page 169
0 NO
1 QTY
40567 R/W 2 Batch filling.
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to parameter [41B] on page 169
0 NO
40569 R/W 2 Soft start method
1 FINE
2 MED
40571 R/W 2 Soft start time Refer to parameter [41C] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 230 of 432
 The emptying / discharge
40573 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [41D] on page 169
type
Empty/Discharge weight /
40575 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [41E] on page 170
Remaining weight
40577 R/W 2 Emptying / discharge time Refer to parameter [41F] on page 170

40579 R/W 30 Not used

Refer to parameter [431] on page 170
0 NO
Correction technic at
40609 R/W 2 1 AUTO
Feeding / Discharging.
2 TIME
3 SMRT
40611 R/W 2 Fine feeding time Refer to parameter [432] on page 170
40613 R/W 2 Preact adj. frequency. Refer to parameter [433] on page 170
40615 R/W 2 Sampling size. Refer to parameter [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
40617 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [435] on page 170
percent.
40619 R/W 2 Zeroing frequency. Refer to parameter [436] on page 171
Refer to parameter [437] on page 171
40621 R/W 2 Jogging 0 NO
1 TIME
2 AUTO
40623 R/W 2 Jogging on time Refer to parameter [438] on page 171
40625 R/W 2 Jogging off time Refer to parameter [439] on page 171
40627 R/W 2 Minimum filling error Refer to parameter [43A] on page 171
40629 R/W 2 Maximum error limit Refer to parameter [43B] on page 171
Refer to parameter [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
40631 R/W 2
process 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d
40633 R/W 6 Not used
40639 R/W 2 Zeroing delay. Refer to parameter [441] on page 172
40641 R/W 2 Taring delay. Refer to parameter [442] on page 172
40643 R/W 2 Stability check delay. Refer to parameter [443] on page 172
40645 R/W 2 Maximum stability time. Refer to parameter [444] on page 172
40647 R/W 2 Start delay Refer to parameter [445] on page 172
40649 R/W 2 End of batch output delay Refer to parameter [446] on page 172
Coarse and medium feed
40651 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [447] on page 172
control delay

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 231 of 432
 40653 R/W 2 Fine feed control delay Refer to parameter [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
40655 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL
40657 R/W 2 Complete delay Refer to parameter [44A] on page 173
40659 R/W 2 Catch delay Refer to parameter [44B] on page 173
40661 R/W 2 The clamp release delay Refer to parameter [44C] on page 173
40663 R/W 2 Maximum filling time Refer to parameter [44D] on page 173
40665 R/W 4 Not used
Refer to parameter [451] on page 173
0 NO
40669 R/W 2 Analogue output type
1 0-20
2 0-10
Analogue output value
40671 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [452] on page 173
for Coarse feed
Analogue output value
40673 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [453] on page 173
for Medium feed
Analogue output value
40675 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [454] on page 173
for Fine feed
40677 R/W 22 Not used
Refer to parameter [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type of 0 SUBT
40699 R/W 2
the machine. 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
40701 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [462] on page 174
palette.
Refer to parameter [463] on page 174
40703 R/W 2 Operation at Batch filling. 0 STOP
1 FILL
40705 R/W 24 Not used
40729 R/W 2 Alarm Setpoint Refer to parameter [471] on page 174
40731 R/W 2 Alarm time Refer to parameter [472] on page 174
40733 R/W 2 Minimum Vibration weight Refer to parameter [473] on page 174
40735 R/W 2 Maximum Vibration weight Refer to parameter [474] on page 174
40737 R/W 2 Vibration delay Refer to parameter [475] on page 174
40739 R/W 2 Vibration time Refer to parameter [476] on page 174
40741 R/W 2 Zero range Refer to parameter [477] on page 174
40743 R/W 16 Not used
Refer to parameter [481] on page 175
0 SELE
40759 R/W 2 Timer 1 Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40761 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [482] on page 175
Refer to parameter [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
40763 R/W 2 Timer 1 Type 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 232 of 432
 40765 R/W 2 Timer 1 On time Refer to parameter [484] on page 175
40767 R/W 2 Timer 1 Off time Refer to parameter [485] on page 175
Refer to parameter [486] on page 175
0 SELE
40769 R/W 2 Timer 2 Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40771 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [487] on page 175
Refer to parameter [488] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
40773 R/W 2 Timer 2 Type 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
40775 R/W 2 Timer 2 On time Refer to parameter [489] on page 175
40777 R/W 2 Timer 2 Off time Refer to parameter [48A] on page 176
Refer to parameter [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
40779 R/W 2 Timer 3 Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40781 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [48C] on page 176
Refer to parameter [48D] on page 176
0 Type A
1 Type B
40783 R/W 2 Timer 3 Type 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
40785 R/W 2 Timer 3 On time Refer to parameter [48E] on page 176
40787 R/W 2 Timer 3 Off time Refer to parameter [48F] on page 176
40789 R/W 30 Not used
Refer to parameter [4A1] on page 176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
40819 R/W 2 Logical functions 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to parameter [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
40821 R/W 2 A Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40823 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [4A3] on page 177
Refer to parameter [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
40825 R/W 2 B Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40827 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [4A5] on page 177
* : Add 100 to command value for NOE interfacing. For example: Send 101 from NOE to BX30 instead of 1
for Zeroing.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 233 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Read 40009 and 40010.
2. Check error status,
3. If there isn’t any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare),
4. If there is an error, check the error code.

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the bit B0 of 40195 which should be '1' to start adjustment.
2. Load the decimal '188' to 40185 to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the bit B1 of 40195 which is '1' during zero calibration process.
4. The bit B0 of 40195 changes to '1' at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If one of error bits (B3 ~ B10) of 40195 is '1', check error code to understand the calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the bit B0 of 40195. it should be '1' to start adjustment.
2. First load the span value to 40187-188 and then load the decimal '220' to 40185 to start Span
calibration.
3. Check the bit B2 of 40195 which is '1' during span calibration process.
4. The bit B0 of 40195 changes to '1' at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If one of error bits (B3 ~ B10) of 40195 is '1', check error code to understand the calibration error.

EXPLANATION:
Attention: For hardware connection details, please refer to the related hardware descriptions in this manual.

Exception codes:
1: Function code is not supported.
2: Out of beginning and ending address range.
3: Invalid value entrance or wrong byte number.
4: Operation error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 234 of 432
Command Examples:

Performing Read and Write operations according (Modbus RTU High-Low) to hex system with the instrument
set to address “0x01”.

Below you will find some command samples;

Description Hex
Request weight data 01,03,00,00,00,02,C4,0B
Answer of request weight 01,03,04,00,01,86,A0,38,4A
(weight value is 100000 )
Request status data 01,03,00,07,00,02,75,CA
Taring 01,10,00,18,00,02,04,00,00,00,02,72,C4
Request tare data 01,03,00,02,00,02,65,CB
Answer of request tare 01,03,04,00,00,27,10,E0,0F
(tare value is 10000 )
Zero Command 01,10,00,18,00,02,04,00,00,00,01,32,C5
Request Calibration Status 01,03,00,C2,00,02,65,F7
Answer of request Calibration Status 01,03,04,00,00,00,01,3B,F3
(Instrument is ready for calibration)
Zero Calibration 01,10,00,B8,00,02,04,00,00,00,BC,F8,CC
Span Calibration Command with Span 01,10,00,B8,00,04,08,00,00,00,DC,00,00,C3,50,94,84
value 50000
Total LC capacity Command with Total 01,10,00,B8,00,06,0C,00,00,00,EC,00,00,00,00,00,01,86,A0,
LC capacity value 100000 D7,B9
Average mV/V Command with Average 01,10,00,B8,00,08,10,00,00,00,FA,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,
mV/V value 1.9999 00,00,4E,1F,8E,3D
Dead load Command with Dead load 01,10,00,B8,00,0A,14,00,00,00,AB,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,
value 12345 00,00,00,00,00,00,30,39,7F,06
Save the coefficients of eCal 01,10,00,B8,00,02,04,00,00,5A,A5,03,A6
Command
Read digital inputs 01,03,00,28,00,02,44,03
Answer of digital inputs 01,03,04,00,00,00,02,7B,F2
(Input-2 is active)
Read digital outputs 01,03,00,2A,00,02,E5,C3
Answer of digital outputs 01,03,04,00,00,00,04,FB,F0
(Output-3 is Active)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 235 of 432
26. APPENDIX 8. ETHERNET TCP/IP
Ethernet output of BX30 Fill is programmable to BSI command set, Continuous data output, Fast continuous
data output, Modbus TCP/IP High-Low, Modbus TCP/IP Low-High. The first three data structures can be find
in the related sections indicated in the table below.

Data Format Description

BSI Command set Refer to Page 202.
Continuous Refer to Page 133, 215.
Fast Continuous Refer to Page 134.
Modbus TCP High-Low Modbus TCP interfacing.
Refer to Page 237.
Modbus TCP Low-High Modbus TCP interfacing.
Refer to Page 237.

Table 26-1 – Ethernet output interfacing

You can communicate with BX30 Fill after programming Ethernet TCP/IP and Modbus TCP related
parameters [ 15- ].

26.1 Ethernet Parameters

Ethernet parameters can be adjusted by keys in programming mode. Refer to parameter block [ 15- ].
Additionally, Ethernet parameters set up is done by EtherX PC software over Local Network Area or by
Baykon set up PC software. Both softwares are available in CD which is supplied together with the
instrument.
Parameters Descriptions
Host Name Device name of the instrument. Refer to parameter 245.
IP Address Obtain IP address manually. Refer to parameter 152.
Local Port Ethernet connection port of the instrument. Refer to parameter 156.
Network point that acts as an entrance to another network.
Gateway
Refer to parameter 155.
Subnet Mask Describes IP address can be used in network. Refer to parameter 154.
Primary DNS Obtain primary DNS manually. Refer to parameter 159.
Secondary DNS Obtain secondary DNS manually.
Remote Connection Automatic connection to any device on the network. Refer to parameter 15E
Check Box and 15F. Default is ‘Disabled’.
IP address of the PC, Printer or Device to be connected automatically.
Remote IP Address
Enter IP address of the remote device.
Ethernet connection point of PC, Printer or Device to be connected
Remote Port
automatically. Enter port number of the remote device.
Password Default password is 123456.
Set Defaults Sets factory defaults.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 236 of 432
26.2 Modbus TCP Data Structure
IMPORTANT NOTE: Scale configuration, calibration and receipt parameters (address 40127 and above) must
be loaded at Ready status.

If the instrument is programmed for Modbus TCP/IP, it can be used as a Modbus TCP/IP slave on Ethernet
communication network. Functions code ‘0x03’ (Read Holding Registers), ‘0x06’ (Single Write Register),
‘0x17’ (Read/Write Multiple Registers) and ‘0x10’ (Preset Multiple Registers) are supported.

Modbus TCP/IP High-Low: In two word registers, the data is stored to the registers in big-endian format.
Least significant word is stored to the highest register address; and most significant word is stored to the
lowest register address.

Modbus TCP/IP Low-High: In two word registers, the data is stored to the registers in little-endian format.
Least significant word is stored to the lowest register address; and most significant word is stored to the
highest register address.

Parameter’s set-up:
Set Ethernet Data Format : Modbus TCP/IP High-Low or Modbus TCP/IP Low-High
Ethernet Address : 01 to 255
Make the Ethernet parameter settings as defined on sub-block 15-.

Please find Modbus information in the web site of http://www.modbus.org

Modbus TCP/IP Command Table;

Address R/W Word Command Definition

40001 R 2 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
40003 R/W 2 Tare weight
40005 R 2 Gross weight
Bit Definition
B0 Not used
B1 Not used
B2 0 – Weight is Stable 1 – Weight is unstable
B3 0 – Gross mode 1 – Net mode
40007 R 2 Status B4 0 – Preset tare is passive 1 – Preset tare is active
B5 0 – Not power on zeroed 1 – Zeroed with pwr on zero
B6 0 – First Unit (power on) 1 – Second Unit
B7-B10 Not used
B11 0 – Key lock is passive 1 – Key lock is active
B12 0 – Out of center of zero 1 – Weight is in center of zero

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 237 of 432
 B13 0 – High res. is passive 1 – High res. is active
B14-15 Not used
B16 0 – Fill mode 1 – Basic weighing mode
1 – Process error.
B17 0 – No filling error
Refer to 40045 for details.
B18 0 – Interrupt is passive 1 – Interrupt is active
B19 0 – Inhibit is passive 1 – Inhibit is active
B20 0 – By-Pass is passive 1 – By-Pass is active
B21 0 – Hold is passive 1 – Hold is active
B22-26 Not used
B27 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.XXXX
B28 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.XXX
B29 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.XX
B30 0 – None 1 – Decimal point is X.X
B31 0 – None 1 – No decimal point
Bit Definition
B0 0 – No Error 1 – Low voltage det.
B1 0 – No Error 1 – In programming mode
B2 0 – No Error 1 – System error
Error B3 0 – No Error 1 – ADC under range
40009 R 2
Status B4 0 – No Error 1 – ADC over range
B5 0 – No Error 1 – ADC out of range
B6 0 – No Error 1 – Tilt Switch is active
B7 0 – No Error 1 – Master/Slave comm. error
B8-B31 Not used
Heartbeat for connection checking, this value is increased
40011 R 2 Heartbeat
every 100 milliseconds.

40013 R 2 Last filled weight

This value is increased automatically after filling, if The
40015 R/W 2 CN (Label number)
preact adjustment is done.
Quantity of Refer to section 11 and par. 41A to enable this feature.
40017 R 2
Batch/Bulk Refer to 40537 and 40539 to enter Batch/Bulk Quantity and
40019 R 2 Total of Batch/Bulk total weight.
40021 R/W 4 Not used
Dec Definition
0 None
1 Zero at basic weighing mode Page 37
2 Tare at basic weighing mode Page 37
3 Clear at basic weighing mode Page 37
4 Print at basic weighing mode Page 37
Commands ( * ) 5 Reprint the last label Page 134
40025 R/W 2
6 High resolution enable
Page 41
7 High resolution disable
8 Unit change (from first to second unit)
Page 38
9 Unit change (from second to first unit)
10 Keylock enable
Page 40
11 Keylock disable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 238 of 432
 12 Switch to Filling mode
(continuation of Page 38
13 Switch to Basic weighing mode
previous page)
14 Start of filling Page 41
15 Start of emptying / discharge Page 41
16 Reset Page 41
17 RUN enable
Page 120
18 RUN disable
19 By-Pass enable
Page 120
20 By-Pass disable
21 Hold enable
Page 120
22 Hold disable
23 Interrupt enable
Page 120
24 Interrupt disable
25 Filling inhibit enable
Page 120
26 Filling inhibit disable
27 Error acknowledgment / Resume Page 120
28 Reject / Do not record Page 120
29 Empty / Discharge the scale Page 120
30 Standby enable/disable
31-39 Not used
Save receipt parameters to controller.
40 ( first, Load receipt parameters between 40521 to
40827 )
0 None
1 Command is processing…
40027 R 2 Commands status
2 Command is successfully.
3 Command failed.
40029 R/W 9 Reserve
40038 R/W 1 Year as BCD format
Date and time setting.
40039 R/W 1 Month & day as BCD format
Refer to sub-block 24-.
40040 R/W 1 Hour & minute as BCD format
Bit Definition
B0 Input-1
B1 Input-2
B2 Input-3
B3 Input-4
B4 Input-5
B5 Input-6
B6 Not used
0 – Passive
40041 R 2 Status of Inputs B7 RUN
1 – Active
B8 INHI
B9 ACK
Refer to related filling mode
B10 REJE and select inputs for details.
B11 INTE Page 44 and 164.
B12 HOLD
B13 DROP
B14 EMPT
B15 BYPA

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 239 of 432
 B16 S2
(continuation of B17 TMR1
previous page) B18 TMR2
B19 TMR3
B20 IN-A
B21 IN-B
B22 FBU1
B23 FBU2
B24 TILT
B0 Output-1
B1 Output-2
B2 Output-3
B3 Output-4
B4 Output-5
B5 Output-6
B6 Output-7
B7 Output-8
B8 Output-9
B9 Output-10
B10 Not used
B11 PROG
B12 EMPT
0 – Passive
B13 END
1 – Active
40043 R/W 2 Status of Outputs B14 FEED
B15 FGAT
B16 VIBR Refer to related filling mode
B17 ALAR and select outputs for
B18 ZR I details. Page 44 and 162.
B19 ZR G
B20 EFIL
B21 ETOL
B22 UNDE
B23 TMR1
B24 TMR2
B25 TMR3
B26 LOGI
B27 FBU1
B28 FBU2
Dec Description
0 No process error
1 Batch Finished
2 By-Pass
3 Not used
Process
4 Reset
Warning Messages
5 Interrupted
40045 R 2 Refer to section 19.1 6 Hold Status
7 Check Fill Stop
8 Check Discharge Stop
9 Alarm
10 Inhibited
128 Feeding Gate position error.
Process 129 Tare Range Error
Error Messages 130 Taring could not execute.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 240 of 432
 131 Zeroing Fail
Process 132 Zeroing Range
Error Messages 133 Filling Time
134 Valve Position
Refer to section 19.2 135 Wrong Position
136 Not used
137 Maxfill Limit
138 +Tolerance Error
139 Stable Error
(continuation of 140 Clmp Is Open
previous page) 141 Loadcell Error
142 -Tolerance Error
143 Discharge Gate
144 Tilted
145 Not used
146 Multicycle filling?
Dec Description
0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
1 Weight Mode
2 Ready
3 Taring
4 Zeroing
5 Coarse Feed
6 Middle Feed
7 Fine Feeding
8 Valve to Down
Process states
40047 R 2 9 Valve to Up
Messages
10 Settling
Refer to sectiSon 19.1 11 Filling
12 End of Fill
13 Discharging
14 Discharging Delay
15-19 Not used
20 Run Inactive
21 Inhibited
22 Lance Position
23 In Standby mode
Quantity of
40049 R/W 2
Erasable Accumulation
Refer to section 16.1.1
Total of
40051 R/W 2
Erasable Accumulation
Quantity of the
40053 R 2
Current day’s Accu.
Refer to section 16.1.3
Total of the
40055 R 2
Current day’s Accu.
Quantity of
40057 R 2
Yesterday’s Accu.
Refer to section 16.1.4
Total of
40059 R 2
Yesterday’s Accu.
40061 R/W 2 Quantity of Grand Total
Refer to section 16.1.5
40063 R/W 4 Grand Total

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 241 of 432
 Scale Configuration and Calibration Parameters
Dec Description
0 No
40127 R/W 2 Dynamic filter 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
40129 R/W 2 Digital filter
4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
40131 R/W 2 Power on zero
3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
40133 R/W 2 Zeroing Range 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%
0 Disable
1 ± 0,3d
2 ± 0,5d
40135 R/W 2 Auto Zero Tracking
3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
40137 R/W 2 Tare
1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Stability 3 ± 2d
40139 R/W 2
Detection Range 4 ± 3d
5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
40141 R/W 2 Stability Time Refer to parameter [518] on page 179
40143 R/W 10 Reserve
Dec Description
0 g ( Gram )
1 kg ( Kilogram )
40153 R/W 2 Unit 2 t ( Ton )
3 lb ( Libre )
4 No unit ( without unit )
5 kLb ( Kilolibre )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 242 of 432
 Dec Description
0 Single range
1 2 x MR
40155 R/W 2 Range
2 3 x MR
3 2 x MI
4 3 x MI
40157 R/W 2 MAX-1 Refer to parameter [523] on page 180
Dec Description
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
40159 R/W 2 Decimal point-1 2 XXXXXX
3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
Dec Description
0 X1
40161 R/W 2 Increment-1
1 X2
2 X5
40163 R/W 2 MAX-2
40165 R/W 2 Decimal point-2
40167 R/W 2 Increment-2
40169 R/W 2 MAX-3
40171 R/W 2 Decimal point-3
40173 R/W 2 Increment-3
Dec Description
0 Over indication after Max.
1 1 division more than Max.
40175 R/W 2 Limit of Indication 2 5 division more than Max.
3 9 division more than Max.
4 2% more than Max.
5 5% more than Max.
0 Subtractive tare
40177 R/W 2 Tare type 1 Additive tare
2 Both
40179 R/W 2 Maximum tare Refer to par. [527] page 180
40181 R/W 4 Reserve
Decimal Definition
0 None
Calibration
Commands (*) 188 Adjust Zero Calibration command
40185 R/W 2 Adjust Span Calibration command
(continuation 220
( first, load test weight value to 40187 )
of previous
page) Apply the coefficients of eCal
23205
( first, load 40189, 40191 and 40193 )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 243 of 432
 40187 R/W 2 Span Calibration Value
40189 R/W 2 Total Load Cell capacity for eCal
eCal
40191 R/W 2 Average mV/V value for eCal
Coefficients
40193 R/W 2 Dead load value for eCal
Bit Definition
B0 Ready for calibration
B1 Zero calibration in process …
B2 Span calibration in process …
Calibration Timeout
B3
- Restart calibration
ADC Error
B4 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument

Calibration Instrument cannot be calibrating

40195 R 2 B6
Process Status - Load cell signal is very low or too high
& Errors
Calibration Error
- Calibration loading is not enough
B7
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
Calibration load value entry Error
B8 - Test weight is too small. Increase the
weight
Scale unstable
B9 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring

The Calibration switch is not ‘On’ position.

B10
- Check the calibration DIP switch.

40197 R/W 10 Reserve

Voltage of The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment for

40207 R 2
power supply DC variant.

Millivolt value of active scale is indicated with 0.01

Load cell millivolt value
40209 R 2 mV increment. For example: 2.34 mV is indicated
(only BX30 Fill)
as integer 234 value.
Load parameter’s
40211 R/W 2 Write 0x6BB6 value to load parameter’s defaults.
defaults

40213 R/W 2 Load factory defaults Write 0x7CC7 value to load factory defaults.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 244 of 432
 Machine Related Parameters Main Group
Refer to parameter [311] on page 158
0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
40255 R/W 2 Filling modes 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to parameter [312] on page 159
0 PULS
40257 R/W 2 Start input signal type
1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to parameter [313] on page 159
40259 R/W 2 Discharge input signal type 0 PULS
1 LEVE
Start filling or Refer to parameter [314] on page 159
40261 R/W 2 emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on 1 DISC
Refer to parameter [315] on page 159
40263 R/W 2 Feeding speed quantity 0 1
1 2
2 3
Refer to parameter [316] on page 159
0 C
40265 R/W 2 Feeding outputs
1 FC
2 FMC
40267 R/W 2 Maximum target of filling Refer to parameter [317] on page 159
40269 R/W 2 Minimum target of filling Refer to parameter [318] on page 159
Scale quantity at master
40271 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [319] on page 159
slave operation
40273 R/W 12 Not used
Refer to parameter [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
40285 R/W 2
control type 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Refer to parameter [322] on page 160
Switch type on the feeding
40287 R/W 2 gate for checking its 0 NO
position. 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to parameter [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
40289 R/W 2
gate 1 NCLO
2 NOPE

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 245 of 432
 Refer to parameter [324] on page 160
0 BIU
40291 R/W 2 Lance position control type 1 BMIU
2 BIOU
3 BMIO
Refer to parameter [325] on page 160
Movement of valve or lifter 0 NO
40293 R/W 2
at liquid filling modes 1 VALV
2 LIFT
Refer to parameter [326] on page 160
0 NO
Movement of valve or lifter
40295 R/W 2 1 CLAM
at liquid big bag mode
2 UP-A
3 UP-B
40297 R/W 18 Not used
Refer to parameter [331] on page 161
0 NO
1 RUN
2 INHI
3 ACK
4 REJE
5 INTE
6 HOLD
7 DROP
8 EMPT
40315 R/W 2 Select input 1 9 S2
10 BYPA
11 TMR1
12 TMR2
13 TMR3
14 IN-A
15 IN-B
16 FBU1
17 FBU2
18 TILT
19 RSRV (only for Select input 1 &2 )
40317 R/W 2 Select input 2 Refer to parameter [332] on page 161
40319 R/W 2 Select input 3 Refer to parameter [333] on page 161
40321 R/W 2 Select input 4 Refer to parameter [334] on page 162
40323 R/W 2 Select input 5 Refer to parameter [335] on page 162
40325 R/W 2 Select input 6 Refer to parameter [336] on page 162
40327 R/W 2 Select input 7 Refer to parameter [337] on page 162
40329 R/W 2 Select input 8 Refer to parameter [338] on page 162
40331 R/W 2 Select input 9 Refer to parameter [339] on page 162
Refer to parameter [33A] on page 162
0 NO
1 PROG
2 EMPT
40333 R/W 2 Select output 1 3 END
4 FEED
5 FGAT
6 VIBR

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 246 of 432
 7 ALAR
(continuation of previous 8 ZR I
page) 9 ZR G
10 EFIL
11 ETOL
12 UNDE
13 TMR1
14 TMR2
15 TMR3
16 LOGI
17 FBU1
18 FBU2
19 RSVR (only for Select output 1 &2 )
40335 R/W 2 Select output 2 Refer to parameter [33B] on page 163
40337 R/W 2 Select output 3 Refer to parameter [33C] on page 163
40339 R/W 2 Select output 4 Refer to parameter [33D] on page 163
40341 R/W 2 Select output 5 Refer to parameter [33E] on page 164
40343 R/W 2 Select output 6 Refer to parameter [33F] on page 164
Refer to parameter [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
40345 R/W 2 0 VAL
feeding entries
1 DEV
Refer to parameter [342] on page 164
40347 R/W 2 Weight displaying at Filling 0 INCR
1 DECR
Refer to parameter [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
40349 R/W 2 Display after filling
1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to parameter [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
3 RCPT
40351 R/W 2 Information display
4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
40353 R/W 22 Not used
40375 R/W 2 The function of magnify key Refer to parameter [351] on page 164
40377 R/W 2 The function of change key Refer to parameter [352] on page 165
40379 R/W 2 The function of F1 key Refer to parameter [353] on page 165
40381 R/W 2 The function of F2 key Refer to parameter [354] on page 165
40383 R/W 2 The function of F3 key Refer to parameter [355] on page 166
40385 R/W 2 The function of F4 key Refer to parameter [356] on page 166
40387 R/W 2 The function of F5 key Refer to parameter [357] on page 166
40389 R/W 16 Not used
40405 R/W 2 Reserve Input 1 Refer to parameter [371] on page 167
40407 R/W 2 Reserve Input 2 Refer to parameter [372] on page 167
40409 R/W 2 Reserve output 1 Refer to parameter [373] on page 167
40411 R/W 2 Reserve output 2 Refer to parameter [374] on page 167

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 247 of 432
 Receipt Related Parameters Main Group
40521 R/W 2 Target
40523 R/W 2 + Tolerance
40525 R/W 2 - Tolerance
Overfill weight.
40527 R/W 2
( The same as 40565)
40529 R/W 2 Coarse Refer to section 3 for meaning of parameters.
40531 R/W 2 Medium
40533 R/W 2 Fine
40535 R/W 2 PT (Specific Tare)
40537 R/W 2 Quantity of Batch/Bulk
40539 R/W 2 Total of Batch/Bulk
40541 R/W 8 Not used
Refer to parameter [411] on page 168
Gross, net or multicycle 0 NET
40549 R/W 2
filling 1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to parameter [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
40551 R/W 2 Tolerance control
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to parameter [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
1 AV 5
40553 R/W 2 Taring at filling. 2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
40555 R/W 2 Minimum tare value. Refer to parameter [414] on page 168
40557 R/W 2 Maximum tare value. Refer to parameter [415] on page 169
40559 R/W 2 Valve force Refer to parameter [416] on page 169
40561 R/W 2 Lance Bottom / Lift Weight Refer to parameter [417] on page 169
40563 R/W 2 Lance Middle Refer to parameter [418] on page 169
40565 R/W 2 Overfill weight. Refer to parameter [419] on page 169
Refer to parameter [41A] on page 169
0 NO
1 QTY
40567 R/W 2 Batch filling.
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to parameter [41B] on page 169
0 NO
40569 R/W 2 Soft start method
1 FINE
2 MED
40571 R/W 2 Soft start time Refer to parameter [41C] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 248 of 432
 The emptying / discharge
40573 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [41D] on page 169
type
Empty/Discharge weight /
40575 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [41E] on page 170
Remaining weight
40577 R/W 2 Emptying / discharge time Refer to parameter [41F] on page 170

40579 R/W 30 Not used

Refer to parameter [431] on page 170
0 NO
Correction technic at
40609 R/W 2 1 AUTO
Feeding / Discharging.
2 TIME
3 SMRT
40611 R/W 2 Fine feeding time Refer to parameter [432] on page 170
40613 R/W 2 Preact adj. frequency. Refer to parameter [433] on page 170
40615 R/W 2 Sampling size. Refer to parameter [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
40617 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [435] on page 170
percent.
40619 R/W 2 Zeroing frequency. Refer to parameter [436] on page 171
Refer to parameter [437] on page 171
40621 R/W 2 Jogging 0 NO
1 TIME
2 AUTO
40623 R/W 2 Jogging on time Refer to parameter [438] on page 171
40625 R/W 2 Jogging off time Refer to parameter [439] on page 171
40627 R/W 2 Minimum filling error Refer to parameter [43A] on page 171
40629 R/W 2 Maximum error limit Refer to parameter [43B] on page 171
Refer to parameter [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
40631 R/W 2
process 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d
40633 R/W 6 Not used
40639 R/W 2 Zeroing delay. Refer to parameter [441] on page 172
40641 R/W 2 Taring delay. Refer to parameter [442] on page 172
40643 R/W 2 Stability check delay. Refer to parameter [443] on page 172
40645 R/W 2 Maximum stability time. Refer to parameter [444] on page 172
40647 R/W 2 Start delay Refer to parameter [445] on page 172
40649 R/W 2 End of batch output delay Refer to parameter [446] on page 172
Coarse and medium feed
40651 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [447] on page 172
control delay

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 249 of 432
 40653 R/W 2 Fine feed control delay Refer to parameter [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
40655 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL
40657 R/W 2 Complete delay Refer to parameter [44A] on page 173
40659 R/W 2 Catch delay Refer to parameter [44B] on page 173
40661 R/W 2 The clamp release delay Refer to parameter [44C] on page 173
40663 R/W 2 Maximum filling time Refer to parameter [44D] on page 173
40665 R/W 4 Not used
Refer to parameter [451] on page 173
0 NO
40669 R/W 2 Analogue output type
1 0-20
2 0-10
Analogue output value
40671 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [452] on page 173
for Coarse feed
Analogue output value
40673 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [453] on page 173
for Medium feed
Analogue output value
40675 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [454] on page 173
for Fine feed
40677 R/W 22 Not used
Refer to parameter [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type of 0 SUBT
40699 R/W 2
the machine. 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
40701 R/W 2 Refer to parameter [462] on page 174
palette.
Refer to parameter [463] on page 174
40703 R/W 2 Operation at Batch filling. 0 STOP
1 FILL
40705 R/W 24 Not used
40729 R/W 2 Alarm Setpoint Refer to parameter [471] on page 174
40731 R/W 2 Alarm time Refer to parameter [472] on page 174
40733 R/W 2 Minimum Vibration weight Refer to parameter [473] on page 174
40735 R/W 2 Maximum Vibration weight Refer to parameter [474] on page 174
40737 R/W 2 Vibration delay Refer to parameter [475] on page 174
40739 R/W 2 Vibration time Refer to parameter [476] on page 174
40741 R/W 2 Zero range Refer to parameter [477] on page 174
40743 R/W 16 Not used
Refer to parameter [481] on page 175
0 SELE
40759 R/W 2 Timer 1 Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40761 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [482] on page 175
Refer to parameter [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
40763 R/W 2 Timer 1 Type 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 250 of 432
 40765 R/W 2 Timer 1 On time Refer to parameter [484] on page 175
40767 R/W 2 Timer 1 Off time Refer to parameter [485] on page 175
Refer to parameter [486] on page 175
0 SELE
40769 R/W 2 Timer 2 Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40771 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [487] on page 175
Refer to parameter [488] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
40773 R/W 2 Timer 2 Type 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
40775 R/W 2 Timer 2 On time Refer to parameter [489] on page 175
40777 R/W 2 Timer 2 Off time Refer to parameter [48A] on page 176
Refer to parameter [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
40779 R/W 2 Timer 3 Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40781 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [48C] on page 176
Refer to parameter [48D] on page 176
0 Type A
1 Type B
40783 R/W 2 Timer 3 Type 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
40785 R/W 2 Timer 3 On time Refer to parameter [48E] on page 176
40787 R/W 2 Timer 3 Off time Refer to parameter [48F] on page 176
40789 R/W 30 Not used
Refer to parameter [4A1] on page 176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
40819 R/W 2 Logical functions 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to parameter [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
40821 R/W 2 A Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40823 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [4A3] on page 177
Refer to parameter [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
40825 R/W 2 B Trigger
1 IN
2 OUT
40827 R/W 2 Number Refer to parameter [4A5] on page 177
* : Add 100 to command value for NOE interfacing. For example: Send 101 from NOE to BX30 instead of 1
for Zeroing.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 251 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Read 40009 and 40010.
2. Check error status,
3. If there isn’t any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare),
4. If there is an error, check the error code.

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the bit B0 of 40195 which should be '1' to start adjustment.
2. Load the decimal '188' to 40185 to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the bit B1 of 40195 which is '1' during zero calibration process.
4. The bit B0 of 40195 changes to '1' at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If one of error bits (B3 ~ B10) of 40195 is '1', check error code to understand the calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the bit B0 of 40195. it should be '1' to start adjustment.
2. First load the span value to 40187-188 and then load the decimal '220' to 40185 to start Span
calibration.
3. Check the bit B2 of 40195 which is '1' during span calibration process.
4. The bit B0 of 40195 changes to '1' at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If one of error bits (B3 ~ B10) of 40195 is '1', check error code to understand the calibration error.

EXPLANATION:
Attention: For hardware connection details, please refer to the related hardware descriptions in this manual.

Exception codes:
1: Function code is not supported.
2: Out of beginning and ending address range.
3: Invalid value entrance or wrong byte number.
4: Operation error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 252 of 432
Command Examples:
Performing Read and Write operations according (Modbus TCP/IP High-Low) to hex system with the
instrument set to address “0x01”. MBAP (Modbus Application Protocol) Header is not included to the below
Modbus TCP/IP application data units.

Below you will find some command samples;

Description Hex
Request weight data 01,03,00,00,00,02
Answer of request weight 01,03,04,00,01,86,A0
(weight value is 100000 )
Request status data 01,03,00,07,00,02
Taring 01,10,00,18,00,02,04,00,00,00,02
Request tare data 01,03,00,02,00,02
Answer of request tare 01,03,04,00,00,27,10
(tare value is 10000 )
Zero Command 01,10,00,18,00,02,04,00,00,00,01
Request Calibration Status 01,03,00,C2,00,02
Answer of request Calibration Status 01,03,04,00,00,00,01
(Instrument is ready for calibration)
Zero Calibration 01,10,00,B8,00,02,04,00,00,00,BC
Span Calibration Command with Span 01,10,00,B8,00,04,08,00,00,00,DC,00,00,C3,50
value 50000
Total LC capacity Command with Total 01,10,00,B8,00,06,0C,00,00,00,EC,00,00,00,00,00,01,86,A0
LC capacity value 100000
Average mV/V Command with Average 01,10,00,B8,00,08,10,00,00,00,FA,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,
mV/V value 1.9999 00,00,4E,1F
Dead load Command with Dead load 01,10,00,B8,00,0A,14,00,00,00,AB,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,
value 12345 00,00,00,00,00,00,30,39
Save the coefficients of eCal 01,10,00,B8,00,02,04,00,00,5A,A5
Command
Read digital inputs 01,03,00,28,00,02
Answer of digital inputs 01,03,04,00,00,00,02
(Input-2 is active)
Read digital outputs 01,03,00,2A,00,02
Answer of digital outputs 01,03,04,00,00,00,04
(Output-3 is Active)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 253 of 432
27. APPENDIX 9. PROFIBUS DP (ONLY BX30 FILL PB)
In Profibus DPV1 interface, baud rate is detected automatically. Supported baud rates are 9.6 kbps, 19.2
kbps, 45.45 kbps, 93.75 kbps, 187.5 kbps, 500 kbps, 1.5 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 6 Mbps and 12 Mbps. No ‘baud
rate’ instance exists. Refer to Profibus parameters , sub-block 19-,
GSD file is available in CD which is supplied together with the instrument.

There are two LED’s near the Profibus connector which are ;

1 ( A ) Operation mode LED

2 ( B ) Status LED
3 Profibus Connector

( A ) Operation mode LED

State Indication Comment

Off Not online /No power Check power and cable
Green On-line, data exchange -
Flashing Green On-line, clear -
Flashing Red
PROFIBUS configuration error Check GSD file configuration.
(2 flash)

( B ) Status LED

State Indication Comment

No power or Profibus module is in
Off Not power or not initialized
initialization state
Green Initialized
Initialized, diagnostic event(s)
Flashing Green Diagnostic is active
present
Red Exception error There is an exception error

27.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 27.1 - PLC Connection

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 254 of 432
PROFIBUS Connector pin configuration (DB9F)
Pin Signal Description
1 - -
2 - -
3 B Line Positive RxD / TxD, RS-485 level
4 RTS Request to send
5 GND Bus Ground (isolated)
6 +5V Bus Output +5V termination power (isolated)
7 - -
8 A Line Negative RxD / TxD, RS-485 level
9 - -
Housing Cable Shield Ground

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

27.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

27.3 GSD Configuration

Profibus data consist of 2 pcs Input-2 words and 2 pcs Output-2 words. GSD configuration for PLC
programmers is shown in Figure 27.2.

Figure 27.2 - GSD Configuration

GSD Configuration Description

Input 2 words 1st Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Input 2 words 2nd Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Output 2 words 1st Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Output 2 words 2nd Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 255 of 432
27.4 Profibus DP Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 27-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
By default, Actual weight value is represented.
Dword
To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(INPUT)

Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
2nd 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dword
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 256 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 27-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 27-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 27-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 27-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read 10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command 10010 18 + Tolerance
Response 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 27-2)
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 27-7)
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 257 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 258 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 27-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 259 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 27-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 27-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 260 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 27-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 261 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 27-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 262 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 27-7 )
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 27-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 263 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 27-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 27-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 27-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 27-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 27-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 27-2 )
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 27-7 )
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 264 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 265 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 266 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 267 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 268 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 269 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 270 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 271 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 272 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 27-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 273 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 274 of 432
28. APPENDIX 10. PROFINET (ONLY BX30 FILL PN)
Profinet interface of the weighing instrument can be done via hub switch or serial bus over two Profinet port.

1. Serial bus connection of instruments. You may connect instruments serial to your Profinet bus via
two ports.
2. Star connection. If you connect the instrument to your PLC via hub switch, you can use P1 or P2 port
on the instrument. You may change the port, if there is any malfunction on port in usage.

The Profinet interface is 100Mbit and full duplex. GSDML file for two port Profinet is available in CD which is
supplied together with the instrument.
There are 4 announcement LEDs on the instrument to indicate the interface status as seen below. The
meanings of these LED’s are;

1 ( A ) Network Status LED

2 ( B ) Module Status LED
3 Link/Activity LED (port 1)
4 Link/Activity LED (port 2)
5 P1 interface (port 1)
6 P2 interface (port 2)

( A ) Network Status LED

LED State Description Comment
Off Not online /No power Check power and cable
Green On-line RUN -
Green, flashing On-line STOP -

( B ) Module Status LED

LED State Description Comment

No power or Profinet module is in
Off Not power or not initialized
initialization state
Green Normal operation
Initialized, diagnostic
Green, 1 flash Diagnostic is active
event(s) present
Red Exception error There is an exception error
Red, 1 flash Configuration Error Check GSDML configuration
Red, 2 flashes IP Address Error IP address not set
Red, 3 flashes Device Name Error Device name not set
Re-energize the instrument.
Red, 4 flashes Internal Module Error
If seen again, change the board.

In the case of red LED warning, check cabling, configuration, IP address and device name. Power off the
instrument and reenergize the instrument 30 seconds later.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 275 of 432
LINK/Activity LED

LED State Description Comment

Off No Link No link, no communication present
Ethernet link established, no
Green Link
communication present
Ethernet link established,
Green, flickering Activity
communication present

28.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 28.1 - PLC Connection

PROFINET Connector pin configuration (RJ45)

Pin Signal DIR Description

1 TX+ Out Differential Ethernet transmit data +
2 TX− Out Differential Ethernet transmit data −
3 RX+ In Differential Ethernet receive data +
6 RX− In Differential Ethernet receive data −
4 Not used Terminated
5 Not used Terminated
7 Not used Terminated
8 Not used Terminated
Shield Chassis ground

The HUB connection cabling will be a direct connection as shown below:

Figure 28.2 - HUB connection

The PC connection cabling will be done via cross cable as shown below. IP address blocks and gateway
address of filling controller and PC should be the same in cross connection.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 276 of 432
 Figure 28.3 - Cross PC connection

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

28.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

28.3 Profinet Parameters

Profinet parameters can be adjusted by keys in programming mode. Refer to parameter block [ 19- ].
Additionally, Profinet parameters set up is done by EtherX PC software over Local Network Area or by
Baykon set up PC software. Both softwares are available in CD which is supplied together with the
instrument.

Note: Station name is ‘filling1’ as a default.

Parameters Descriptions
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automates network parameters if it is
DHCP
enabled.
Device name of the instrument.
Host Name
Refer to parameter 196.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain IP address manually.
IP Address
Refer to parameter 192.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain default gateway manually.
Gateway
Refer to parameter 195.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain subnet mask manually.
Subnet Mask
Refer to parameter 194.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain primary DNS manually.
Primary DNS
Refer to parameter 199.
Secondary DNS If DHCP is disabled, obtain secondary DNS manually.
Password Default password is 123456.

28.4 GSDML Configuration

Profinet data consist of 2 pcs Input-2 words and 2 pcs Output-2 words. GSDML configuration for PLC
programmers is shown in Figure 28.5.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 277 of 432
 RT Use with newer PLC hardware such as S7-1200 and S7-1500.
RT Migration Use with older PLC hardware such as S7-300.

Figure 28.4 – Location of Hardware catalog

Figure 28.5 - GSDML Configuration

GSDML Configuration Description

Input 2 word_1 1st Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Input 2 word_2 2nd Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Output 2 word_1 1st Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Output 2 word_2 2nd Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 278 of 432
28.5 Profinet Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 28-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
By default, Actual weight value is represented.
Dword
To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(INPUT)

Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
2nd 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dword
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 279 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 28-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 28-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 28-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 28-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read 10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command 10010 18 + Tolerance
Response 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 28-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 28-7 )
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 280 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 281 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 28-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 282 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 28-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 28-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 283 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 28-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 284 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 28-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 285 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 28-7)
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 28-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 286 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 28-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 28-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 28-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 28-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 28-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 28-2 )
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 28-7)
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 287 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 288 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 289 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 290 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 291 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 292 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 293 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 294 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 295 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 28-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 296 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 297 of 432
29. APPENDIX 11. CANOPEN (ONLY BX30 FILL CO)
After setting related parameters you can communicate with BX30Fill via CANopen network. EDS file is
available in CD which is supplied together with the instrument.
Automatically detected and supported baud rates are 10 kbps, 50 kbps, 100 kbps, 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500
kbps, 800 kbps, 1 Mbps, Autobaud (default).

There are 2 LED’s near the CANopen connector which are;

1 ( A ) RUN LED
2 ( B ) ERROR LED
3 CANopen interface

( A ) Run LED

State Indication Comment

Off Not online / No power Check power and cable
Green On-line, data exchange -
Green, blinking On-line, initializing -
Green, single flash Stopped Check hardware damages
Green, flickering Auto baudrate detection in progress -
Red CANopen configuration error Check EDS file

( B ) Error LED

State Indication Comment

No power or CANopen module is in
Off -
initialization state
A bus error counter reached or
Red, single flash Warning limit reached
exceeded its warning level
Red, flickering LSS LSS services in progress
A guard- (NMT-Slave or NMT-
Red, double flash Error count event master) or heartbeat event
(Heartbeat consumer) has occurred.
Red Bus off (Fatal Event) Bus off.

29.1 Electrical Connection

CANopen connection is done with four wire as indicated below in Figure 29.1. The data line ends must be
terminated with 120 ohm resistors.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 298 of 432
 Figure 29.1 - PLC Connection

CANopen Connector pin configuration (DB9M)

Pin Signal Description
1 - -
2 CAN_L -
3 CAN_GND -
4 - -
5 CAN_SHIELD -
6 - -
7 CAN_H -
8 - -
9 - -
Housing Cable Shield -

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

29.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

29.3 EDS Configuration

CANopen data structures consist of TxPDO ( 64 bit ) and RxPDO ( 64 bit ). EDS configuration for PLC
programmers is shown in Figure 29.2.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 299 of 432
 Figure 29.2 - EDS Configuration

EDS Configuration Description

TxPDO 1 ( 4 words ) Unsigned Long ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
RxPDO 1 ( 4 words ) Unsigned Long ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 300 of 432
29.4 CANopen Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Unsigned Long (ULong) descripted below.
High Dword

B63 B62 B61 B60 B59 B58 B57 B56 B55 B54 B53 B52 B51 B50 B49 B48
Unsigned Long

B47 B46 B45 B44 B43 B42 B41 B40 B39 B38 B37 B36 B35 B34 B33 B32
(Only read)

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Low Dword

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 29-1 – Bitwise of a ULong

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
High Dword

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
Process Centre Gross Cmd
Error codes of BX30Fill Unit P.Tare SD Read command response
TxPDO 1

Error of zero Net Flg

(T_UL1)
Low Dword

By default, Actual weight value is represented.

To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to B37…B33.

Description of High Dword of TxPDO 1 ( T_UL1 )

Bit Number Description

B63 … B54 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B53 … B48 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B47 … B44
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B43 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B42 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B41 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 301 of 432
 0 Weight is out of zero range
B40 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B39 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B38
Detection 1 Unstable
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 29-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 29-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 29-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 29-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read 10010 18 + Tolerance
B37 … B33 Command 10011 19 Coarse feed value
Response 10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 29-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 29-7)
B32 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

By default, Actual weight value is represented.

B31…B0
To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to B37…B33.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 302 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
Low Dword of TXPDO 1(T_UL1) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process
error messages’. Refer to RxPDO 1(R_UL1) to select this command.

Bit Number Low Dword of TxPDO 1(T_UL1) Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 303 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 29-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

Low Dword of TXPDO 1(T_UL1) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL
Status’ Process error messages’. Refer to RxPDO 1(R_UL1) to select this command.

Bit Number Low Dword of TxPDO 1(T_UL1) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error. (Check the ‘Process error
1
messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 304 of 432
 B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used

B0 Not used

Table 29-3– ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

Low Dword of TXPDO 1(T_UL1) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘calibration
status’. Refer to RxPDO 1(R_UL1) to select this command.

Bit Number Low Dword of TxPDO 1(T_UL1) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 305 of 432
 0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration

Table 29-4 – Calibration status

Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

Low Dword of TXPDO 1(T_UL1) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital
input status’. Refer to RxPDO 1(R_UL1) to select this command.

Bit Number Low Dword of TxPDO 1(T_UL1) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 29-5 – Digital inputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 306 of 432
 Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
Low Dword of TXPDO 1(T_UL1) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital
output status’. Refer to RxPDO 1(R_UL1) to select this command.

Bit Number Low Dword of TxPDO 1(T_UL1) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2
B23 TMR1
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL
B20 EFIL
B19 ZR G
B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR 0 – Passive
B16 VIBR 1 – Active
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED Refer to related filling mode and
B13 END select inputs for details.
B12 EMPT Page 44 and 162
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 29-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 307 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

Filling By-
High Dword Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
New
Not in use Command List Read Data Selection
RxPDO 1
(R_UL1)

CMD
Low Dword

B37-B33 bits defines the usage of this Dword.

Description of High Dword of RxPDO 1 ( R_UL1 )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B63 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B62 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B61
(SFE) command.
B60 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B59 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B58 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B57 Not used
B56 … B48 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 29-7 )
B47 … B43 Not in use
Bin Dec Commands
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
B42 … B38 Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 29-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 308 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
10010 18 + Tolerance
10011 19 Coarse value [ 1 ]
10100 20 Medium value
10101 21 Fine value [ 1 ]
B42 … B38 Command
List 10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
(continuation 11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
of previous 11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
page) 11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 29-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 29-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 29-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 29-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 29-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B37 ... B33 10011 19 Coarse feed value
Selection
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 29-2 )
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 29-7 )
B32 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.

B31-B0 B37-B33 bits defines the usage of this Dword.

(1) Write this command after writing values to Low Dword of RxPDO then apply this command with New
CMD.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 309 of 432
Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 310 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 311 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 312 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 313 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 314 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 315 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 316 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 317 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 29-7 – Expanded Command List
(1) Write this command after writing values to Low Dword of RxPDO then apply this command with New
CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read Low Dword of TxPDO.
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 318 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B47…B44 bits of TxPDO 1 (T_UL1).
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to Low Dword of RxPDO 1
(R_UL1), then apply this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 319 of 432
30. APPENDIX 12. ETHERNET/IP (ONLY BX30 FILL EI)
EtherNet/IP interface of the weighing instrument can be done via hub switch or serial bus over two
EtherNet/IP port.

1. Serial bus connection of instruments. You may connect instruments serial to your EtherNet/IP bus
via two ports.
2. Star connection. If you connect the instrument to your PLC via hub switch, you can use P1 or P2 port
on the instrument. You may change the port, if there is any malfunction on port in usage.

The EtherNet/IP interface supports 10/100Mbit, full or half duplex operation. EDS file for two port EtherNet/IP
is available in CD which is supplied together with the instrument.
There are 4 announcement LEDs on the instrument to indicate the interface status as seen below.

1 ( A ) Network Status LED

2 ( B ) Module Status LED
3 Link/Activity LED (port 1)
4 Link/Activity LED (port 2)
5 P1 interface (port 1)
6 P2 interface (port 2)

( A ) Network Status LED

LED State Description
Off No IP address
Green Online, one or more connections established (CIP Class 1 or 3)
Green, flashing Online, no connections established
Red Duplicate IP address, FATAL error
Red, flashing One or more connections timed out (CIP Class 1 or 3)

( B ) Module Status LED

LED State Description

Off No power
Green Controlled by a scanner in run state
Green, flashing Not configured, or scanner in idle state
Red Major fault (EXCEPTION state, FATAL error etc.)
Red, flashing Recoverable fault(s)

In the case of red LED warning, check cabling, configuration, IP address and device name. Power off the
instrument and reenergize the instrument 30 seconds later.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 320 of 432
LINK/Activity LED

LED State Description

Off No link, no activity
Green Link (100 Mbit/s) established
Green, flickering Activity (100 Mbit/s)
Yellow Link (10 Mbit/s) established
Yellow, flickering Activity (10 Mbit/s)

30.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 30.1 – PLC Connection

EtherNet/IP Connector pin configuration (RJ45)

Pin Signal DIR Description

1 TX+ Out Differential Ethernet transmit data +
2 TX− Out Differential Ethernet transmit data −
3 RX+ In Differential Ethernet receive data +
6 RX− In Differential Ethernet receive data −
4 Not used Terminated
5 Not used Terminated
7 Not used Terminated
8 Not used Terminated
Shield Chassis ground

The HUB connection cabling will be a direct connection as shown below:

Figure 30.2 - HUB connection

The PC connection cabling will be done via cross cable as shown below. IP address blocks and gateway
address of filling controller and PC should be the same in cross connection.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 321 of 432
 Figure 30.3 - Cross PC connection

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

30.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

30.3 EtherNet/IP Parameters

EtherNet/IP parameters can be adjusted by keys in programming mode. Refer to parameter block [ 19- ].
Additionally, EtherNet/IP parameters set up are done by EtherX PC software over Local Network Area or by
Baykon set up PC software. Both softwares are available in CD which is supplied together with the
instrument.

Parameters Descriptions
Host Name Device name of the instrument.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automates network parameters if it is
DHCP
enabled.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain IP address manually.
IP Address
Refer to parameter 192.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain default gateway manually.
Gateway
Refer to parameter 195.
If DHCP is disabled, obtain subnet mask manually.
Subnet Mask
Refer to parameter 194.
Primary DNS If DHCP is disabled, obtain primary DNS manually.
Secondary DNS If DHCP is disabled, obtain secondary DNS manually.
Password Default password is 123456.

30.4 EDS Configuration

EtherNet/IP data structures consist of 2 pcs Input-2 words and 2 pcs Output-2 words. EDS configuration for
PLC programmers is shown in Figure 30.4 and Figure 30.5.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 322 of 432
 Figure 30.4 – Configuration of module properties without EDS file

Figure 30.5 – Configuration of module properties with EDS file

Data Length Description

Input 2 words 1st Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Input 2 words 2nd Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Output 2 words 1st Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Output 2 words 2nd Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 323 of 432
30.5 EtherNet/IP Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 30-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
By default, Actual weight value is represented.
Dword
To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(INPUT)

Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
2nd 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dword
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 324 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 30-3)
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 30-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 30-5)
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 30-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read 10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command 10010 18 + Tolerance
Response 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 30-2)
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 30-7)
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 325 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 326 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 30-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 327 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 30-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 30-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 328 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 30-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 329 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 30-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 330 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 30-7)
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 30-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 331 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 30-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 30-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 30-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 30-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 30-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 30-2)
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 30-7)
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 332 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 333 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 334 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 335 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 336 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 337 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 338 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 339 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 340 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 30-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 341 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 342 of 432
31. APPENDIX 13. ETHERCAT (ONLY BX30 FILL EC)
EtherCAT interface of the weighing instrument can be done via hub switch or serial bus over two EtherCAT
port.

1. Serial bus connection of instruments. You may connect instruments serial to your EtherCAT bus via
two ports.
2. Star connection. If you connect the instrument to your PLC via hub switch, you can use P1 port on
the instrument.

The EtherCAT interface supports 100Mbit, full duplex operation. ESI file for two port EtherCAT is available in
CD which is supplied together with the instrument.
There are 4 announcement LEDs on the instrument to indicate the interface status as seen below. The
meanings of these LED’s are;

1 ( A ) RUN LED
2 ( B ) ERR LED
3 Link/Activity ( IN port ) Led
4 Link/Activity ( OUT port ) Led
5 EtherCAT ( IN port )
6 EtherCAT ( OUT port )

( A ) RUN LED
LED State Description
Off INIT
Green OPERATIONAL
Green, blinking PRE-OPERATIONAL
Green, single flash SAFE-OPERATIONAL
Red (Fatal Event)

( B ) ERR LED

LED State Description

Off No any error ( or no power )
Invalid configuration; State change received from master is not possible
Red, blinking
due to invalid register or object settings.
Unsolicited state change; Slave device application has changed the
Red, single flash
EtherCAT state autonomously.
Red, double flash Application watchdog timeout
Red Application controller failure

In the case of red LED warning, check cabling, configuration, IP address and device name. Power off the
instrument and reenergize the instrument 30 seconds later.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 343 of 432
LINK/Activity LED

LED State Description

Off No link, no activity
Green Link sensed, no activity
Green, flickering Link sensed, activity exist.

31.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 31.1 – PLC Connection

EtherCAT Connector pin configuration (RJ45)

Pin Signal DIR Description

1 TX+ Out Differential Ethernet transmit data +
2 TX− Out Differential Ethernet transmit data −
3 RX+ In Differential Ethernet receive data +
6 RX− In Differential Ethernet receive data −
4 Not used Terminated
5 Not used Terminated
7 Not used Terminated
8 Not used Terminated
Shield Chassis ground

The HUB connection cabling will be a direct connection as shown:

Figure 31.2 - HUB connection

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

31.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 344 of 432
31.3 ESI Configuration
EtherCAT data structures consist of 2 pcs Input-2 words and 2 pcs Output-2 words. ESI configuration for
PLC programmers is shown in Figure 31.3.

Figure 31.3 – Configuration of module properties for Beckhoff

Input/Output Definition Description

SubIndex 001 1st Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
DI TxPDO-Map
SubIndex 002 2nd Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
SubIndex 001 1st Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
DO RxPDO-Map
SubIndex 002 2nd Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 345 of 432
31.4 EtherCAT Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 31-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
By default, Actual weight value is represented.
Dword
To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(INPUT)

Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
2nd 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dword
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 346 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 31-3 )
Calibration Status ( Refer to Table
00100 4
31-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 31-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 31-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read
10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command
Response 10010 18 + Tolerance
10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 31-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 31-7 )
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 347 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 348 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 31-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 349 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 31-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 31-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 350 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 31-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 351 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 31-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 352 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 31-7 )
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 31-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 353 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 31-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 31-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 31-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 31-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 31-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 31-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 31-7 )
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 354 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 355 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 356 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 357 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 358 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 359 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 360 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 361 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 362 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 31-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 363 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 364 of 432
32. APPENDIX 14. CC-LINK (ONLY BX30 FILL CC)
After setting related parameters you can communicate with BX30Fill via CC-Link network. Supported
CC-Link version is v1.10 and baud rates are 156 kbps (default), 625 kbps, 2,5 Mbps, 5 Mbps and 10 Mbps.

There are 2 LED’s near the CC-Link connector which are;

1 ( A ) RUN LED
2 ( B ) ERR LED
3 CC-Link interface

( A ) Run LED

State Indication
Off No network participation, timeout status (no power)
Green Participating, normal operation
Red Major fault (FATAL error)

( B ) Error LED

State Indication
Off No error detected (no power)
Red Major fault (Exception or FATAL event)
Red, flickering CRC error (temporary flickering)
Red, flashing Station Number or Baud rate has changed since startup (flashing)

In the case of red LED warning, check cabling, configuration and station number. Power off the instrument
and reenergize the instrument 30 seconds later.

32.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 32.1 - PLC Connection

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 365 of 432
CC-Link Connector pin configuration

Pin Signal Description

1 DA PositiveRS485 Rxd/TxD
2 DB NegativeRS485 Rxd/TxD
3 DG Signal ground
4 SLD Cable Shield
5 FG Protective Earth

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

32.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

32.3 CC-Link Configuration

The filling controller has occupied one station area on CC-Link network and station type of filling controller
must be programmed as ‘Remote device station’ in the PLC software. CC-Link configuration for PLC
programmers is shown in Figure 32.2.

Figure 32.2 – Station information

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 366 of 432
 Input/Output Definition Description
RWr0, RWr1 1st Dword Input ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Remote Register ( RWr )
RWr2, RWr3 2nd Dword Input ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Remote Input ( RX ) RX0 ~ RX31 Not used
RWw0, RWw1 1st Dword Output ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Remote Register ( RWw )
RWw2, RWw3 2nd Dword Output ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Remote Output ( RY ) RY0 ~ RY31 Not used

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 367 of 432
32.4 CC-Link Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 32-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
Dword By default, Actual weight value is represented.
(INPUT) To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(RWr0, RWr1)

2nd Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
Dword 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
(RWr2, RWr3) Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 368 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 32-3 )
Calibration Status ( Refer to Table
00100 4
32-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 32-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 32-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read
10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command
Response 10010 18 + Tolerance
10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 32-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 32-7 )
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 369 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 370 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 32-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 371 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 32-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 32-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 372 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 32-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 373 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 32-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 374 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)
(RWw0, RWw1)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
(RWw2, RWw3) Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 32-7 )
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 32-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 375 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 32-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 32-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 32-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 32-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 32-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 32-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 32-7 )
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 376 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 377 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 378 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 379 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 380 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 381 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 382 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 383 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 384 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 32-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 385 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 386 of 432
33. APPENDIX 15. POWERLINK (ONLY BX30 FILL PL)
Powerlink interface of the weighing instrument can be done via hub switch or serial bus over two Powerlink
port.

1. Serial bus connection of instruments. You may connect instruments serial to your Powerlink bus via
two ports.
2. Star connection. If you connect the instrument to your PLC via hub switch, you can use P1 or P2 port
on the instrument. You may change the port, if there is any malfunction on port in usage.

The Powerlink interface is 100Mbit and half duplex. XDD file for two port Powerlink is available in CD which
is supplied together with the instrument.
There are 4 announcement LEDs on the instrument to indicate the interface status as seen below. The
meanings of these LED’s are;

1 ( A ) Status LED
2 ( B ) Error LED
3 Link/Activity LED (port 1)
4 Link/Activity LED (port 2)
5 P1 interface (port 1)
6 P2 interface (port 2)

( A ) Status LED
LED State Description
Off Module is off, initializing, or not active.
NMT_CS_BASIC_ETHERNET
Green, fast flashinga
Basic Ethernet state: no POWERLINK traffic has been detected.
NMT_CS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.
Green, single flash
Only asynchronous data.
NMT_CS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_2.
Green, double flash
Asynchronous and synchronous data. No PDO data.b
NMT_CS_READY_TO_OPERATE.
Green, triple flash
Ready to operate. Asynchronous and synchronous data. No PDO data.b
NMT_CS_OPERATIONAL.
Green Fully operational. Asynchronous and synchronous data. PDO data is sent
and received.
NMT_CS_STOPPED
Green, slow flashingc Module stopped (for controlled shutdown, for example). Asynchronous
and synchronous data. No PDO data.b
Red If the ERROR LED also is red, a fatal event was encountered.

a. On 50 ms, off 50 ms.

b. Any process data sent is declared not valid and received process data must be ignored in this state.
c. On 200 ms, off 200 ms.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 387 of 432
( B ) Error LED

LED State Description

Off No error
If the STATUS LED is not red, a non-fatal error has been detected.
Red
If the STATUS LED is red, a fatal event was encountered.

In the case of red LED warning, check cabling, configuration, IP address and device name. Power off the
instrument and reenergize the instrument 30 seconds later.

LINK/Activity LED

LED State Description

Off No link.
Green Link, no traffic.
Green, flashing Link and traffic.

33.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 33.1 - PLC Connection

Powerlink Connector pin configuration (RJ45)

Pin Signal DIR Description

1 TX+ Out Differential Ethernet transmit data +
2 TX− Out Differential Ethernet transmit data −
3 RX+ In Differential Ethernet receive data +
6 RX− In Differential Ethernet receive data −
4 Not used Terminated
5 Not used Terminated
7 Not used Terminated
8 Not used Terminated
Shield Chassis ground

The HUB connection cabling will be a direct connection as shown below:

Figure 33.2 - HUB connection

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 388 of 432
Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

33.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

33.3 XDD Configuration

Powerlink data structures consist of 2 pcs Input-2 words and 2 pcs Output-2 words. XDD configuration for
PLC programmers is shown in Figure 33.3.

Figure 33.3 – Configuration of module properties with XDD file

Data Length Description

1_Dword_Input_I2001_S01 1st Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
2_Dword_Input_I2001_S02 2nd Dword ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
1_Dword_Output_I2002_S01Out 1st Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
2_Dword_Output_I2002_S02Out 2nd Dword ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 389 of 432
33.4 Powerlink Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 33-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
By default, Actual weight value is represented.
Dword
To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(INPUT)

Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
2nd 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dword
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 390 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 33-3 )
Calibration Status ( Refer to Table
00100 4
33-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 33-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 33-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read
10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command
Response 10010 18 + Tolerance
10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 33-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 33-7 )
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 391 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 392 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 33-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 393 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 33-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 33-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 394 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 33-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 395 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 33-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 396 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 33-7 )
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 33-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 397 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 33-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 33-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 33-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 33-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 33-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 33-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 33-7 )
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 398 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 399 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 400 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 401 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 402 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 403 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 404 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 405 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 406 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 33-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 407 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 408 of 432
34. APPENDIX 16. CC-LINK IE FIELD (ONLY BX30 FILL IE)
After setting related parameters you can communicate with BX30Fill via CC-Link network.
( Will be released in Q3 2019 ).

There are 2 LED’s near the CC-Link connector which are;

1 ( A ) NS/RUN LED
2 ( B ) AS/ERROR LED
3 Link/Activity LED (port 1)
4 Link/Activity LED (port 2)
5 P1 interface (port 1)
6 P2 interface (port 2)

( A ) NS/RUN LED

State Indication
No power
Off
Operation abnormal
Green Operation normal
Fatal Event
Red
If NS/RUN and AS/ERR turn red, this indicates a fatal event.

( B ) AS/ERROR LED

State Indication
Off No error detected (or no power)
Error
Red An error occurred in the device. If NS/RUN is off, the device enters state
EXCEPTION. If NS/RUN and AS/ERR turn red, this indicates a fatal event.

In the case of red LED warning, check cabling, configuration and station number. Power off the instrument
and reenergize the instrument 30 seconds later.

34.1 Electrical Connection

Figure 34.1 - PLC Connection

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 409 of 432
CC-Link IE Field Connector pin configuration

Pin Signal Description

1 TP1+ Transmit/Receive 1 positive
2 TP1- Transmit/Receive 1 negative
3 TP2+ Transmit/Receive 2 positive
6 TP3+ Transmit/Receive 3 positive
4 TP3- Transmit/Receive 3 negative
5 TP2- Transmit/Receive 2 negative
7 TP4+ Transmit/Receive 4 positive
8 TP4- Transmit/Receive 4 negative
Connected to FE through a 1 nF capacitor and a 1 Mohm
Housing Shield resistor. Note that the connector shields are separated to
prevent ground currents.

Pin configuration of digital input and output connector is described in Appendix 1.

34.2 Data Format

Data format of weight value can be programmable for Floating point (IEEE 754) or Integer. Refer to
parameter 191.

34.3 CC-Link IE Configuration

The filling controller has occupied one station area on CC-Link network and station type of filling controller
must be programmed as ‘Remote device station’ in the PLC software. CC-Link configuration for PLC
programmers is shown in Figure 32.2.

Figure 34.2 – Station information

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 410 of 432
 Input/Output Definition Description
RWr0, RWr1 1st Dword Input ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Remote Register ( RWr )
RWr2, RWr3 2nd Dword Input ( BX30Fill Output to PLC Input )
Remote Input ( RX ) RX0 ~ RX31 Not used
RWw0, RWw1 1st Dword Output ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Remote Register ( RWw )
RWw2, RWw3 2nd Dword Output ( PLC Output to BX30Fill Input )
Remote Output ( RY ) RY0 ~ RY31 Not used

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 411 of 432
34.4 CC-Link Data Structure
The write and read table are similarly structured and bitwise of a Dword descripted below

B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
Dword
(Only read)
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

Table 34-1 – Bitwise of a Dword

BX30Fill Output to PLC Input

1st
Dword By default, Actual weight value is represented.
(INPUT) To represent other weight or calibration status, refer to next Dword.
(RWr0, RWr1)

2nd Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out In In In In In In
Dword 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
(INPUT) Process Centre Gross Cmd
(RWr2, RWr3) Error codes of BX30Fill Unit Error
P.Tare SD Read command response
of zero Net Flg

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( INPUT )

Bit Number Description

B31… B22 Digital Outputs Output bit status ( Active = 1 )
B21… B16 Digital Inputs Input bit status ( Active = 1 )
Bin Dec Descriptions
0000 0 No error found
0001 1 ADC out
0010 2 ADC over
Error Codes 0011 3 ADC under
B15… B12
of BX30Fill 0100 4 System Error
0101 5 In programming mode
0110 6 Low/High Voltage Error
0111 7 Tilt Switch is active
1000 8 Master/Slave Communication error
0 First unit
B11 Unit
1 Second unit
0 No error
B10 Process Error
1 Check “Process error messages” in the read command
0 Preset tare is passive
B9 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B8 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Gross
B7 Indication
1 Net
Stability 0 Stable
B6
Detection 1 Unstable

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 412 of 432
 Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 34-3 )
Calibration Status ( Refer to Table
00100 4
34-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 34-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 34-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
Read
10001 17 Target value
B5 … B1 Command
Response 10010 18 + Tolerance
10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 34-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 34-7 )
B0 CMD Flag Toggles The command is applied successfully

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 413 of 432
 Process error messages (always 32 bit integer)
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Process error
messages’. Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword Description

B31 … B16 Not in use
Bin Dec Process state
00000000 0 No process (Adc out, Over, Under etc.)
00000001 1 Weight Mode
00000010 2 Ready
00000011 3 Taring
00000100 4 Zeroing
00000101 5 Coarse Feed
00000110 6 Middle Feed
00000111 7 Fine Feeding
Process
00001000 8 Valve to Down
State
00001001 9 Valve to Up
B15 … B8
00001010 10 Settling
Refer to
section 19.1 00001011 11 Filling
00001100 12 End of Fill
00001101 13 Discharging
00001110 14 Discharging Delay
00001111
15-19 Not used
00010011
00010100 20 Run Inactive
00010101 21 Inhibited
00010110 22 Lance Position
00010111 23 In Standby mode
Bin Dec Messages
00000000 0 No process error
00000001 1 Batch Finished
Process 00000010 2 By-Pass
Warning 00000011 3 Not used
Messages 00000100 4 Reset
00000101 5 Interrupted
Refer to 00000110 6 Hold Status
section 19.1 00000111 7 Check Fill Stop
00001000 8 Check Discharge Stop
00001001 9 Alarm
00001010 10 Inhibited
B7 ... B0
10000000 128 Feeding Gate is not Opening or Closing
10000001 129 Tare Range Error
10000010 130 Taring could not execute.
Process 10000011 131 Zeroing Fail
error
10000100 132 Zeroing Range
Messages
10000101 133 Filling Time
Refer to 10000110 134 Valve Position
section 19.2 10000111 135 Wrong Position
10001000 136 Not used
10001001 137 Maxfill Limit
10001010 138 +Tolerance Error
10001011 139 Stable Error

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 414 of 432
 10001100 140 Clmp Is Open
10001101 141 Loadcell Error
10001110 142 -Tolerance Error
10001111 143 Discharge Gate
10010000 144 Tilted
10010001 145 Not used
10010010 146 Multicycle filling?
Table 34-2 – Process error messages

ALL Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘ALL Status’. Refer to
2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

0 None
B31
1 No decimal point
0 None
B30
1 Decimal point is X.X
0 None
B29 Place of decimal point
1 Decimal point is X.XX
0 None
B28
1 Decimal point is X.XXX
0 None
B27
1 Decimal point is X.XXXX
B22 … B26 Not in use
0 Hold is passive
B21 Hold
1 Hold is active
0 By-Pass is passive
B20 By-Pass
1 By-Pass is active
0 Inhibit is passive
B19 Inhibit
1 Inhibit is active
0 Interrupt is passive
B18 Interrupt
1 Interrupt is active
0 No filling error
B17 Process Error Process error.
1
(Check the ‘Process error messages’)
0 Filling mode
B16 Operation mode
1 Basic weighing mode
B14 … B15 Not in use
0 Passive
B13 High resolution status
1 Active
0 Weight is out of zero range
B12 Centre of zero
1 Weight is in zero range
0 Passive
B11 Key lock status
1 Active
B7-B10 Not used
0 First Unit (power on unit)
B6 Unit indication
1 Second Unit
0 Not power on zeroed
B5 Power On Zero
1 Zeroed with power on zero
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 415 of 432
 0 Preset tare is passive
B4 Preset Tare
1 Preset tare is active
0 Gross mode
B3 Indication
1 Net mode
0 Stable
B2 Motion Detection
1 Unstable
B1 Not used
B0 Not used
Table 34-3 – ALL Status table

Calibration Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Calibration Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B11 Not in use
0 No Error
B10 The Calibration DIP switch is not ‘On’ position.
1
- Check the calibration DIP switch.
0 No Error
Scale unstable
B9
1 - Wait until scale become stable
- Check grounding wiring
0 No Error
B8 Calibration load value entry Error
1
- Test weight is too small. Increase the weight
0 No Error
Calibration Error
B7 - Calibration loading is not enough
1
- Check test weight loading
- Check load cell connections
0 No Error
B6 Instrument cannot be calibrating
1
- Load cell signal is very low or too high
0 No Error
Instrument cannot be calibrating
B5
1 - Check load cell cable
- Re-energize the instrument
0 No Error
ADC Error
B4
1 - Re-energize the instrument
- If seen again, change the board.
0 No Error
B3 Calibration Timeout
1
- Restart calibration
0 None
B2
1 Span calibration in process …
0 None
B1
1 Zero calibration in process …
0 Not ready for calibration
B0
1 Ready for calibration
Table 34-4 – Calibration status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 416 of 432
 Digital Inputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )
1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Inputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B25 Not in use
B24 TILT
B23 FBU2
B22 FBU1
B21 IN-B
B20 IN-A
B19 TMR3
B18 TMR2
B17 TMR1
B16 S2
B15 BYPA 0 – Passive
B14 EMPT 1 – Active
B13 DROP
B12 HOLD Refer to related filling mode and
B11 INTE select inputs for details.
B10 REJE Page 44 and 164
B9 ACK
B8 INHI
B7 RUN
B6 Not used
B5 Input-6
B4 Input-5
B3 Input-4
B2 Input-3
B1 Input-2
B0 Input-1
Table 34-5 – Digital inputs status

Digital Outputs Status ( always 32 bit integer )

1st Dword (INPUT) indicated in the table below when read command selected as ‘Digital Outputs Status’.
Refer to 2nd Dword (OUTPUT) to select this command.

Bit Number 1st Dword (input) Description

B31 … B29 Not in use
B28 FBU2
B27 FBU1
B26 LOGI
B25 TMR3
B24 TMR2 0 – Passive
B23 TMR1 1 – Active
B22 UNDE
B21 ETOL Refer to related filling mode and
B20 EFIL select inputs for details.
B19 ZR G Page 44 and 162

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 417 of 432
 B18 ZR I
B17 ALAR (continuation of previous page)
B16 VIBR
B15 FGAT
B14 FEED
B13 END
B12 EMPT
B11 PROG
B10 Not used
B9 Output-10
B8 Output-9
B7 Output-8
B6 Output-7
B5 Output-6
B4 Output-5
B3 Output-4
B2 Output-3
B1 Output-2
B0 Output-1
Table 34-6 – Digital outputs status

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 418 of 432
PLC Output to BX30Fill Input

1st
Dword Next Dword defines the usage of this Dword.
(OUTPUT)
(RWw0, RWw1)

Filling By-
2nd Int. SFE Reset Expanded Commands List
start Pass
Dword
(OUTPUT) New
(RWw2, RWw3) Not used Command List Read Data Selection
CMD

Description of Input 2nd Dword ( OUTPUT )

Bit Number Descriptions

A transition from 0 to1 activates the interrupt function and
B31 Interrupt
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the interrupt function.
B30 Not used
Start for emptying A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for emptying”
B29
(SFE) command.
B28 Reset A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Reset” command.
B27 Start for filling A transition form 0 to1 activates the “Start for filling” command.
A transition from 0 to1 activates the by-pass function and
B26 By-Pass
transition from 1 to 0 deactivates the by-pass function.
B25 Not used
B24… B16 Select an item in the Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 34-7 )
B15… B11 Not used
Bin Dec Descriptions
00000 0 None command is activated
00001 1 Zero
00010 2 Tare
00011 3 Clear
00100 4 Print
00101 5 Adjust zero calibration
Calibration
Command 00110 6 Adjust span calibration (1)
B10 … B6 List 00111 7 Total Load Cell Capacity (1)
01000 8 Average mV/V value (1) eCal
Coefficients
01001 9 Dead Load value (1)
01010 10 Save the coefficients of eCal Refer to par. [613]
01011 11
Not used
01101 13
Control the digital outputs manually [ 1 ]
01110 14
( Refer to Table 34-6 for meanings of bits )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 419 of 432
 10001 17 Target value [ 1 ]
B10 … B6 (continuation 10010 18 + Tolerance
of previous 10011 19 Coarse feed value [ 1 ]
page) 10100 20 Medium feed value [ 1 ]
10101 21 Fine feed value [ 1 ]
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Not used
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26
Not used
11110 30
11111 31 Use the Expanded Command list ( Refer to Table 34-7 )
00000 0 Actual weight ( Net if the indication is in Net )
00001 1 Gross weight
00010 2 Tare weight
00011 3 ALL Status ( Refer to Table 34-3 )
00100 4 Calibration Status ( Refer to Table 34-4 )
00101 5
Not used
01100 12
01101 13 Digital Inputs status ( Refer to Table 34-5 )
01110 14 Digital Outputs status ( Refer to Table 34-6 )
01111 15
Not used
10000 16
10001 17 Target value
Read Data 10010 18 + Tolerance
B5 ... B1
Selection 10011 19 Coarse feed value
10100 20 Medium feed value
10101 21 Fine feed value
10110 22 Label number (CN)
10111 23 Last filled value
11000 24 Quantity of Erasable Accumulation
11001 25 Total of Erasable Accumulation
11010 26 The current day’s Accumulation
11011 27 Yesterday’s Accumulation
11100 28
Not used
11101 29
11110 30 Process error messages ( Refer to Table 34-2 )
11111 31 Expanded Commands List ( Refer to Table 34-7 )
B0 New CMD Toggle Apply commands which are listed in this table.
(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword, then apply this command with New CMD

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 420 of 432
 Expanded Command List

IMPORTANT NOTE:
a) Scale configuration and receipt parameters (address 63 and above) in the Expanded command list must
be loaded at Ready status.
b) To save the receipt parameters into controller; first, load receipt parameters between address 252 to
405 and then apply the command ‘Save receipt parameters’ (address 20).
c) The expanded command list below is valid for instrument software version 01.05 or higher versions.
Refer to Manual version 1.1 for command list of instrument software version 01.04 or lower versions.

Here 1st Dword (Input) is the data receiving from PLC and the “B24 … B16” bits describe below.

Bit
Description
No
Bin Dec Commands

Voltage of power supply(2)

000000000 0 R
The value is indicated with 0.1 VDC increment.
Load cell millivolt value(2) (Only BX30Fill)
000000001 1 R Millivolt of active scale is indicated with 0.01
mV increment.
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 None
000000010 2 R Command status (2) 1 Cmd. is processing
2 Command is done
3 Command failed
Reprint the last 0 None
000000011 3 R/W
label (1) (2) 1 Reprint the last label
0 Enable
000000100 4 R/W High resolution (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 From first to second
000000101 5 W Unit change (1) 1 From second to first
B24 Expand. 0 Enable
… 000000110 6 R/W Key lock (1) (2)
Cmds 1 Disable
B16 List 000000111 7 R/W Mode (1) (2)
0 Filling mode
1 Basic w. mode
0 None
000001000 8 W Start of filling (1) 1 Start of filling
Start of Emptying / 0 None
000001001 9 W
Discharge (1) 1 Start of Discharge
0 None
000001010 10 W Reset (1) 1 Reset
0 Enable
000001011 11 R/W Run (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001100 12 R/W By-Pass (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001101 13 R/W Hold (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001110 14 R/W Interrupt (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 Enable
000001111 15 R/W Inhibit (1) (2) 1 Disable
0 None
000010000 16 W Error ACK /Resume (1) 1 Error Ack / Resume
0 None
000010001 17 R/W Reject /Do not record (1) (2) 1 Reject/Do not record

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 421 of 432
 Empty / Discharge the 0 Enable
000010010 18 R/W
(cont. of scale (1) (2) 1 Disable
previous 000010011 19 R/W Standby (1) (2)
0 Enable
page) 1 Disable
Save receipt 0 None
000010100 20 W
parameters (1) 1 Save
000010101 21
Not used
000011001 25
000011010 26 R Quantity of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011011 27 R Total of Batch/Bulk (2)
000011100 28 R/W Quantity of Erasable Accumulation (1) (2)
000011101 29 R/W Total of Erasable Accu. (1) (2)
000011110 30 R Quantity of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000011111 31 R Total of the Current day’s Accu. (2)
000100000 32 R Quantity of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100001 33 R Total of Yesterday’s Accu. (2)
000100010 34 R/W Quantity of Grand Total (1) (2)
000100011 35 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( Low Dword )
000100100 36 R/W Grand Total (1) (2) ( High Dword )
Year, Month, day (1) (2) Date and time
000100101 37 R/W
(YYYYMMDD) settings.
Hour & minute (1) (2) Refer to par. 24-.
000100110 38 R/W (always BCD format)
(0000HHMM)
000100010 39
Not used
000111110 62
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
0 No
000111111 63 R/W Dynamic filter (1) (2) 1 Low
2 Medium
3 High
0 No
1 Extra Low
2 Very Low
3 Low
001000000 64 R/W Filter (1) (2) 4 Medium
5 High
6 Very High
7 Extra High
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
2 ± 2%LK
001000001 65 R/W Power on zero (1) (2) 3 ± 10%
4 + 15%, - 5%
5 ± 20%
0 Disable
1 ± 2%
001000010 66 R/W Zeroing Range (1) (2) 2 ± 3%
3 ± 20%
4 ± 50%

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 422 of 432
 0 Disable
(cont. of 1 ± 0,3d
previous 001000011 Auto Zero 2 ± 0,5d
67 R/W
page) Tracking (1) (2) 3 ± 1d
4 ± 2d
5 ± 3d
0 No
001000100 68 R/W Tare (1) (2) 1 Yes
0 ± 0,3d
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
3 ± 2d
Stability
001000101 69 R/W 4 ± 3d
Detection Range (1) (2) 5 ± 4d
6 ± 5d
7 ± 9d
8 Disable
001000110 70 R/W Stability Time (1) (2) Refer to par. [517] on page 179
0 g
1 kg
2 t
001000111 71 R/W Unit (1) (2) 3 lb
4 No unit
5 kLb
0 Single range
1 2 x Multi Range
001001000 72 R/W Range (1) (2) 2 3 x Multi Range
3 2 x Multi Interval
4 3 x Multi Interval
001001001 73 R/W Capacity-1 (1) (2) Refer to par. 523 on page 180
0 XXXXOO
1 XXXXXO
Decimal 2 XXXXXX
001001010 74 R/W
point-1 (1) (2) 3 XXXXX.X
4 XXXX.XX
5 XXX.XXX
0 X1
001001011 75 R/W Increment-1 (1) (2) 1 X2
2 X5
001001100 76 R/W Capacity-2 (1) (2)
001001101 77 R/W Decimalpoint-2(1) (2)
001001110 78 R/W Increment-2 (1) (2)
001001111 79 R/W Capacity-3 (1) (2)
001010000 80 R/W Decimalpoint-3(1) (2)
001010001 81 R/W Increment-3 (1) (2)
0 Over ind. after Max
1 1 d more than Max
Limit of 2 5 d more than Max
001010010 82 R/W
Indication (1) (2) 3 9 d more than Max
4 2% more than Max
5 5% more than Max
0 Subtractive tare
001010011 83 R/W Tare type (1) (2) 1 Additive tare
2 Both
001010100 84 R/W Maximum tare (1) (2) Refer to par. [527] on page 180

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 423 of 432
 001010101 85
Not Used
(cont. of 010000000 128
previous Refer to par. [311] on page 158
page) 0 OPEN
1 BUNG
2 BOTT
3 PACK
4 BAG
010000001 129 R/W Filling modes (1) (2) 5 BIG
6 VENT
7 1BAG
8 nBAG
9 nPAC
10 TANK
11 WOUT
Refer to par. [312] on page 159
Start input signal 0 PULS
010000010 130 R/W
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
2 AUTO
Refer to par. [313] on page 159
Discharge input signal
010000011 131 R/W 0 PULS
type (1) (2) 1 LEVE
Refer to par. [314] on page 159
Start filling or
010000100 132 R/W emptying/discharging at 0 FILL
power on (1) (2) 1 DISC
Refer to par. [315] on page 159
Feeding speed 0 1
010000101 133 R/W
Quantity (1) (2) 1 2
2 3
Refer to par. [316] on page 159
0 C
010000110 134 R/W Feeding outputs (1) (2) 1 FC
2 FMC
010000111 135 R/W Max. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [317] on page 159

010001000 136 R/W Min. target of filling (1) (2) Refer to par. [318] on page 159

Scale quantity at master

010001001 137 R/W Refer to par. [319] on page 159
slave operation (1) (2)
010001010 138
R/W Not used
010001111 143
Refer to par. [321] on page 160
Feeding gate position 0 NO
010010000 144 R/W
control type (1) (2) 1 1 POS
2 2 POS
Switch type on the Refer to par. [322] on page 160
feeding gate for 0 NO
010010001 145 R/W
checking its 1 NCLO
position (1) (2) 2 NOPE
Refer to par. [323] on page 160
Switch on the discharge 0 NO
010010010 146 R/W
gate (1) (2) 1 NCLO
2 NOPE
Refer to par. [324] on page 160
0 BIU
Lance position control
010010011 147 R/W 1 BMIU
type (1) (2) 2 BIOU
3 BMIO

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 424 of 432
 Refer to par. [325] on page 160
(cont. of For Open For Bung
Movement of valve or mode mode
previous
010010100 148 R/W lifter at liquid filling 0 NO VALV
page)
modes (1) (2) 1 LIFT NO
2 VALV LIFT
Refer to par. [326] on page 160
Movement of valve or 0 NO
010010101 149 R/W lifter at liquid big bag 1 CLAM
mode 2 UP-A
3 UP-B
010010110 150
R/W Not used
010011110 158
010011111 159 R/W Select input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [331] on page 161
010100000 160 R/W Select input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [332] on page 161
010100001 161 R/W Select input 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [333] on page 161
010100010 162 R/W Select input 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [334] on page 162
010100011 163 R/W Select input 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [335] on page 162
010100100 164 R/W Select input 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [336] on page 162
010100101 165 R/W Select input 7 (1) (2) Refer to par. [337] on page 162
010100110 166 R/W Select input 8 (1) (2) Refer to par. [338] on page 162
010100111 167 R/W Select input 9 (1) (2) Refer to par. [339] on page 162
010101000 168 R/W Select output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33A] on page 162
010101001 169 R/W Select output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33B] on page 163
010101010 170 R/W Select output 3 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33C] on page 163
010101011 171 R/W Select output 4 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33D] on page 163
010101100 172 R/W Select output 5 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33E] on page 164
010101101 173 R/W Select output 6 (1) (2) Refer to par. [33F] on page 164
Refer to par. [341] on page 164
Preact, Medium and Fine
010101110 174 R/W 0 VAL
feeding entries (1) (2)
1 DEV
Refer to par. [342] on page 164
Weight displaying at
010101111 175 R/W 0 INCR
Filling (1) (2)
1 DECR
Refer to par. [343] on page 164
0 ACTU
010110000 176 R/W Display after filling (1) (2) 1 FILL
2 TARG
Refer to par. [344] on page 164
0 NO
1 TARE
2 GROS
Information display 3 RCPT
010110001 177 R/W (1) (2) 4 R+T
5 R+Q
6 Q+∑
7 TOTA
8 PHAS
010110010 178
R/W Not used
010111100 188
The function of magnify
010111101 189 R/W Refer to par. [351] on page 164
key (1) (2)
The function of change
010111110 190 R/W Refer to par. [352] on page 165
key (1) (2)

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 425 of 432
 010111111 191 R/W The func. of F1 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [353] on page 165
(cont. of 011000000 192 R/W The func. of F2 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [354] on page 165
previous
page) 011000001 193 R/W The func. of F3 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [355] on page 166
011000010 194 R/W The func. of F4 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [356] on page 166
011000011 195 R/W The func. of F5 key (1) (2) Refer to par. [357] on page 166
011000100 196
R/W Not used
011001001 201
011001010 202 R/W Reserve Input 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [371] on page 167
011001011 203 R/W Reserve Input 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [372] on page 167
011001100 204 R/W Reserve output 1 (1) (2) Refer to par. [373] on page 167
011001101 205 R/W Reserve output 2 (1) (2) Refer to par. [374] on page 167
011001110 206
R/W Not used
011111011 251
011111100 252 R/W Target (1) (2)
011111101 253 R/W + Tolerance (1) (2)
011111110 254 R/W - Tolerance (1) (2)
011111111 255 R/W Not used
100000000 256 R/W Coarse (1) (2)
Refer to section 3
100000001 257 R/W Medium (1) (2)
100000010 258 R/W Fine (1) (2)
100000011 259 R/W PT (Specific Tare) (1) (2)
100000100 260 R/W Qty of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000101 261 R/W Total of Batch/Bulk (1) (2)
100000110 262
R/W Not used
100001001 265
Dec Descr. of 1st Dword
Gross, net or multicycle Refer to par. [411] on page 168
100001010 266 R/W filling (1) (2) 0 NET
1 GROSS
2 MULT
Refer to par. [412] on page 168
0 No
1 +/-T
100001011 267 R/W Tolerance control (1) (2)
2 +T -T
3 +/-F
4 +F -F
Refer to par. [413] on page 168
0 AUTO
100001100 268 R/W Taring at filling (1) (2) 1 AV 5
2 AV10
3 ACON
4 SPEC
100001101 269 R/W Min. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [414] on page 168

100001110 270 R/W Max. tare value (1) (2) Refer to par. [415] on page 169

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 426 of 432
 100001111 271 R/W Valve force (1) (2) Refer to par. [416] on page 169
(cont. of
previous 100010000 272 R/W Lance B. / Lift W. (1) (2) Refer to par. [417] on page 169
page) 100010001 273 R/W Lance Middle (1) (2) Refer to par. [418] on page 169

100010010 274 R/W Overfill weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [419] on page 169
Refer to par. [41A] on page 169
0 NO
100010011 275 R/W Batch filling (1) (2) 1 QTY
2 ∑T
3 Q+∑T
4 BULK
Refer to par. [41B] on page 169
100010100 276 R/W Soft start method (1) (2) 0 NO
1 FINE
2 MED
100010101 277 R/W Soft start time (1) (2) Refer to par. [41C] on page 169
The emptying /
100010110 278 R/W Refer to par. [41D] on page 169
discharge type (1) (2)
Empty/Discharge weight
100010111 279 R/W Refer to par. [41E] on page 170
/ Remaining weight (1) (2)
Emptying / discharge
100011000 280 R/W Refer to par. [41F] on page 170
time (1) (2)
100011001 281
R/W Not used
100100111 295
Refer to par. [431] on page 170
Correction technic at 0 NO
100101000 296 R/W Feeding / Discharging (1) 1 AUTO
(2)
2 TIME
3 SMRT
100101001 297 R/W Fine feeding time (1) (2) Refer to par. [432] on page 170
100101010 298 R/W Preact adj. frequency (1) (2) Refer to par. [433] on page 170
100101011 299 R/W Sampling size (1) (2) Refer to par. [434] on page 170
Preact correction ratio in
100101100 300 R/W Refer to par. [435] on page 170
percent (1) (2)
100101101 301 R/W Zeroing freq. (1) (2) Refer to par. [436] on page 171
Refer to par. [437] on page 171
0 NO
100101110 302 R/W Jogging (1) (2)
1 TIME
2 AUTO
100101111 303 R/W Jogging on time (1) (2) Refer to par. [438] on page 171
100110000 304 R/W Jogging off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [439] on page 171
100110001 305 R/W Min. filling error (1) (2) Refer to par. [43A] on page 171
100110010 306 R/W Max. error limit (1) (2) Refer to par. [43B] on page 171
Refer to par. [43C] on page 171
0 No
1 ± 0,5d
2 ± 1d
Motion window at filling 3 ± 2d
100110011 307 R/W
process (1) (2) 4 ± 3d
5 ± 5d
6 ± 8d
7 ± 10d
8 ± 15d

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 427 of 432
 100110100 308
R/W Not used
(cont. of 100110110 310
previous 100110111 311 R/W Zeroing delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [441] on page 172
page) 100111000 312 R/W Taring delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [442] on page 172
100111001 313 R/W Stbl. check delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [443] on page 172
100111010 314 R/W Max. stbl. time (1) (2) Refer to par. [444] on page 172
100111011 315 R/W Start delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [445] on page 172
End of batch output
100111100 316 R/W Refer to par. [446] on page 172
delay (1) (2)
Coarse and medium feed
100111101 317 R/W Refer to par. [447] on page 172
control delay (1) (2)
100111110 318 R/W Fine feed ctrl delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [448] on page 172
FG DEL, VALV DEL or
100111111 319 R/W Refer to par. [449] on page 172
LIFT DEL (1) (2)
101000000 320 R/W Complete delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44A] on page 173
101000001 321 R/W Catch delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44B] on page 173
101000010 322 R/W Clamp release delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [44C] on page 173
101000011 323 R/W Maximum filling time (1) (2) Refer to par. [44D] on page 173
101000100 324
R/W Not used
101000101 325
Refer to par. [451] on page 173
Analogue output 0 NO
101000110 326 R/W
Type (1) (2) 1 0-20
2 0-10
101000111 327 R/W For Coarse feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [452] on page 173

101001000 328 R/W For Medium feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [453] on page 173

101001001 329 R/W For Fine feed (1) (2) Refer to par. [454] on page 173
101001010 330
R/W Not used
101010100 340
Refer to par. [461] on page 174
Weighing operation type 0 SUBT
101010101 341 R/W
of the machine (1) (2) 1 NO
2 ADDI
Container quantity on the
101010110 342 R/W Refer to par. [462] on page 174
palette (1) (2)
Refer to par. [463] on page 174
Operation at Batch filling
101010111 343 R/W (1) (2) 0 STOP
1 FILL
101011000 344
R/W Not used
101100011 355
101100100 356 R/W Alarm Setpoint (1) (2) Refer to par. [471] on page 174
101100101 357 R/W Alarm time (1) (2) Refer to par. [472] on page 174
101100110 358 R/W Min. Vibration weight (1) (2) Refer to par. [473] on page 174
101100111 359 R/W Max. Vibration weight(1) (2) Refer to par. [474] on page 174
101101000 360 R/W Vibration delay (1) (2) Refer to par. [475] on page 174
101101001 361 R/W Vibration time (1) (2) Refer to par. [476] on page 174
101101010 362 R/W Zero range (1) (2) Refer to par. [477] on page 174
101101011 363
R/W Not used
101110010 370
BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 428 of 432
 Refer to par. [481] on page 175
(cont. of 101110011 0 SELE
371 R/W Timer 1 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
previous
2 OUT
page)
101110100 372 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [482] on page 175
Refer to par. [483] on page 175
0 Type A
1 Type B
101110101 373 R/W Timer 1 Type (1) (2) 2 Type C
3 Type D
4 Type E
5 Type F
101110110 374 R/W Timer 1 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [484] on page 175
101110111 375 R/W Timer 1 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [485] on page 175
Refer to par. [486] on page 175
0 SELE
101111000 376 R/W Timer 2 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111001 377 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [487] on page 175
101111010 378 R/W Timer 2 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [488] on page 175
101111011 379 R/W Timer 2 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [489] on page 175
101111100 380 R/W Timer 2 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48A] on page 176
Refer to par. [48B] on page 176
0 SELE
101111101 381 R/W Timer 3 Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
101111110 382 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [48C] on page 176
101111111 383 R/W Timer 3 Type (1) (2) Refer to par. [48D] on page 176
110000000 384 R/W Timer 3 On time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48E] on page 176
110000001 385 R/W Timer 3 Off time (1) (2) Refer to par. [48F] on page 176
110000010 386
R/W Not used
110010000 400
Refer to par. [4A1] on page176
0 A+B
1 AxB
2 A+NB
110010001 401 R/W Logical functions (1) (2) 3 AxNB
4 S-R
5 NS-R
6 N∑
7 NAB
Refer to par. [4A2] on page 176
0 SELE
110010010 402 R/W A Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010011 403 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A3] on page 177
Refer to par. [4A4] on page 177
0 SELE
110010100 404 R/W B Trigger (1) (2) 1 IN
2 OUT
110010101 405 R/W Number (1) (2) Refer to par. [4A5] on page 177
Table 34-7 – Expanded command list

(1) Write this command after writing values to 1st Dword (Output) then apply this command with New CMD.
(2) To access the related value, read 1st Dword (Input).

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 429 of 432
Programming steps of frequent used commands:
Reading a weight value:
1. Check the B12…B15 bits of ‘BX30Fill Output to PLC Input 2nd Dword’.
2. If there is not any error, read the weight value ( gross, net or tare ).

Zero Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Zero Calibration’ command and apply New CMD to start Zero calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during zero calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Zero calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

Span Calibration procedure:

1. Check the Bit-0 of Calibration Status. it should be '1'(set) to start adjustment.
2. Write ‘Adjust Span Calibration’ command after writing test weight values to 1st Dword, then apply
this command with New CMD to start Span calibration.
3. Check the Bit-1 of Calibration Status. it is '1'(set) during span calibration process.
4. The Bit-0 of Calibration Status changes to '1'(set) at the end of the Span calibration.
5. If the Bit-3~Bit-10 of Calibration Status is '1'(set), check the description to understand the
calibration error.

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 430 of 432
NOTES:

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 431 of 432
NOTES:

BX30Fill Technical Manual, Rev. 1.2, January 2020 Page 432 of 432
Kimya Sanayicileri Organize Sanayi Bölgesi Organik Cad. No:31
Tepeören, 34956 Istanbul, TURKEY
Tel : +90 216 593 26 30 (pbx) Fax : +90 216 593 26 38
e-mail: [email protected]
http:// www.baykon.com